Agilent 4155C Agilent 4156C
Agilent 4155C
Semiconductor Parameter
Analyzer
Agilent 4156C
Precision Semiconductor
Parameter Analyzer
GPIB Command Reference
Agilent Technologies
Notices
© Agilent Technologies 2001 - 2008
Warranty
No part of this manual may be reproduced in
any form or by any means (including electronic storage and retrieval or translation
into a foreign language) without prior agreement and written consent from Agilent
Technologies, Inc. as governed by United
States and international copyright laws.
The material contained in this document is provided “as is,” and is subject to being changed, without notice,
in future editions. Further, to the maximum extent permitted by applicable
law, Agilent disclaims all warranties,
either express or implied, with regard
to this manual and any information
contained herein, including but not
limited to the implied warranties of
merchantability and fitness for a particular purpose. Agilent shall not be
liable for errors or for incidental or
consequential damages in connection with the furnishing, use, or performance of this document or of any
information contained herein. Should
Agilent and the user have a separate
written agreement with warranty
terms covering the material in this
document that conflict with these
terms, the warranty terms in the separate agreement shall control.
Manual Part Number
04156-90050
Edition
Edition 1, January 2001
Edition 2, June 2001
Edition 3, December 2001
Edition 4, January 2003
Edition 5, March 2004
Edition 6, March 2008
Agilent Technologies, Inc.
5301 Stevens Creek Blvd
Santa Clara, CA 95051 USA
Technology Licenses
The hardware and/or software described in
this document are furnished under a license
and may be used or copied only in accordance with the terms of such license.
Restricted Rights Legend
If software is for use in the performance of a
U.S. Government prime contract or subcontract, Software is delivered and licensed as
“Commercial computer software” as
defined in DFAR 252.227-7014 (June 1995),
or as a “commercial item” as defined in FAR
2.101(a) or as “Restricted computer software” as defined in FAR 52.227-19 (June
1987) or any equivalent agency regulation or
contract clause. Use, duplication or disclosure of Software is subject to Agilent Technologies’ standard commercial license
terms, and non-DOD Departments and
Agencies of the U.S. Government will
receive no greater than Restricted Rights as
defined in FAR 52.227-19(c)(1-2) (June
1987). U.S. Government users will receive
no greater than Limited Rights as defined in
FAR 52.227-14 (June 1987) or DFAR
252.227-7015 (b)(2) (November 1995), as
applicable in any technical data.
In This Manual
Agilent 4155C/4156C provides three command modes to control the 4155C/4156C via
GPIB interface. You can control the 4155C/4156C using one of the following command
modes.
•
4155/4156 SCPI command mode
SCPI means Standard Commands for Programmable Instruments. This mode is the
default mode of the 4155C/4156C, and allows you to control the 4155C/ 4156C
functions except for the timestamp, search, and the enhanced stop condition the
FLEX mode supports.
•
4155/4156 FLEX command mode
FLEX means Fast Language for EXecution. This mode allows you to control
measurement functions of the 4155C/4156C. Command execution is faster than
the SCPI command mode.
•
4145 syntax command mode
This mode allows you to execute the 4145A/B programs on the 4155C/4156C
directly with little or no modification. In this command mode, you cannot control all
functions of the 4155C/4156C.
To confirm the present control mode, see the language mode indicator on the screen,
or enter the CMD? command.
Language indicator The indicator is located between the fourth primary softkey and
the fifth primary softkey, and next to the screen lock indicator. The
meaning of the indicator is as follows:
S: SCPI command mode
F: FLEX command mode
4: 4145 syntax command mode
CMD? command
This query command returns the present command mode. The
response is as follows:
0: SCPI command mode
1: FLEX command mode
2: 4145 syntax command mode
This command is effective for all command mode.
This manual describes about the 4155C/4156C FLEX command set and the 4145 syntax
command set, and consists of the following chapters:
•
4155C/4156C FLEX Commands
Lists the 4155C/4156C FLEX commands, and provides description, command
syntax, example statements, and so on. Also provides the command input format,
data output format, status byte information and error messages.
•
4145B Syntax Commmand Set
Lists the 4145 Syntax commands, and provides description, command syntax,
example statements, and so on. Also provides the general conventions, differences
from the 4145A/B commands and status byte information.
For information about the 4155C/4156C SCPI command set, refer to SCPI Command
Reference.
See User's Guide and User's Guide Measurement and Analysis for information about
the 4155C/4156C itself.
Refer to Programmer's Guide to make a program and use built-in Instrument BASIC
controller.
NOTE
4155C/4156C FLEX command set
The 4155C/4156C FLEX command set includes some commands which have the same
name as the GPIB command of Agilent 4142B DC Source/Monitor. This is useful for
you who create the 4155C/4156C measurement program by modifying the program
created to control the 4142B.
However the 4155C/4156C commands are not fully compatible with the 4142B
commands. So you need to do some modifications on the measurement program for
the 4142B.
Microsoft, Windows, MS-DOS and Excel are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation.
NFS is a trademark of Sun Microsystems, Inc.
Contents
1. 4155C/4156C FLEX Commands
Control Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
US/US42 Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
To Quit FLEX Command Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
To Use 4142B Measurement Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-3
1-4
1-5
1-6
Command Input Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8
Header . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8
Numeric Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9
Terminator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-10
Special Terminator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-10
Data Output Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11
Conventions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11
Time Stamp Function. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11
ASCII Format in US Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-12
Binary Format in US Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-19
ASCII Format in US42 Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-28
Binary Format in US42 Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-33
Status Byte . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-39
Command Reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-41
AB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-48
ACH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-50
AV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-52
AZ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-53
BC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-54
BGI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-55
BGV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-58
BSI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-61
BSM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-64
BSSI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-66
BSSV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-68
Agilent 4155C/4156C GPIB Command Reference, Edition 6
Contents
BST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-70
BSV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-71
BSVM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-74
CA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-75
*CAL? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-76
CL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-77
CLOSE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-79
*CLS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-80
CM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-81
CMD? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-82
CMM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-83
CN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-84
DI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-86
DO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-89
DV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-90
DZ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-93
END . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-95
ERR? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-96
ESC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-97
*ESE(?) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-100
*ESR? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-102
FL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-103
FMT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-104
GOC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-106
*IDN? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-108
IN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-109
LGI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-111
LGV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-113
LOP? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-115
*LRN? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-118
LSI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-125
LSSI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-128
Agilent 4155C/4156C GPIB Command Reference, Edition 6
Contents
LSSV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-130
LST? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-132
LSTM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-134
LSV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-135
LSVM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-138
MCC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-139
MI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-140
MM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-143
MP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-146
MSC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-149
MT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-151
MV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-152
NUB? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-155
*OPC(?) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-156
OPEN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-157
*OPT? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-158
OS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-159
PA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-160
PI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-161
POR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-164
PRN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-165
PT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-166
PV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-168
PWI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-171
PWV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-175
QSL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-179
QSM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-180
QSR. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-182
QST. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-183
QSV. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-185
QSZ/QSZ? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-191
RBC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-192
Agilent 4155C/4156C GPIB Command Reference, Edition 6
Contents
RCV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-193
RD? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-194
RI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-195
RM. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-201
RMD? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-202
*RST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-203
RU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-204
RV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-205
RZ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-210
SCR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-211
SDSK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-212
SIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-213
SLI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-214
SOC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-215
SPG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-216
SPL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-219
SPP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-220
SPR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-221
*SRE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-222
*SRE? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-223
SRP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-224
SSP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-225
ST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-226
*STB? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-228
STC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-229
STG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-230
STI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-231
STM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-235
STP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-236
STT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-239
STV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-241
:SYST:ERR? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-244
Agilent 4155C/4156C GPIB Command Reference, Edition 6
Contents
TDI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-245
TDV. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-249
TI/TI? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-252
TM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-254
TSC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-255
TSQ? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-256
TSR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-257
*TST? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-258
TTI/TTI? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-260
TTV/TTV? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-263
TV/TV? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-266
UNT? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-268
VM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-269
VMD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-270
*WAI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-271
WI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-272
WM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-276
WNU? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-278
WR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-279
WS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-280
WSI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-281
WSV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-284
WT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-287
WV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-288
XE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-292
Error Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-293
2. 4145B Syntax Command Set
General Conventions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3
Command Modes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3
Changing the Command Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3
Agilent 4155C/4156C GPIB Command Reference, Edition 6
Contents
Command and Screens for System Mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-3
Parameter Separator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-4
String Parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-4
Real Parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-4
Semicolons and <whitespace> . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-4
Invalid Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-4
4145B Syntax Mode Status Byte . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-5
Differences from 4145A/B Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-6
Non-supported Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-6
Differences on Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-7
Running 4145A/B Program Directly on 4155C/4156C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-11
Spot Measurement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-11
Sweep Steps in Logarithmic Step Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-11
Terminator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-12
System Mode Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-14
AS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-16
CH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-17
DE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-18
DM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-19
DO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-20
DT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-22
FS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-23
GL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-24
GT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-25
HT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-26
IC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-27
IN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-28
IP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-29
IR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-30
LI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-31
Agilent 4155C/4156C GPIB Command Reference, Edition 6
Contents
MD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-32
ME . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-33
MX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-34
NR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-35
PR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-36
RT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-37
SC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-38
SH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-39
SM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-40
SS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-41
SV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-42
VC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-43
VM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-44
VP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-45
VR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-46
VS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-47
WT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-48
XN, YA, YB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-49
XT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-50
User Mode Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-51
DI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-52
DS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-53
DV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-54
GL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-55
TI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-56
TV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-58
HP-GL Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-60
Common Mode Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-61
BC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-62
CA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-63
CMD? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-64
Agilent 4155C/4156C GPIB Command Reference, Edition 6
Contents
DC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-65
DL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-66
DP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-67
DR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-68
EI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-69
ID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-70
IT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-71
PF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-72
PL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-73
SF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-74
Agilent 4155C/4156C GPIB Command Reference, Edition 6
1
4155C/4156C FLEX Commands
4155C/4156C FLEX Commands
This chapter provides the following information:
•
“Control Mode”
•
“Command Input Format”
•
“Data Output Format”
•
“Status Byte”
•
“Command Reference”
•
“Error Messages”
1-2
Agilent 4155C/4156C GPIB Command Reference, Edition 6
4155C/4156C FLEX Commands
Control Mode
To use the 4155C/4156C FLEX commands, enter the US or US42 command when
the 4155C/4156C is in one of the following state. This command causes the
4155C/4156C control mode transition.
•
Power on state
•
Interactive operation mode (normal operation mode, which is not GPIB control
mode)
•
4155C/4156C SCPI command control mode
The control mode transition resets the 4155C/4156C settings. For the initial settings
in the FLEX command control mode, see the *RST command in the “Command
Reference” section in this chapter.
In the FLEX command control mode, you can use the all commands described in
this chapter, and the SCPI commands and the 4145A/B syntax commands are not
available.
If you use the built-in IBASIC controller, use the full IBASIC screen. All front panel
keys except for the following keys are available.
•
MEASUREMENT key group
•
Plot/Print
•
Save
•
IBASIC Display key
key
and Get keys
If you use an external controller, the screen and front panel keys on the
4155C/4156C front panel are not available. Only the LOCAL secondary softkey is
available. This softkey is used to release the remote control state of the
4155C/4156C.
Agilent 4155C/4156C GPIB Command Reference, Edition 6
1-3
4155C/4156C FLEX Commands
US/US42 Command
US/US42 Command
Syntax, command parameters, and example statements for the US and US42
command are shown below.
Difference between US command and US42 command is that the US42 command
provides the 4142B DC Source/Monitor-like response for the following items:
Syntax
•
Output data format
•
Query response
•
Status code (status byte)
Syntax of US command:
US
Syntax of US42 command:
US42[level]
Parameters
level
Support level for the 4142B-like response. Must be an integer. Refer to
the following table. If you do not specify this parameter, level is set to
255 (1+2+4+8+16+32+64+128). This means all levels are selected.
If you select multiple levels, enter a value that is the sum of the desired
level values. For example, if you select levels 1, 2 and 4, enter 7
(1+2+4) as the level value.
Example
Statements
OUTPUT @Hp4156;"US"
OUTPUT @Hp4156;"US42"
OUTPUT @Hp4156;"US42 15"
1-4
Agilent 4155C/4156C GPIB Command Reference, Edition 6
4155C/4156C FLEX Commands
To Quit FLEX Command Mode
level
Description
1
Supports the 4142B-like data output format. (FMT command
allows you to select data output format.)
2
Supports the 4142B-like status code (status byte).
4
Supports the 4142B-like query response.
8
Supports the 4142B-like GNDU, VMU output switch setting.
(GNDU and VMU output switches are set to ON after executing
the CL command without specifying channel number.)
16
Reads output data without RMD? command. a
32
Not defined.
64
Not defined.
128
Not defined.
a. Without level=16, you need to enter the RMD? command before entering the command (ex; ENTER (HP BASIC) command) to read the output data. If you select level=16, you do not need the RMD? command.
But you cannot read the output data correctly if both output data and
query response are in the 4155C/4156C output buffer.
To Quit FLEX Command Mode
To quit the FLEX command control mode, do one of the following:
•
Enter the :PAGE command (ex: OUTPUT @Hp415x;":PAGE")
•
Enter the LOCAL (HP BASIC) command
•
If you use an external controller: Select the LOCAL secondary softkey
displayed on the 4155C/4156C screen.
•
If you use the built-in IBASIC controller: Press any key in the PAGE
CONTROL key group.
The control mode transition resets the 4155C/4156C settings except for the auto
calibration mode setting. Auto calibration is set to OFF forcibly.
Agilent 4155C/4156C GPIB Command Reference, Edition 6
1-5
4155C/4156C FLEX Commands
To Use 4142B Measurement Program
To Use 4142B Measurement Program
If you want to use the measurement program created to control Agilent 4142B
Modular DC Source/Monitor, remember the following precautions. You need to
modify the measurement program.
•
Command syntax:
The 4155C/4156C FLEX commands need a space between the command and its
command parameter. The 4142B commands do not need a space.
Add a space between the command and the first command parameter as shown
in the following example:
•
For 4142B:
OUTPUT @Hp4142;"DV1,0,20"
•
For 4155C/4156C:
OUTPUT @Hp4156;"DV 1,0,20"
•
!Applies 20V
!Applies 20V
Reading output data:
To read the 4155C/4156C output data after a measurement, use the RMD?
command as shown in the following example:
•
For 4142B:
OUTPUT @Hp4142;"XE"
ENTER @Hp4142;A$
•
!Executes measurements
!Reads measurement data
For 4155C/4156C:
OUTPUT @Hp4156;"XE"
!Executes measurements
OUTPUT @Hp4156;"RMD?" !Puts data on the output buffer
ENTER @Hp4156;A$
!Reads measurement data
If you select level=16 for the US42 command parameter, you do not need the
RMD? command before the ENTER command on this example. But you cannot
read the output data correctly if both output data and query response are in the
4155C/4156C output buffer.
1-6
Agilent 4155C/4156C GPIB Command Reference, Edition 6
4155C/4156C FLEX Commands
To Use 4142B Measurement Program
•
Command parameters:
For the 4155C/4156C FLEX commands which have the same name as the
4142B commands, such as DV and DI, the meaning and order of most
parameters are the same as the 4142B commands. However, the values available
for the command parameter will be different from the 4142B control command
because of the difference in measurement performance. Also, some optional
command parameters may be added.
Confirm the command parameters and the available values.
•
Measurement unit channel numbers:
The channel numbers of the measurement units must be changed. To change the
channel numbers, use the ACH command. The ACH command translates the
channel numbers for the 4142B to the channel numbers for the 4155C/4156C.
For details, see the ACH command in the “Command Reference” section in this
chapter.
•
Unsupported commands:
The following 4142B commands are not supported by the 4155C/4156C.
AIV, ASM, ASV, AVI, BDM, BDT, BDV, ERC,
PDI, PDM, PDV, POL
•
Multiple command strings
The 4155C/4156C FLEX command mode does not support the multiple
command strings such as the following example. Do not enter the multiple
command strings.
OUTPUT @Hp415x;"CN 1;DV 1,0,5;MM 1,1"
Agilent 4155C/4156C GPIB Command Reference, Edition 6
1-7
4155C/4156C FLEX Commands
Header
Command Input Format
The 4155C/4156C FLEX commands are composed of a header, numeric data, and
terminator, as shown in the syntax diagram in the following figure.
4155C/4156C Control Command Syntax Diagram
,
Header
SP
Numeric Data
Terminator
SP : Space
NOTE
Terminator
Terminator is necessary to enter the command to the Agilent 4155/4156. For the
available terminators, see “Terminator” and “Special Terminator” on page 1-10.
Header
The header is the command name, always contains alpha characters, and is not
upper or lowercase sensitive. Some command names also contain an asterisk (*) or
question mark (?). The following figure shows the syntax diagram for a header.
Header Syntax Diagram
*
1-8
Alpha Character
(A to Z, a to z)
?
Agilent 4155C/4156C GPIB Command Reference, Edition 6
4155C/4156C FLEX Commands
Numeric Data
Numeric Data
Numeric data is the command parameters. You need to insert a space between the
header and the command parameters (numeric data). Some parameters require
integer data. The following figure shows the syntax diagram for numeric data.
Numeric Data Syntax Diagram
Integer Data
Fixed Point Data
Floating Point Data
The following 3 figures show the syntax diagrams for integer, fixed point, and
floating point data, respectively.
Integer Data Syntax Diagram
+
Digit
(0 to 9)
−
SP
SP
SP : Space
Fixed Point Data Syntax Diagram
+
SP
−
Digit
(0 to 9)
Digit
(0 to 9)
SP
SP : Space
Floating Point Data Syntax Diagram
+
SP
−
Digit
(0 to 9)
Digit
(0 to 9)
+
E
e
−
*1
Digit
(0 to 9)
SP
SP : Space
*1: Here must be 2 digits or less.
Agilent 4155C/4156C GPIB Command Reference, Edition 6
1-9
4155C/4156C FLEX Commands
Terminator
Terminator
The terminator completes the GPIB command entry and starts command execution.
The following figure shows the terminator syntax diagram.
Terminator Syntax Diagram
CR
LF
LF
^
EOI
Special Terminator
If a semicolon (;) is inserted before the terminator, as shown in the following figure,
the preceding commands are not executed until the next command line is input and
another terminator is input, without a preceding semicolon. The command lines are
then executed together.
Special Terminator
;
CR
LF
LF
^
EOI
1-10
Agilent 4155C/4156C GPIB Command Reference, Edition 6
4155C/4156C FLEX Commands
Conventions
Data Output Format
This section describes the data output formats of the 4155C/4156C. The
4155C/4156C provides the following four types of data output formats:
•
“ASCII Format in US Mode”
•
“Binary Format in US Mode”
•
“ASCII Format in US42 Mode”
•
“Binary Format in US42 Mode”
You can select the data output format using the FMT command. See the FMT
command for more information.
Conventions
The following conventions are used in the data output format tables (Table 1-1
through Table 1-4).
Data
Output data that the 4155C/4156C sends after a measurement.
[Data]
Optional output data that is sent when there are multiple output
data. See FMT command. For example, after the sampling
measurements when the sampling point index output is
specified by the FMT command.
Time Stamp Function
The time stamp function is used to record the start time of the measurement. When
this function is enabled, the 4155C/4156C output data includes the time data (Time).
For example, in the staircase sweep measurements, the output data will be as
follows:
Block1 [,Block2] . . . . <terminator>
where, BlockN (N: integer) = Time1,Data1 [,Time2,Data2] ... [,Source_data]
TimeN (N: integer) is the time from the point the count is cleared until the start of the
DataN measurement.
The time stamp function is not available for the quasi-static CV measurements,
linear search measurements, and binary search measurements in the US control
mode. It is not available for any measurement in the US42 control mode.
Agilent 4155C/4156C GPIB Command Reference, Edition 6
1-11
4155C/4156C FLEX Commands
ASCII Format in US Mode
ASCII Format in US Mode
Table 1-1 shows the ASCII data output format in control mode set by the US
command. The format used depends on the measurement mode selected.
Table 1-1
ASCII Data Output Format in US Control Mode
Measurement Mode
Stress Force
Output Format
Status <terminator>a
Status is the status information sent after a stress force.
High Speed Spot
Data <terminator>a
Data is the data measured by the measurement unit
specified for the high speed spot measurement using the
MM command.
Data1 [,Data2] . . . . <terminator>a
Spot
DataN (N: integer) is the data measured by one unit.
The order of Data is specified by the MM command.
1ch Pulsed Spot
Data <terminator>a
Data is the data measured by the measurement unit
specified for the pulsed spot measurement using the
MM command.
Staircase Sweep,
Pulsed Sweep,
Staircase Sweep with
Pulsed Bias
Block1 [,Block2] . . . . <terminator>a
Block1 is the block of data measured at the first sweep
step. Block2 is the block of data measured at the second
sweep step.
where Block consists of the following data:
Data1 [,Data2] . . . . [,Source_data]
DataN (N: integer) is the data measured by one unit.
The order of Data is specified by the MM command.
Source_data is the source data at the sweep step.
a. Terminator. <LF^EOI> or <,^EOI>, depending on the FMT command
parameter. See FMT command.
1-12
Agilent 4155C/4156C GPIB Command Reference, Edition 6
4155C/4156C FLEX Commands
ASCII Format in US Mode
Measurement
Mode
Sampling
Output Format
Block1 [,Block2] . . . . <terminator>a
Block1 is the block of the data measured at the first sampling
point.
Block2 is the block of the data measured at the second
sampling point.
where Block consists of the following data:
[Sampling_no,] Data1 [,Data2] . . . .
Sampling_no is the sampling point index. This value depends
on the sampling interval setting and the measurement time.
If the measurement time is shorter than the sampling interval,
Sampling_no will be N of BlockN (N: 1, 2, 3 . . . ).
If the measurement time is longer than the sampling interval,
Sampling_no is not N of BlockN.
For example, if the measurement time is longer than the
sampling interval and shorter than twice the sampling interval,
then the Sampling_no is 2 for Block1, and 4 for Block2.
The measurement time depends on the settings of the AV, AZ,
SIT and SLI commands.
DataN (N: integer) is the data measured by one unit. The order
of Data is specified by the MM command.
The Sampling_no and Data values can be discarded when the
range changes in the auto or limited auto ranging mode.
a. Terminator. <LF^EOI> or <,^EOI>, depending on the FMT command
parameter. See FMT command.
Agilent 4155C/4156C GPIB Command Reference, Edition 6
1-13
4155C/4156C FLEX Commands
ASCII Format in US Mode
Measurement Mode
Quasi-static CV
Output Format
Block1 [,Block2] . . . . <terminator>a
Block1 is the data of the first measurement point.
Block2 is the data of the second point.
where Block consists of the following data:
[DataL,] DataC [,Source_data]
DataL is the leakage current measurement data.
DataC is the capacitance measurement data.
Source_data is the source output voltage.
DataL is set by the QSL command.
Linear search,
Binary search
[D1,D2 . . . ,] Search,Source_data,Data <terminator>a
Search is the search status. Source_data is the source
output data of the search target.
Data is the measurement data of the search target.
D1 is the data of the first measurement point.
D2 is the data of the second point.
where Dn (n: integer) consists of the following data:
Source_data,Data
Source_data is the source output data.
Data is the measurement data.
Dn is set by the BSVM command for the binary search,
or LSVM command for the linear search.
a. Terminator. <LF^EOI> or <,^EOI>, depending on the FMT command
parameter. See FMT command.
1-14
Agilent 4155C/4156C GPIB Command Reference, Edition 6
4155C/4156C FLEX Commands
ASCII Format in US Mode
Output Data
The 4155C/4156C sends the measurement data (Data), source output data
(Source_data), sampling point index (Sampling_no), time data (Time) or status
information (Search or Status) in the format specified by the FMT 1, FMT 2, or
FMT 5 command.
•
ASCII format with header (output by FMT 1 or FMT 5):
AAABCDDDDDDDDDDDDD
•
ASCII format without header (output by FMT 2):
DDDDDDDDDDDDD
where,
NOTE
A:
Status.
B:
Channel number.
C:
Data type.
D:
Data.
For Sampling_no, ignore B.
For Time, ignore A.
For Search, ignore A and B.
For Status, ignore B and D.
They are not valid for the output data.
Agilent 4155C/4156C GPIB Command Reference, Edition 6
1-15
4155C/4156C FLEX Commands
ASCII Format in US Mode
The A, B, C, and D values are explained below.
A:
Status; 3 digits.
•
Status for Source_data:
AAA
•
Explanation
W
Data is for the first or intermediate sweep step.
E
Data is for the last sweep step.
Status for Data, Sampling_no, or Status:
AAA
Explanation
1
A/D converter overflowed.
2
One or more units are oscillating.
4
Another unit reached its compliance setting.
8
This unit reached its compliance setting.
Integration time too short for capacitance measurement.
16
The PGU reached its compliance setting.
32
The sweep measurement was stopped by the ESC stop
condition. Returned data is effective.
64
Invalid data is returned. D is not used.
128
EOD (End of Data).
If multiple status conditions are found, the sum of the AAA values is
returned. For example, if an A/D converter overflow occurred, and
an SMU was oscillating during the measurements, the returned AAA
value is 3 (1 + 2).
1-16
Agilent 4155C/4156C GPIB Command Reference, Edition 6
4155C/4156C FLEX Commands
ASCII Format in US Mode
B:
Channel number of the measurement/source unit; 1 digit.
B
C:
Explanation
A
Channel number 1, SMU1.
B
Channel number 2, SMU2.
C
Channel number 3, SMU3.
D
Channel number 4, SMU4.
E
Channel number 5, SMU5 (in 41501A/B).
F
Channel number 6, SMU6 (in 41501A/B).
Q
Channel number 21, VSU1.
R
Channel number 22, VSU2.
S
Channel number 23, VMU1.
T
Channel number 24, VMU2.
V
Channel number 26, GNDU (in 41501A/B).
W
Channel number 27, PGU1 (in 41501A/B).
X
Channel number 28, PGU2 (in 41501A/B).
Z
Returned D value is not measurement data.
Data type; 1 digit.
C
Explanation
V
Voltage measurement data (Data).
v
Voltage source setup data (Setup_data).
I
Current measurement data (Data).
i
Current source setup data (Setup_data).
C
Capacitance measurement data (Data).
p
Sampling point index (Sampling_no).
T
Time data (Time).
S
Status information (Search or Status).
Z
Invalid data is returned.
z
Agilent 4155C/4156C GPIB Command Reference, Edition 6
1-17
4155C/4156C FLEX Commands
ASCII Format in US Mode
D:
Data; 13 digits.
Value of Data, Source_data, Sampling_no, and Time may be one of the
following:
•
sn.nnnnnnEsnn
•
snn.nnnnnEsnn
•
snnn.nnnnEsnn
where,
s: Sign, + or −.
n: Digit, 0 to 9.
E: Exponent symbol.
Value of Search:
D
Description
0
No error.
1
Measurement aborted, but cannot specify the reason. Ignore
Source_data and Data.
10
No target found in the specified search range of the binary
search. Data at the start or stop near the target value is set to
Source_data and Data.
11
No target found in the limit mode binary search. The last
search data is set to Source_data and Data.
12
Over-range at the synchronous output channel in the binary
search. Ignore Source_data and Data.
20
No target found in the linear search. Ignore Source_data
and Data.
21
Over-range at the synchronous output channel in the linear
search. Ignore Source_data and Data.
22
Abort condition occurred in the linear search. Ignore
Source_data and Data. The status of the Data is AAA=192.
In all data output modes (LSVM 1), the status code is set to
the status of the last measurement data.
The abort condition is set by the WM command.
1-18
Agilent 4155C/4156C GPIB Command Reference, Edition 6
4155C/4156C FLEX Commands
Binary Format in US Mode
Binary Format in US Mode
Table 1-2 shows the binary data output format in control mode set by the US
command. The format used depends on the measurement mode selected.
Table 1-2
Binary Data Output Format in US Control Mode
Measurement Mode
Stress Force
Output Format
Status <terminator>a
Status is the status information sent after a stress force.
High Speed Spot
Data <terminator>a
Data is the data measured by the measurement unit
specified for the high speed spot measurement using
the MM command.
Spot
Data1 [Data2] . . . . <terminator>a
DataN (N: integer) is the data measured by one unit.
The order of Data is specified by the MM command.
1ch Pulsed Spot
Data <terminator>a
Data is the data measured by the measurement unit
specified for the pulsed spot measurement using the
MM command.
Staircase Sweep,
Pulsed Sweep,
Staircase Sweep with
Pulsed Bias
Block1 [Block2] . . . . <terminator>a
Block1 is the block of data measured at the first sweep
step. Block2 is the block of data measured at the second
sweep step.
where Block consists of the following data:
Data1 [Data2] . . . . [Source_data]
DataN (N: integer) is the data measured by one unit.
The order of Data is specified by the MM command.
Source_data is the source data at the sweep step.
a. Terminator. <LF^EOI> or <,^EOI>, depending on the FMT command
parameter. See FMT command.
Agilent 4155C/4156C GPIB Command Reference, Edition 6
1-19
4155C/4156C FLEX Commands
Binary Format in US Mode
Measurement Mode
Sampling
Output Format
Block1 [Block2] . . . . <terminator>a
Block1 is the block of the data measured at the first
sampling point.
Block2 is the block of the data measured at the second
sampling point.
where Block consists of the following data:
[Sampling_no] Data1 [Data2] . . . .
Sampling_no is the sampling point index. This value
depends on the sampling interval setting and the
measurement time.
If the measurement time is shorter than the sampling
interval, Sampling_no will be N of BlockN (N: 1, 2, 3
. . . ).
If the measurement time is longer than the sampling
interval, Sampling_no is not N of BlockN.
For example, if the measurement time is longer than
the sampling interval and shorter than twice the
sampling interval, then the Sampling_no is 2 for
Block1, and 4 for Block2.
The measurement time depends on the settings of the
AV, AZ, SIT and SLI commands.
DataN (N: integer) is the data measured by one unit.
The order of Data is specified by the MM command.
The Sampling_no and Data values can be discarded
when the range changes in the auto or limited auto
ranging mode.
a. Terminator. <LF^EOI> or <,^EOI>, depending on the FMT command
parameter. See FMT command.
1-20
Agilent 4155C/4156C GPIB Command Reference, Edition 6
4155C/4156C FLEX Commands
Binary Format in US Mode
Measurement Mode
Quasi-static CV
Output Format
Block1 [Block2] . . . . <terminator>a
Block1 is the data of the first measurement point.
Block2 is the data of the second point.
where Block consists of the following data:
[DataL,] DataC [,Source_data]
DataL is the leakage current measurement data.
DataC is the capacitance measurement data.
Source_data is the source output voltage.
DataL is set by the QSL command.
Linear search,
Binary search
[D1 D2 . . . ] Search Source_data Data <terminator>a
Search is the search status. Source_data is the source
output data of the search target.
Data is the measurement data of the search target.
D1 is the data of the first measurement point.
D2 is the data of the second point.
where Dn (n: integer) consists of the following data:
Source_data Data
Source_data is the source output data.
Data is the measurement data.
Dn is set by the BSVM command for the binary search,
or LSVM command for the linear search.
a. Terminator. <LF^EOI> or <,^EOI>, depending on the FMT command
parameter. See FMT command.
Agilent 4155C/4156C GPIB Command Reference, Edition 6
1-21
4155C/4156C FLEX Commands
Binary Format in US Mode
Output Data
The 4155C/4156C sends the measurement data (Data), source output data
(Source_data), sampling point index (Sampling_no), time data (Time), or status
information (Search or Status) in the format specified by the FMT 3 or FMT 4
command.
The binary data is six (6) bytes long, and consists of some blocks as shown below:
For Data, Source_data, Sampling_no, Search, Status:
Byte 2
Byte 4
Byte 6
Byte1
Byte 3
Byte 5
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
B
C
D
E
F
A
For Time:
Byte1
Byte 2
Byte 3
Byte 4
Byte 5
Byte 6
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
A
B
G
F
where,
NOTE
A:
Measurement or source output data type.
B:
Data type.
C:
Measurement or output range.
D:
Data.
E:
Status.
F:
Channel number.
G:
Time data.
For Sampling_no, ignore A, C, and F.
For Search, ignore A, C, E and F.
For Status, ignore A, C, D, and F.
For Time, ignore A.
They are not valid for the output data.
1-22
Agilent 4155C/4156C GPIB Command Reference, Edition 6
4155C/4156C FLEX Commands
Binary Format in US Mode
The A, B, C, D, E, F, and G values are explained below.
A:
Measurement or source output data type; one bit.
A
B:
Explanation
0
Source output data.
1
Measurement data.
Data type; three bits.
B
C:
Explanation
000
Voltage data.
001
Current data.
010
Capacitance data.
011
Time data.
110
Sampling point index.
111
Status information.
Measurement or output range; five bits.
C
Explanation
01001
10 pA or 10 pF
01010
0.2 V or 100 pA or 100 pF
01011
2 V or 1 nA or 1 nF
01100
20 V or 10 nA or 10 nF
01101
40 V or 100 nA or 100nF
01110
100 V or 1 μA or 1 μF
01111
200 V or 10 μA or 10 μF
10000
100 μA or 100 μF
10001
1 mA or 1 mF
10010
10 mA or 10 mF
Agilent 4155C/4156C GPIB Command Reference, Edition 6
1-23
4155C/4156C FLEX Commands
Binary Format in US Mode
C
D:
Explanation
10011
100 mA or 100 mF
10100
1 A or 1 F
11111
Invalid data is returned.
Value of Data, Source_data, or Sampling_no; 26 bits.
This value is expressed as 26-bit binary data. It is used to calculate the
measurement data or source output data, using the equations shown
below. For Sampling_no, this value is the binary expression of the
value. You do not need the following equations.
Equations:
Measurement data = Count × Range /1000000
Source output data = Count × Range /20000
where, Count is the decimal value of D, and Range is the value
indicated by C.
If the top bit of the binary data is 0, Count is positive and equal to the
decimal value of the 25-bit binary data that follows the top bit.
If the top bit is 1, the measurement data is negative. Calculate Count by
subtracting 33554432 (10000000000000000000000000 in binary) from
the decimal value of the 25-bit binary data.
Example:
If the output binary data is:
100101010000000000000000110000001001000000000001
then,
Data type:
Current measurement data (A=1, B=001)
Range:
100 pA (C=01010)
Count:
1540 (D=00000000000000011000000100)
Status:
EOD (E=10000000)
Channel:
SMU1 (channel number 1) (F=00001)
Measurement data = 1540 × 100E–12/1E+6 = 154 fA
1-24
Agilent 4155C/4156C GPIB Command Reference, Edition 6
4155C/4156C FLEX Commands
Binary Format in US Mode
Value of Search; 26 bits. The following table shows lower 5 bits.
D
Description
00000
No error.
00001
Measurement aborted, but cannot specify the reason.
Ignore Source_data and Data.
01010
No target found in the specified search range of the
binary search.
Data at the start or stop near the target value is set to
Source_data and Data.
01011
No target found in the limit mode binary search.
The last search data is set to Source_data and Data.
01100
Over-range at the synchronous output channel in the
binary search.
Ignore Source_data and Data.
10100
No target found in the linear search.
Ignore Source_data and Data.
10101
Over-range at the synchronous output channel in the
linear search.
Ignore Source_data and Data.
10110
Abort condition occurred in the linear search.
Ignore Source_data and Data.
Status of Data is E=11000000.
In all data output modes (LSVM 1), the status code is set
to the status of the last measurement data.
An abort condition is set by the WM command.
Agilent 4155C/4156C GPIB Command Reference, Edition 6
1-25
4155C/4156C FLEX Commands
Binary Format in US Mode
E:
Status; eight bits.
•
Status for Source_data:
E
•
Explanation
00000001
Data is for the first or intermediate sweep step.
00000010
Data is for the last sweep step.
Status for Data, Sampling_no, or Status:
E
Explanation
00000001
A/D converter overflowed.
00000010
One or more units are oscillating.
00000100
Another unit reached its compliance setting.
00001000
This unit reached its compliance setting.
Integration time too short for capacitance
measurement.
00010000
The PGU reached its compliance setting.
00100000
Sweep measurement was stopped by the ESC stop
condition. The returned data is effective.
01000000
Invalid data is returned. D is not valid.
10000000
EOD (End of Data).
If multiple status conditions are found, the sum of the status values
is returned. For example, if an A/D converter overflow occurred
and an SMU was oscillating during the measurements, the returned
value is 00000011 (00000001+00000010).
F:
Channel number of the measurement/source unit; five bits.
F
1-26
Explanation
00001
Channel number 1, SMU1.
00010
Channel number 2, SMU2.
00011
Channel number 3, SMU3.
00100
Channel number 4, SMU4.
Agilent 4155C/4156C GPIB Command Reference, Edition 6
4155C/4156C FLEX Commands
Binary Format in US Mode
F
G:
Explanation
00101
Channel number 5, SMU5 (in 41501A/B).
00110
Channel number 6, SMU6 (in 41501A/B).
10101
Channel number 21, VSU1.
10110
Channel number 22, VSU2.
10111
Channel number 23, VMU1.
11000
Channel number 24, VMU2.
11010
Channel number 26, GNDU (in 41501A/B).
11011
Channel number 27, PGU1 (in 41501A/B).
11100
Channel number 28, PGU2 (in 41501A/B).
11111
Invalid data is returned.
Value of Time; 39 bits.
This value is expressed in 39-bit binary data. It is used to calculate the
time data, using the equations shown below.
Equations:
Time data = Count × 100 μs
where, Count is the decimal value of G.
Example:
If the output binary data is:
001100000000000000000000100100100111110000000001
then,
Data type:
Time data (A=0, B=011)
Count:
300000 (D=1001001001111100000)
Channel:
SMU1 (channel number 1) (F=00001)
Measurement data = 300000 × 100E–6 = 30 s
Agilent 4155C/4156C GPIB Command Reference, Edition 6
1-27
4155C/4156C FLEX Commands
ASCII Format in US42 Mode
ASCII Format in US42 Mode
Table 1-3 shows the ASCII data output format in control mode set by the US42
command. The format used depends on the measurement mode selected.
Table 1-3
ASCII Data Output Format in US42 Control Mode
Measurement Mode
Stress Force
Output Format
Status <terminator>a
Status is the status information sent after a stress force.
High Speed Spot
Data <terminator>a
Data is the data measured by the measurement unit
specified for the high speed spot measurement using
the MM command.
Spot
Data1 [,Data2] . . . . <terminator>a
DataN (N: integer) is the data measured by one unit.
The order of Data is specified by the MM command.
1ch Pulsed Spot
Data <terminator>a
Data is the data measured by the measurement unit
specified for the pulsed spot measurement using the
MM command.
Staircase Sweep
Block1 [,Block2] . . . . <terminator>a
Block1 is the block of data measured at the first sweep
step. Block2 is the block of data measured at the second
sweep step.
where Block consists of the following data:
Data1 [,Data2] . . . . [,Source_data]
DataN (N: integer) is the data measured by one unit.
The order of Data is specified by the MM command.
Source_data is the source data at the sweep step.
a. Terminator. <CR/LF^EOI>, <^EOI> or , (comma), depending on the
FMT command parameter. See FMT command.
1-28
Agilent 4155C/4156C GPIB Command Reference, Edition 6
4155C/4156C FLEX Commands
ASCII Format in US42 Mode
Measurement Mode
Pulsed Sweep,
Staircase Sweep with
Pulsed Bias
Output Format
Block1 [,Block2] . . . . <terminator>a
Block1 is the block of data measured at the first sweep
step. Block2 is the block of data measured at the second
sweep step.
where Block consists of the following data:
Data [,Source_data]
Data is the measurement data. Source_data is the
source data at the sweep step.
Sampling
Block1 [,Block2] . . . . <terminator>a
Block1 is the block of the data measured at the first
sampling point. Block2 is the block of the data
measured at the second sampling point.
where Block consists of the following data:
[Sampling_no,] Data1 [,Data2] . . . .
Sampling_no is the sampling point index. This value
depends on the sampling interval setting and the
measurement time.
If the measurement time is shorter than the sampling
interval, the Sampling_no will be N of BlockN (N: 1, 2,
3 . . . ). If the measurement time is longer than the
sampling interval, the Sampling_no is not N of BlockN.
For example, if the measurement time is longer than
the sampling interval and shorter than twice the
sampling interval, then the Sampling_no is 2 for
Block1, and 4 for Block2.
The measurement time depends on the settings of the
AV, AZ, SIT and SLI commands.
DataN (N: integer) is the data measured by one unit.
The order of Data is specified by the MM command.
The Sampling_no and Data values can be discarded
when the range changes in the auto or limited auto
ranging mode.
a. Terminator. <CR/LF^EOI>, <^EOI> or , (comma), depending on the
FMT command parameter. See FMT command.
Agilent 4155C/4156C GPIB Command Reference, Edition 6
1-29
4155C/4156C FLEX Commands
ASCII Format in US42 Mode
Output Data
The 4155C/4156C sends the measurement data (Data), source output data
(Source_data), sampling point index (Sampling_no), or stress status information
(Status) in the format specified by the FMT 1, FMT 2, or FMT 5 command.
•
ASCII format with header (output by FMT 1 or FMT 5):
ABCDDDDDDDDDDDD
where no space is included between the parameters.
•
ASCII format without header (output by FMT 2):
DDDDDDDDDDDD
where,
NOTE
A:
Status.
B:
Channel number.
C:
Data type.
D:
Data.
If the output data is Sampling_no, ignore B.
If the output data is Status, ignore B and D.
They are not valid for the output data.
The A, B, C, and D values are explained below.
A:
Status; 1 digit.
•
Status for Data, Sampling_no, or Status:
A
1-30
Explanation
N
No status error occurred.
T
Another unit reached its compliance setting.
C
This unit reached its compliance setting.
V
Measurement data is over the measurement range.
X
One or more units are oscillating.
Agilent 4155C/4156C GPIB Command Reference, Edition 6
4155C/4156C FLEX Commands
ASCII Format in US42 Mode
•
Status for Source_data:
A
B:
Explanation
W
Data is for the first or intermediate sweep step.
E
Data is for the last sweep step.
Channel number of the measurement/source unit; 1 digit.
B
Explanation
A
Channel number 1, SMU1.
B
Channel number 2, SMU2.
C
Channel number 3, SMU3.
D
Channel number 4, SMU4.
E
Channel number 5, SMU5 (in 41501A/B).
F
Channel number 6, SMU6 (in 41501A/B).
Q
Channel number 21, VSU1.
R
Channel number 22, VSU2.
S
Channel number 23, VMU1.
T
Channel number 24, VMU2.
V
Channel number 26, GNDU (in 41501A/B).
W
Channel number 27, PGU1 (in 41501A/B).
X
Channel number 28, PGU2 (in 41501A/B).
Z
Returned D value is not measurement data.
Agilent 4155C/4156C GPIB Command Reference, Edition 6
1-31
4155C/4156C FLEX Commands
ASCII Format in US42 Mode
C:
Data type; 1 digit.
C
Explanation
V
Voltage measurement data.
v
Voltage source setup data.
I
Current measurement data.
i
Current source setup data.
p
Sampling point index.
S
Status information.
Z
Invalid data is returned.
z
D
Value of Data, Source_data, or Sampling_no; 12 digits, which may be
one of the following:
•
sn.nnnnnEsnn
•
snn.nnnnEsnn
•
snnn.nnnEsnn
where,
s: Sign, + or −.
n: Digit, 0 to 9.
E: Exponent symbol.
1-32
Agilent 4155C/4156C GPIB Command Reference, Edition 6
4155C/4156C FLEX Commands
Binary Format in US42 Mode
Binary Format in US42 Mode
Table 1-4 shows the binary data output format in control mode set by the US42
command. The format used depends on the measurement mode selected.
Table 1-4
Binary Data Output Format in US42 Control Mode
Measurement Mode
Stress Force
Output Format
Status <terminator>a
Status is the status information sent after a stress force.
High Speed Spot
Data <terminator>a
Data is the data measured by the measurement unit
specified for the high speed spot measurement using the
MM command.
Spot
Data1 [Data2] . . . . <terminator>a
DataN (N: integer) is the data measured by one unit.
The order of Data is specified by the MM command.
1ch Pulsed Spot
Data <terminator>a
Data is the data measured by the measurement unit
specified for the pulsed spot measurement using the
MM command.
Staircase Sweep
Block1 [Block2] . . . . <terminator> a
Block1 is the block of data measured at the first sweep
step. Block2 is the block of data measured at the second
sweep step.
where Block consists of the following data:
Data1 [Data2] . . . . [Source_data]
DataN (N: integer) is the data measured by one unit.
The order of Data is specified by the MM command.
Source_data is the source data at the sweep step.
a. Terminator. <CR/LF^EOI>, <^EOI> or , (comma), depending on the
FMT command parameter. See FMT command.
Agilent 4155C/4156C GPIB Command Reference, Edition 6
1-33
4155C/4156C FLEX Commands
Binary Format in US42 Mode
Measurement Mode
Pulse Sweep,
Staircase Sweep with
Pulsed Bias
Output Format
Block1 [Block2] . . . . <terminator>a
Block1 is the block of data measured at the first sweep
step. Block2 is the block of data measured at the second
sweep step.
where Block consists of the following data:
Data [Source_data]
Data is the measurement data. Source_data is the
source data at the sweep step.
Sampling
Block1 [Block2] . . . . <terminator>a
Block1 is the block of the data measured at the first
sampling point. Block2 is the block of the data
measured at the second sampling point.
where Block consists of the following data:
[Sampling_no] Data1 [Data2] . . . .
Sampling_no is the sampling point index. This value
depends on the sampling interval setting and the
measurement time.
If the measurement time is shorter than the sampling
interval, then the Sampling_no will be N of BlockN (N:
1, 2, 3 . . . ). If the measurement time is longer than the
sampling interval, then the Sampling_no is not N of
BlockN. For example, if the measurement time is
longer than the sampling interval and shorter than
twice the sampling interval, the Sampling_no is 2 for
Block1, and 4 for Block2.
The measurement time depends on the settings of the
AV, AZ, SIT and SLI commands.
DataN (N: integer) is the data measured by one unit.
The order of Data is specified by the MM command.
The Sampling_no and Data values can be discarded
when the range changes in the auto or limited auto
ranging mode.
a. Terminator. <CR/LF^EOI>, <^EOI> or , (comma), depending on the
FMT command parameter. See FMT command.
1-34
Agilent 4155C/4156C GPIB Command Reference, Edition 6
4155C/4156C FLEX Commands
Binary Format in US42 Mode
Output Data
The 4155C/4156C sends the measurement data (Data), source output data
(Source_data), sampling point index (Sampling_no), or status information (Status)
in the format specified by the FMT 3 or FMT 4 command.
Binary data is four bytes long, and consists of six blocks (A, B, C, D, E and F) as
shown below:
Byte 1
Byte 2
Byte 3
Byte 4
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
A B
C
D
E
F
where,
NOTE
A:
Measurement or source output data type.
B:
Data type.
C:
Measurement or output range.
D:
Data.
E:
Status.
F:
Channel number.
If the output data is Sampling_no, ignore A, B, C, and F.
If the output data is Status, ignore A, B, C, D, and F.
They are not valid for the output data.
The A, B, C, and D values are explained below.
A:
Measurement or source output data type; one bit.
A
B:
Explanation
0
Source output data.
1
Measurement data.
Data type; one bit.
B
Explanation
0
Voltage data.
1
Current data.
Agilent 4155C/4156C GPIB Command Reference, Edition 6
1-35
4155C/4156C FLEX Commands
Binary Format in US42 Mode
C:
Measurement or output range; five bits.
C
D:
Explanation
01010
0.2 V range.
01011
2 V or 1 nA range.
01100
20 V or 10 nA range.
01101
40 V or 100 nA range.
01110
100 V or 1 μA range.
01111
200 V or 10 μA range.
10000
100 μA range.
10001
1 mA range.
10010
10 mA range.
10011
100 mA range.
10100
1 A range.
11111
Invalid data is returned.
Value of Data, Source_data, or Sampling_no parameter. This value is
expressed in 17-bit binary data. It is used to calculate the measurement
data or source output data using the following equations.
For Sampling_no, this value is the binary expression of the sampling
measurement point index value. You do not need the following
equations.
Equations:
Measurement data = Count × Range /50000
Source output data = Count × Range /20000
where, Count is the decimal value of D, and Range is the measurement
range or output range indicated by C.
If the top bit of the binary data is 0, Count is positive and equal to the
decimal value of the 16-bit binary data that follows the top bit.
If the top bit is 1, the measurement data is negative. Calculate Count by
subtracting 65536 (10000000000000000 in binary) from the decimal
value of the 16-bit binary data.
1-36
Agilent 4155C/4156C GPIB Command Reference, Edition 6
4155C/4156C FLEX Commands
Binary Format in US42 Mode
Example:
If the output binary data is:
11010110000100111000100000000001
then,
Data type:
Current measurement data (A=1, B=1)
Range:
1 nA (C=01011)
Count:
5000 (D=00001001110001000)
Status:
Normal condition (E=000)
Channel:
SMU1 (channel number 1) (F=00001)
Measurement data = 5000 × 1E–9/5E+4 = 100 pA
E:
Status; three bits.
•
Status for Data, Sampling_no, or Status:
E
•
Explanation
000
No status error occurred.
001
Another unit reached its compliance setting.
010
This unit reached its compliance setting.
011
Measurement data is over the measurement range.
100
One or more units are oscillating.
Status for Source_data:
E
Explanation
001
Data is for the first or intermediate sweep step.
010
Data is for the last sweep step.
Agilent 4155C/4156C GPIB Command Reference, Edition 6
1-37
4155C/4156C FLEX Commands
Binary Format in US42 Mode
F:
Channel number of the measurement/source unit; five bits.
F
1-38
Explanation
00001
Channel number 1, SMU1.
00010
Channel number 2, SMU2.
00011
Channel number 3, SMU3.
00100
Channel number 4, SMU4.
00101
Channel number 5, SMU5 (in 41501A/B).
00110
Channel number 6, SMU6 (in 41501A/B).
10101
Channel number 21, VSU1.
10110
Channel number 22, VSU2.
10111
Channel number 23, VMU1.
11000
Channel number 24, VMU2.
11010
Channel number 26, GNDU (in 41501A/B).
11011
Channel number 27, PGU1 (in 41501A/B).
11100
Channel number 28, PGU2 (in 41501A/B).
11111
Invalid data is returned.
Agilent 4155C/4156C GPIB Command Reference, Edition 6
4155C/4156C FLEX Commands
Binary Format in US42 Mode
Status Byte
This section provides the status byte information for the 4155C/4156C in the FLEX
command control mode. The information depends on whether the control mode is
set by US command or US42 command. See Table 1-5 and Table 1-6. The status
byte bit assignment shown in Table 1-6 is identical to the 4142B definition.
Table 1-5
In the US Command Mode
Bit
0
Description
Emergency Status
Indicates whether any emergency has occurred. If the instrument is in
the emergency status, this bit is set to 1.
1
Measurement/Stress Status
Indicates whether the measurement/stress force has been executed. If
the instrument is in the measurement/stress status, this bit is set to 1.
2
not used
3
Questionable Status
Indicates whether output buffer is empty. If an unread query response
exists, this bit is set to 1.
4
MAV (Message Available summary-message)
Indicates whether output buffer is empty. If an unread message exists,
this bit is set to 1.
5
ESB (Event Status Bit)
Shows the logical ORed value of the error summary register bits.
6
Request Service (RQS) Message
Indicates whether an SRQ (Service Request) has occurred. You cannot
mask this bit.
7
not used
Agilent 4155C/4156C GPIB Command Reference, Edition 6
1-39
4155C/4156C FLEX Commands
Binary Format in US42 Mode
Table 1-6
In the US42 Command Mode
Bit
Description
0
Data Ready
1
Indicates whether the output buffer is empty. If unread data exists, this
bit is set to 1.
Wait
2
3
Indicates whether the instrument is in the wait status. If instrument is in
the wait state, this bit is set to 1.
not used
Interlock Open
4
If the interlock circuit is open, and an output voltage over ±40 V is
applied, this bit is set to 1.
Set Ready
5
Indicates whether an GPIB command or external trigger has been sent.
If GPIB command execution or the operation by external trigger is
completed, this bit is set to 1.
Error
6
Indicates whether any error has occurred. If any error occurred, this bit
is set to 1.
RQS (You cannot mask this bit.)
7
Indicates whether an SRQ (Service Request) has occurred.
Shutdown
If the instrument turned off by itself, to avoid damage, or instantaneous
power down occurred on the site power line, this bit is set to 1.
The status byte register can be read with either a serial poll or the *STB? query
command.
Serial poll is a low-level GPIB command that can be executed by the SPOLL
command in HP BASIC, as follows:
Status=SPOLL(@Hp4156)
In general, use serial polling (not *STB?) inside interrupt service routines.
Use *STB? in other cases (not in interrupt service routine) when you want to know
the value of the Status Byte.
1-40
Agilent 4155C/4156C GPIB Command Reference, Edition 6
4155C/4156C FLEX Commands
Binary Format in US42 Mode
Command Reference
This section contains detailed descriptions of each command. The commands are
listed in alphabetical order. Each entry:
1. Defines one GPIB command
2. Describes the execution conditions, if any exist
3. Describes the syntax
4. Lists the parameters
5. Shows the query response after command execution, if there is a query
command
6. Explains any additional information
7. Provides examples
The following conventions are used in this section.
parameter
Required command parameters, for which you must substitute a
value or variable.
[parameter]
Optional command parameters, for which you may substitute a
value or omit it.
Agilent 4155C/4156C GPIB Command Reference, Edition 6
1-41
4155C/4156C FLEX Commands
Binary Format in US42 Mode
Category
Control Mode
Command
Summary
US
Enters the 4155C/4156C FLEX command control mode.
US42
Enters the 4155C/4156C FLEX command control mode. This mode provides the
4142B-like response (data output, terminator, and so on).
ACH
Used with the US42 command to assign the channel numbers used in the
measurement programs for the 4142B to the channel numbers available for the
4155C/4156C.
:PAGE
Returns to the 4155C/4156C SCPI command control mode.
Reset
*RST
Resets the 4155C/4156C to the initial settings, and clears the zero offset data.
Self-test
*TST?
Starts the self-test.
Self
Calibration
*CAL?
Performs a full calibration, and returns the calibration result.
CA
Performs calibration of the measurement unit.
CM
Sets Auto-Calibration ON or OFF.
Zero Offset
Cancel
GOC
Measures the zero offset data and sets the zero offset cancel function to ON.
SOC
Enables or disables the zero offset cancel function for the SMU low current
measurements and the VMU differential voltage measurements.
SMU/PGU
Selector
SSP
Controls Agilent 16440A SMU/Pulse Generator Selector.
R-BOX
RBC
Controls Agilent 16441A R-BOX.
Abort/Pause/
Wait
AB
Aborts the present operation and subsequent command execution.
PA
Pauses command execution or internal memory program execution, until the
specified wait time has elapsed, or until receiving a trigger specified by the TM
command.
TM
Sets the event to release the 4155C/4156C from the wait status set by the PA
command. The TM3 command allows to use the external trigger.
Output Data
*WAI
Stops execution of any commands until the OPC bit is set to 1.
FMT
Specifies the measurement data output format and the data terminator.
RMD?
Reads the output data and puts the data into the output buffer.
BC
Clears the 4155C/4156C output data buffer that stores measurement data and/or
query command response data.
1-42
Agilent 4155C/4156C GPIB Command Reference, Edition 6
4155C/4156C FLEX Commands
Binary Format in US42 Mode
Category
Unit Control
Measurement
Mode
Measurement
Setup
Command
Summary
CN
Enables the specified units by setting the output switches to ON.
CL
Disables the specified units by setting the output switches to OFF.
FL
Sets the filter of specified units to ON or OFF.
IN
Sets the specified units to zero output.
DZ
Stores the measurement setup of the units, and sets the units to Zero (0 V) Output.
RZ
Returns the unit to the settings that are stored by the DZ command and clears the
stored unit settings.
RCV
Enables the units that fail self-test.
MM
Sets the measurement mode and measurement units.
CMM
Sets the SMU measurement mode.
VM
Sets the operation mode of the VMU.
VMD
Controls the connection of the VMU input discharge resistors.
RI
Specifies the current measurement ranging mode for all types of measurements,
except for the high speed spot measurements.
RM
Sets the range selection rule for the auto ranging current measurement.
RV
Specifies the voltage measurement ranging mode for all types of voltage
measurements, except for the high speed spot measurements.
MT
Only for Sampling measurements. Sets the timing parameters.
SIT
Changes the value of the integration time Short or Long.
SLI
Selects the integration time setting, Short, Medium, or Long.
AZ
Enables or disables the ADC zero function.
Averaging
AV
Sets the number of samples that are taken and averaged for the measurement.
dc Source
Setup
DI
Forces dc current from the specified unit.
DV
Forces dc voltage from the specified unit.
TDI
Forces dc current from the specified unit, and returns the time stamp.
TDV
Forces dc voltage from the specified unit, and returns the time stamp.
PT
Sets the timing parameters for a pulse source.
PI
Specifies the pulse current source and its parameters, and clears the PV command
setting.
PV
Specifies the pulse voltage source and its parameters, and clears the PI command
setting.
Integration
Time
SMU Pulse
Setup
Agilent 4155C/4156C GPIB Command Reference, Edition 6
1-43
4155C/4156C FLEX Commands
Binary Format in US42 Mode
Category
Staircase
Sweep Source
Setup
Pulsed Sweep
Source Setup
Synchronous
Sweep Source
Setup
Source Setup
for Sampling
Measurements
Time stamp
function
Command
Summary
WT
Sets the hold time and delay time for staircase sweep measurements.
WI
Specifies the current source for the staircase sweep and its parameters, and clears
the WV, WSV, and WSI command settings.
WV
Specifies the voltage source for the staircase sweep source and its parameters, and
clears the WI, WSI, and WSV command settings.
WM
Sets the automatic abort function.
ESC
Enables or disables the enhanced sweep stop function, and sets the stop condition.
PT
Sets the timing parameters for a pulse source.
PWI
Specifies the pulsed sweep current source and its parameters, and clears the
settings of the PWV, WSV, and WSI commands.
PWV
Specifies the pulsed sweep voltage source and its parameters, and clears the
settings of the PWI, WSV, and WSI commands.
WM
Sets the automatic abort function.
ESC
Enables or disables the sweep stop function, and sets the stop condition.
WSI
Specifies the staircase sweep current source which is synchronized with the
staircase sweep current source set by the WI command or the pulsed sweep current
source set by the PWI command.
WSV
Specifies the staircase sweep voltage source which is synchronized with the
staircase sweep voltage source set by the WV command or the pulsed sweep
voltage source set by the PWV command.
MI
Specifies the current source (SMU) synchronized with the sampling
measurements, and its parameters.
MV
Specifies the voltage source (SMU or VSU) synchronized with the sampling
measurement, and its parameters.
MP
Specifies the PGU synchronized with the sampling measurements, and its
parameters.
MCC
Clears the settings of the specified sampling sources defined by MI, MV, or MP
command.
MSC
Sets the automatic abort condition (stop condition).
TSC
Enables or disables the time stamp function.
TSR
Resets the time stamp to zero.
TSQ?
Returns the time stamp.
1-44
Agilent 4155C/4156C GPIB Command Reference, Edition 6
4155C/4156C FLEX Commands
Binary Format in US42 Mode
Category
Quasi-static
CV
Measurement
Setup
Binary Search
Measurement
Setup
Linear Search
Measurement
Setup
PGU Control
Command
Summary
QSM
Sets the automatic abort condition.
QSL
Enables or disables the data output and compensation for the leakage current.
QSZ/QSZ?
Enables or disables the capacitance offset cancel function, or executes the
capacitance offset measurement. Query returns the offset data.
QST
Sets the measurement timing parameters.
QSR
Sets the current measurement range.
QSV
Specifies the voltage output channel and its source parameters.
BSM
Specifies the source output control mode; normal or cautious.
BST
Sets the measurement timing parameters.
BSVM
Selects the data output mode; normal or all data.
BSI
Specifies the current output channel, and its source parameters.
BSSI
Specifies the synchronous current output channel, and its source parameters.
BGV
Specifies the voltage monitor channel, and its search parameters.
BSV
Specifies the voltage output channel, and its source parameters.
BSSV
Specifies the synchronous voltage output channel, and its source parameters.
BGI
Specifies the current monitor channel, and its search parameters.
LSTM
Sets the measurement timing parameters.
LSVM
Selects the data output mode; normal or all data.
LSI
Specifies the current output channel, and its source parameters.
LSSI
Specifies the synchronous current output channel, and its source parameters.
LGV
Specifies the voltage monitor channel, and its search parameters.
LSV
Specifies the voltage output channel, and its source parameters.
LSSV
Specifies the synchronous voltage output channel, and its source parameters.
LGI
Specifies the current monitor channel, and its search parameters.
WM
Sets the automatic abort function.
POR
Sets the output impedance of the PGU.
SPG
Sets the PGU output mode, and its parameters.
SRP
Starts the PGU output force.
SPP
Stops the PGU output force.
Agilent 4155C/4156C GPIB Command Reference, Edition 6
1-45
4155C/4156C FLEX Commands
Binary Format in US42 Mode
Category
Stress Source
Setup
Measurement
Execution
Program
Memory
External
Trigger
Command
Summary
POR
Sets the output impedance of the PGU.
STT
Sets the stress time and stress mode.
STI
Specifies the dc stress current source (SMU) and its parameters.
STV
Specifies the dc stress voltage source (SMU or VSU) and its parameters.
STP
Sets the PGU for the dc voltage stress output or pulse stress output.
STC
Clears the settings of the specified stress sources defined by STI, STV or STP
command.
STM
Sets the automatic abort condition (stop condition) for the stress force.
XE
Triggers the 4155C/4156C to perform measurements, and returns the
measurement data. Needs the RMD? command to read the measurement data.
TI/TI?
Executes the high speed spot current measurement.
TV/TV?
Executes the high speed spot voltage measurement.
TTI/TTI?
Executes the high-speed spot current measurement, and returns the time stamp.
TTV/TTV?
Executes the high-speed spot voltage measurement, and returns the time stamp.
ST
Used with END command to store a program in the internal program memory. ST
command indicates the beginning of the program.
END
Used with ST command to store a program in the internal program memory. END
command indicates the end of the program.
SCR
Scratches the specified program from the internal program memory.
LST?
Requests a catalog of internal memory programs or a specific program listing.
DO
Executes internal memory programs in the order specified.
RU
Executes internal memory programs sequentially.
STG
Sets the trigger function using the Ext Trig In/Out terminals.
OS
Causes the 4155C/4156C to send a trigger signal from the external trigger output
terminal (Ext Trig Out).
WS
Goes into a wait state until the 4155C/4156C receives an external trigger signal
via the Ext Trig In terminal.
TM
The TM3 command allows to use an external trigger to release the paused status
set by the PA command, or to start the measurement if the 4155C/4156C is not in
the wait status set by the PA/WS command.
1-46
Agilent 4155C/4156C GPIB Command Reference, Edition 6
4155C/4156C FLEX Commands
Binary Format in US42 Mode
Category
Network
Operation
Status Byte
Query
Command
Summary
SDSK
Selects the mass storage device.
OPEN
Opens the specified file on the mass storage device specified by the SDSK
command.
RD?
Reads the ASCII data in the file opened by the OPEN command.
WR
Writes the specified characters or numeric data (ASCII) at the end of the file
opened by the OPEN command.
CLOSE
Closes the file opened by the OPEN command.
SPR
Selects the remote printer.
SPL
Specifies the ASCII data to print, and spools the data to the printer specified by the
SPR command.
PRN
Prints the data specified by the SPL command.
*CLS
Clears the status byte register, the standard event status register, and the error
register.
*ESE(?)
Sets or asks the bits of the standard event status enable register.
*ESR?
Returns the present contents of the standard event status register.
*SRE
Enables the specified bits of the status byte register.
*SRE?
Requests which bits of the status byte register are enabled.
*STB?
Requests the status byte.
CMD?
Returns the 4155C/4156C control language mode.
ERR?
Returns error codes.
*IDN?
Requests the instrument model number and the ROM version number.
LOP?
Requests the operation status of all source units (SMUs and VSUs).
*LRN?
Requests unit settings or the 4155C/4156C command parameter settings.
NUB?
Requests the number of measurement data in the output data buffer.
*OPC(?)
Starts to monitor pending operations, or asks the OPC bit setting.
*OPT?
Returns the reportable device options, which are the units in the 41501A/B
Expander.
:SYST:ERR?
Returns the error code and the error message.
UNT?
Requests the model and revision numbers of all units.
WNU?
Requests the number of sweep steps specified by the sweep command.
Agilent 4155C/4156C GPIB Command Reference, Edition 6
1-47
4155C/4156C FLEX Commands
AB
AB
The AB command aborts the present operation and subsequent command execution.
Syntax
AB
Remarks
The AB command stops the operation now in progress, such as the measurement
execution, source setup changing, and so on. But this command does not change the
present condition. For example, if the 4155C/4156C just keeps to force the dc bias,
the AB command does not stop the dc bias output.
The AB command sets the 4155C/4156C as listed in the following table.
Present Operation
4155C/4156C Setting
Staircase Sweep Measurements
Sets specified start voltage or current.
1ch Pulsed Spot Measurements
Sets specified base voltage or current.
Pulsed Sweep Measurements
Sets specified base voltage or current.
Staircase Sweep with Pulsed
Bias Measurements
Sets specified start voltage or current and
base voltage or current.
Pulsed Sweep with Pulsed Bias
Measurements
Sets specified base voltage or current.
Sampling Measurements
Sets specified base voltage or current.
Stress Force
Sets specified base voltage or current.
Self-Test
Same as set by CL command.
a
Self-Calibration a
Same as set by CL command.
WAIT State (PA or WS
command)
Settings do not change.
Program Execution (RU or DO
command)
Settings do not change.
a. The AB command cannot abort this operation if the AB command is
executed from the internal memory program. But the AB command
from the memory program can abort the automatic calibration.
If you start an operation that you may want to abort, do not send any command after
the command or command string that starts the operation. If you do, the AB
command cannot enter the command input buffer until the intervening command
execution starts, so the operation cannot be aborted. In this case, use the Device
Clear (CLEAR command in HP BASIC) to end the operation.
1-48
Agilent 4155C/4156C GPIB Command Reference, Edition 6
4155C/4156C FLEX Commands
AB
Output Data
The 4155C/4156C returns the all measurement data until when the AB command is
executed. The output format of the last data will be as shown below:
Measurement Mode
Data when abort occurs
1 channel sweep
Dummy[,Source_data]
Multi channel sweep
Dummy[,Source_data] a
1 channel sampling
[Index_dummy,]Dummy
Multi channel sampling
[Index_dummy,]Dummy b
QSCV
[DummyL,]DummyC[,Source_data]
Linear search
[raw data ... ,]Search,Source_dummy,Dummy
Binary search
a. Source_data will be returned if the abort occurs during the measurement
by the last measurement channel defined by the MM command.
b. Index_dummy will be returned even if the abort occurs during the measurement by the unit which is not the first measurement channel defined
by the MM command.
where,
Dummy: Dummy of the measurement data.
Source_data: Source output data. Selected by the FMT command.
Index_dummy: Dummy of the data index. Selected by the FMT command.
DummyL: Leakage current dummy data. Selected by the QSL command.
DummyC: Capacitance dummy data.
Search: Status data of the search measurement.
Source_dummy: Dummy of the source output data.
raw data: Measurement data. Selected by the LSVM or BSVM command.
If Source_data output is disabled, the status of the last data will be 192 (128+64).
where 128 means the EOD, and 64 means the invalid data.
Example
Statements
OUTPUT @Hp4156;"AB"
Agilent 4155C/4156C GPIB Command Reference, Edition 6
1-49
4155C/4156C FLEX Commands
ACH
ACH
The ACH command is effective when the instrument is in the US42 command
mode. Otherwise, the ACH command is not required to control the 4155C/4156C.
The ACH command assigns the channel numbers used in the measurement
programs for the 4142B to the channel numbers available for the 4155C/4156C.
Insert the US42 command and the ACH command to assign the channel numbers for
the 4142B to the 4155C/4156C channel numbers at the beginning of the
measurement program which was created to control the 4142B.
The ACH command translates the 4142B channel numbers to the 4155C/4156C
channel numbers at the program execution. You do not need to change the 4142B
channel numbers defined in the commands that follow the US42 and ACH
commands in the program. Do not change the 4142B channel numbers in the
program. Otherwise, the channel number will not be translated correctly.
Syntax
ACH [chnum[,4142ch]]
If you do not specify both chnum and 4142ch, channel number assignment is
canceled and all channel number assignments are cleared.
Parameter
chnum :
Channel numbers available for the 4155C/4156C. Integer expression.
See below.
chnum
Unit
chnum
Unit
1
SMU1
21
VSU1
2
SMU2
22
VSU2
3
SMU3
23
VMU1
4
SMU4
24
VMU2
5a
SMU5
26
GNDU
6a
SMU6
a. For MPSMUs in the 41501A/B Expander. For HPSMU,
channel number is 6, not 5.
1-50
Agilent 4155C/4156C GPIB Command Reference, Edition 6
4155C/4156C FLEX Commands
ACH
4142ch :
Channel number used in the measurement program for the 4142B. 1 to
28 channels are available. Integer expression.
If the measurement program includes the control routine for the
41425A AFU, you should not assign the channel numbers for AFU.
The channel numbers should be for the 41420A HPSMU, 41421B
MPSMU, 41422A HCU, 41423A HVU or 41424A VSU/VMU. If you
specify the channel numbers for HCU or HVU, some commands and
measurement ranges cannot be used for the 4155C/4156C. In this case,
you must modify the command parameter settings.
If you do not specify 4142ch, this channel number is not assigned. This
is same as ACH N,N command.
Example
Statements
OUTPUT
OUTPUT
OUTPUT
OUTPUT
OUTPUT
@Hp4156;"US42"
@Hp4156;"ACH 1,2"
@Hp4156;"ACH 2,3"
@Hp4156;"ACH 3,4"
@Hp4156;"ACH 4,5"
Agilent 4155C/4156C GPIB Command Reference, Edition 6
1-51
4155C/4156C FLEX Commands
AV
AV
The AV command sets the number of samples that are taken and averaged for the
measurement. This command setting is ignored by the following measurement
mode.
1. 1ch pulsed spot measurements with "keep pulse width"
2. Pulsed sweep measurements with "keep pulse width"
3. Staircase sweep with pulsed bias measurements with "keep pulse width"
4. Sampling measurements with the sampling interval less than 2 msec (see the MT
command)
where, "keep pulse width" means the measurement setup which the PT command
priority parameter is set to 0 or default setting (see the PT command).
Syntax
AV averaging number[,averaging mode]
Parameters
averaging number :
1 to 1023 are available in US command mode. Numeric
expression.
1 to 1023, and −1 to −1023 are available in US42
command mode. Initial setting is 1.
For positive number input, the number of samples is set to
averaging number.
For negative number (−1 to −100) input, the AV command
sets the 4155C/4156C integration time to LONG, and sets
the PLC (Power Line Cycle) value to averaging number. If
averaging number is −101 to −1023, the PLC value is
automatically set to −100. To return the integration time to
SHORT, use the SLI command.
averaging mode :
Example
Statements
0 or 1. Integer expression. Initial setting is 0. Used as a
placeholder only, the value is ignored. This parameter is
just to keep the 4142B control command syntax.
OUTPUT @Hp4156;"AV 10"
OUTPUT @Hp4156;"AV -50"
OUTPUT @Hp4156;"AV 100,1"
1-52
Agilent 4155C/4156C GPIB Command Reference, Edition 6
4155C/4156C FLEX Commands
AZ
AZ
The AZ command enables or disables the ADC zero function of the internal A/D
converter (ADC). This command is effective for the voltage measurement and the
current measurement using the 10 nA range or greater.
The ADC zero function must be set to ON to satisfy the measurement accuracy
specifications. Set the function to OFF in cases that the measurement speed is more
important than the measurement accuracy. This reduces the integration time to
approximately half if the integration time is set to approx. 10 msec or more.
US, US42, *RST commands and the device clear enable the function.
Syntax
AZ mode
Parameters
mode
Mode ON or OFF. 0 or 1 are available. Initial setting is 1.
0: OFF. Disables the function.
1: ON. Enables the function.
Example
Statements
OUTPUT @Hp4156;"AZ 0"
Agilent 4155C/4156C GPIB Command Reference, Edition 6
1-53
4155C/4156C FLEX Commands
BC
BC
The BC command clears the output data buffer that stores measurement data and
query command response data. This command does not change the measurement
settings.
Syntax
BC
Example
Statements
OUTPUT @Hp4156;"BC"
1-54
Agilent 4155C/4156C GPIB Command Reference, Edition 6
4155C/4156C FLEX Commands
BGI
BGI
The BGI command specifies the current monitor channel and its search parameters
in the binary search measurement. This command is only for the US control mode.
This command ignores the RI command setting.
This command setting is cleared by the BGV, LGV and LGI commands.
Execution
Conditions
The MM 15 command must be sent before sending this command.
Syntax
BGI chnum,mode,condition,Irange,Itarget
Parameters
chnum:
Channel number of the unit used to measure the current. Integer
expression.
chnum
Unit
chnum
Unit
1
SMU1
4
SMU4
2
SMU2
5a
SMU5
3
SMU3
6a
SMU6
a. For MPSMUs in the 41501A/B Expander. For HPSMU,
channel number is 6, not 5.
mode:
Search mode. 0 (limit mode) or 1 (repeat mode). See condition.
condition: Search condition. The meaning of the condition parameter depends on
the mode setting:
mode
condition
0
The condition parameter must be the limit value for the
search target (Itarget). in A. The search stops when the
measurement data reaches Itarget ± condition.
The parameter must be either 0 or a positive value.
1
The condition parameter must be the times of current
change of the source unit in the binary search. The
parameter must be a value from 1 to 16.
Agilent 4155C/4156C GPIB Command Reference, Edition 6
1-55
4155C/4156C FLEX Commands
BGI
Irange:
Ranging type for current measurement. Integer expression.
Ranging Type a
range
9 (only for 4156C)
10 pA limited auto ranging
10 (only for 4156C)
100 pA limited auto ranging
11
1 nA limited auto ranging
12
10 nA limited auto ranging
13
100 nA limited auto ranging
14
1 μA limited auto ranging
15
10 μA limited auto ranging
16
100 μA limited auto ranging
17
1 mA limited auto ranging
18
10 mA limited auto ranging
19
100 mA limited auto ranging
20 (only for HPSMU)
1 A limited auto ranging
a. Limited auto ranging uses the lowest available measurement range that covers the measurement value, where the
specified range is the minimum range. For example, 10 μA
limited auto ranging uses the 10 μA range to measure 1 nA,
and uses the 100 mA range to measure 50 mA.
Itarget:
Search target current (in A). Numeric expression.
0 to ±100 mA for SMU, 0 to ±1 A for HPSMU.
NOTE
Itarget and Irange
If the Itarget value is greater than the minimum measurement range specified by the
Irange parameter, the measurement unit does not use the measurement ranges below
the Itarget value. It uses the lowest range that covers the Itarget value.
Example
Statements
OUTPUT @Hp4156;"BGI 1,0,1E-8,14,1E-6"
See Also
BSM command
1-56
Agilent 4155C/4156C GPIB Command Reference, Edition 6
4155C/4156C FLEX Commands
BGI
Remarks
In the limit search mode, if the search cannot find Itarget and the following two
conditions are satisfied, the 4155C/4156C repeats the binary search between the last
source value and the source stop value.
•
Itarget is between the data at source stop value and the last measurement data.
•
Itarget is between the data at source start value and the data at:
source value = | stop − start | / 2.
If search cannot find Itarget and the following two conditions are satisfied, the
4155C/4156C repeats the binary search between the last source value and the source
start value.
•
Itarget is between the data at source start value and the last measurement data.
•
Itarget is between the data at source stop value and the data at:
source value = | stop − start | / 2.
Agilent 4155C/4156C GPIB Command Reference, Edition 6
1-57
4155C/4156C FLEX Commands
BGV
BGV
The BGV command specifies the voltage monitor channel and its search parameters
in the binary search measurement. This command is only for the US control mode.
This command ignores the RV command setting.
This command setting is cleared by the BGI, LGV and LGI commands.
Execution
Conditions
The MM 15 command must be sent before sending this command.
Syntax
BGV chnum,mode,condition,Vrange,Vtarget
Parameters
chnum:
Channel number of the unit used to measure voltage. Integer
expression.
chnum
Unit
chnum
Unit
1
SMU1
5a
SMU5
2
SMU2
6a
SMU6
3
SMU3
23
VMU1
4
SMU4
24
VMU2
a. For MPSMUs in the 41501A/B Expander. For HPSMU,
channel number is 6, not 5.
mode:
Search mode. 0 (limit mode) or 1 (repeat mode). See condition.
condition: Search condition. The meaning of the condition parameter depends on
the mode setting:
mode
1-58
condition
0
The condition parameter must be the limit value for the
search target (Vtarget). in V. The search stops when the
measurement data reaches Vtarget ± condition.
The parameter must be either 0 or a positive value.
1
The condition parameter must be the times of voltage
change of the source unit in the binary search. The
parameter must be a value from 1 to 16.
Agilent 4155C/4156C GPIB Command Reference, Edition 6
4155C/4156C FLEX Commands
BGV
Ranging type for voltage measurement. Integer expression.
Vrange:
Ranging Type a
range
10 (only for VMU in differential mode)
0.2 V limited auto ranging
11
2 V limited auto ranging
12 (for SMU and VMU in grounded mode)
20 V limited auto ranging
13 (for SMU)
40 V limited auto ranging
14 (for SMU)
100 V limited auto ranging
15 (only for HPSMU)
200 V limited auto ranging
a. Limited auto ranging uses the lowest available measurement
range that covers the measurement voltage, where the specified
range is the minimum range. For example, 20 V limited auto
ranging uses the 20 V range to measure 1 V, and uses the 100 V
range to measure 50 V.
Vtarget:
Search target voltage (in V). Numeric expression.
0 to ±100 for SMU, 0 to ±200 for HPSMU.
NOTE
Vtarget and Vrange
If the Vtarget value is greater than the minimum measurement range specified by the
Vrange parameter, the measurement unit does not use the measurement ranges
below the Vtarget value. It uses the lowest range that covers the Vtarget value.
Example
Statements
OUTPUT @Hp4156;"BGV 1,0,0.1,12,5"
See Also
BSM command
Agilent 4155C/4156C GPIB Command Reference, Edition 6
1-59
4155C/4156C FLEX Commands
BGV
Remarks
In the limited search mode, if the search cannot find Vtarget and the following two
conditions are satisfied, the 4155C/4156C repeats the binary search between the last
source value and the source stop value.
•
Vtarget is between the data at source stop value and the last measurement data.
•
Vtarget is between the data at source start value and the data at:
source value = | stop − start | / 2.
If search cannot find Vtarget and the following two conditions are satisfied, the
4155C/4156C repeats the binary search between the last source value and the source
start value.
•
Vtarget is between the data at source start value and the last measurement data.
•
Vtarget is between the data at source stop value and the data at:
source value = | stop − start | / 2.
1-60
Agilent 4155C/4156C GPIB Command Reference, Edition 6
4155C/4156C FLEX Commands
BSI
BSI
The BSI command specifies the current output channel, and its source parameters in
the binary search measurement. This command is only for the US control mode.
This command setting is cleared by the BSV, LSV and LSI commands.
After search stops, source output goes to the source start value.
Execution
Conditions
The MM 15 command must be sent before sending this command.
Syntax
BSI chnum,range,start,stop[,Vcomp]
If you send this command to the program memory (see the ST command), do not
omit the Vcomp parameter. It is necessary when using the internal program memory.
Parameters
chnum:
Channel number of the unit used to force current. Integer expression.
chnum
Unit
1
SMU1
2
SMU2
3
SMU3
4
SMU4
5a
SMU5 (MPSMU)
6a
SMU6 (MPSMU or HPSMU)
a. For SMUs in the 41501A/B Expander.
range:
Ranging type for current output. Integer expression.
range
Ranging Type a
0
Auto ranging
9 (only for 4156C)
10 pA limited auto ranging
10 (only for 4156C)
100 pA limited auto ranging
11
1 nA limited auto ranging
Agilent 4155C/4156C GPIB Command Reference, Edition 6
1-61
4155C/4156C FLEX Commands
BSI
range
Ranging Type a
12
10 nA limited auto ranging
13
100 nA limited auto ranging
14
1 μA limited auto ranging
15
10 μA limited auto ranging
16
100 μA limited auto ranging
17
1 mA limited auto ranging
18
10 mA limited auto ranging
19
100 mA limited auto ranging
20 (only for HPSMU)
1 A limited auto ranging
a. Auto ranging uses the lowest available output range that
covers the start and stop values. Limited auto ranging is the
same, but the specified range is the minimum range. For
example, 10 μA limited auto ranging uses the 10 μA range
to force 1 nA, and uses the 100 mA range to force 50 mA.
start:
Source start current (in A). Numeric expression. See Table 1-7.
The start and stop parameters must have different values.
0 to ±100E–3 for SMU, 0 to ±1 for HPSMU
stop:
Source stop current (in A). Numeric expression. See Table 1-7.
The start and stop parameters must have different values.
0 to ±100E–3 for SMU, 0 to ±1 for HPSMU
Vcomp:
Voltage compliance value (in V). Numeric expression. See Table 1-7.
If you do not specify this parameter, Vcomp remains at its previous
value.
Example
Statements
OUTPUT @Hp4156;"BSI 1,0,1E-12,1E-6,10"
1-62
Agilent 4155C/4156C GPIB Command Reference, Edition 6
4155C/4156C FLEX Commands
BSI
Table 1-7
Available Parameter Values for BSI Command
Output
Range
Resolution
in A
start and stop
in A
Maximum
Vcomp in V
10 pA
10E–15
0 to ±10E–12
±100
100 pA
10E–15
0 to ±100E–12
±100
1 nA
100E–15
0 to ±1E–9
±100
±200
10 nA
1E–12
0 to ±10E–9
10E–12
0 to ±100E–9
100E–12
0 to ±1E–6
1E–9
0 to ±10E–6
10E–9
0 to ±100E–6
100E–9
0 to ±1E–3
1E–6
0 to ±10E–3
10E–6
100E–6
1A
100E–6
For HPSMU.
For HPSMU.
±100
±200
100 mA
For HPSMU.
±100
±200
10 mA
For HPSMU.
±100
±200
1 mA
For HPSMU.
±100
±200
100 μA
For HPSMU.
±100
±200
10 μA
For HPSMU.
±100
±200
1 μA
For 4156C.
±100
±200
100 nA
Remarks
0 to ±20E–3
±100
to ±50E–3
±40
to ±100E–3
±20
0 to ±50E–3
±200
to ±100E–3
±100
0 to ±50E–3
±200
to ±125E–3
±100
to ±500E–3
±40
to ±1
±20
For HPSMU.
For HPSMU.
Agilent 4155C/4156C GPIB Command Reference, Edition 6
1-63
4155C/4156C FLEX Commands
BSM
BSM
The BSM command specifies the source output control mode in the binary search
measurement. This command is only for the US control mode.
Execution
Conditions
The MM 15 command must be sent before sending this command.
Syntax
BSM mode
Parameters
mode:
Normal mode
(BSM 0)
The operation of the normal mode is explained below. In this example the voltage
output mode is described. The method is also effective for the current output mode.
Source output control mode, 0 (normal mode) or 1 (cautious mode). If
you do not enter this command, the normal mode is set.
measurement & judgement
Vstop
− Vdiff /2
− Vdiff /8
target found
− Vdiff /16
+Vdiff /4
+Vdiff /32
+Vdiff
+Vdiff /64
Vdiff = | Vstop − Vstart |
Vstart
measurement
1. The source unit forces Vstart, and the monitor unit makes a measurement.
2. The source unit forces Vstop, and the monitor unit makes a measurement.
If the target value is out of the range between the measured value at Vstart and
the measured value at Vstop, the search stops.
3. The source unit forces Vdiff /2, and the monitor unit makes a measurement.
If the result value is not the target value, the result value is used to decide the
direction (+ or –) of the next voltage change. The value of the change is always
half of the previous change.
1-64
Agilent 4155C/4156C GPIB Command Reference, Edition 6
4155C/4156C FLEX Commands
BSM
4. Repeats this voltage change and measurement until the search condition is
satisfied. For information on the search condition, see the BGV or BGI
command. If the source change value is less than the setting resolution, the
search stops.
Cautious mode
(BSM 1)
The operation of the cautious mode is explained below. In this example the voltage
output mode is described. This method is also effective for the current output mode.
Vstop
Vdiff = | Vstop − Vstart |
− Vdiff /8
target found
− Vdiff /16
measurement & judgement
+Vdiff /4
+Vdiff /32
+Vdiff /64
+Vdiff /2
Vstart
measurement
1. The source unit forces Vstart, and the monitor unit makes a measurement.
2. The source unit forces Vdiff /2, and the monitor unit makes a measurement.
If the result value is not the target value, the result value is used to decide the
direction (+ or –) of the next voltage change. The value of the change is always
half of the previous change.
3. Repeats this voltage change and measurement until the search condition is
satisfied. For information on the search condition, see the BGV or BGI
command. If the source output value is less than the setting resolution, the
search stops.
Example
Statements
OUTPUT @Hp4156;"BSM 1"
Agilent 4155C/4156C GPIB Command Reference, Edition 6
1-65
4155C/4156C FLEX Commands
BSSI
BSSI
The BSSI command specifies the synchronous current output channel and its source
parameters in the binary search measurement. This command is only for the US
control mode.
The synchronous source output will be:
Synchronous source output = BSI source output + offset current
where BSI source output means the output set by the BSI command. This command
cannot be used with the BSV command (voltage force binary search).
This command setting is cleared by the BSSV, LSSV, or LSSI command.
Execution
Conditions
The MM 15 command must be sent before sending this command.
Syntax
BSSI chnum,polarity,offset[,Vcomp]
The BSI command must be sent before sending this command.
If you enter this command into the program memory (see the ST command), do not
omit the Vcomp parameter. It is necessary when using the internal program memory.
Parameters
chnum:
Channel number of the unit used for synchronous current source.
Integer expression.
chnum
Unit
1
SMU1
2
SMU2
3
SMU3
4
SMU4
5a
SMU5 (MPSMU)
6a
SMU6 (MPSMU or HPSMU)
a. For SMUs in the 41501A/B Expander.
polarity:
Polarity of the BSI source output. 0 (negative) or 1 (positive).
if you set polarity=0, synchronous output = −BSI output +offset.
if you set polarity=1, synchronous output = BSI output + offset.
1-66
Agilent 4155C/4156C GPIB Command Reference, Edition 6
4155C/4156C FLEX Commands
BSSI
offset:
Offset current (in A). Numeric expression.
Available values: 0 to ±0.1 for SMU, 0 to ±1 for HPSMU.
Synchronous output must not be over the output range specified by the
BSI command.
Vcomp:
Voltage compliance value (in V). Numeric expression. If you do not
specify this parameter, Vcomp remains at its previous value.
Example
Statements
OUTPUT @Hp4156;"BSSI 1,0,1E-6,10"
See Also
Refer to the BSI command for the source output value, output range, and the
available compliance values.
Agilent 4155C/4156C GPIB Command Reference, Edition 6
1-67
4155C/4156C FLEX Commands
BSSV
BSSV
The BSSV command specifies the synchronous voltage output channel, and its
source parameters in the binary search measurement. This command is only for the
US control mode.
The synchronous source output will be:
Synchronous source output = BSV source output + offset voltage
where BSV source output means the output set by the BSV command. This
command cannot be used with the BSI command (current force binary search).
This command setting is cleared by the BSSI, LSSV, or LSSI command.
Execution
Conditions
The MM 15 command must be sent before sending this command.
Syntax
BSSV chnum,polarity,offset[,Icomp]
The BSV command must be sent before sending this command.
If you enter this command into the program memory (see the ST command), do not
omit the Icomp parameter. It is necessary when using the internal program memory.
Parameters
chnum:
Channel number of the unit used for synchronous voltage source.
Integer expression.
chnum
Unit
1
SMU1
2
SMU2
3
SMU3
4
SMU4
5a
SMU5 (MPSMU)
6a
SMU6 (MPSMU or HPSMU)
21
VSU1
22
VSU2
a. For SMUs in the 41501A/B Expander.
1-68
Agilent 4155C/4156C GPIB Command Reference, Edition 6
4155C/4156C FLEX Commands
BSSV
polarity:
Polarity of the BSV source output. 0 (negative) or 1 (positive).
if you set polarity=0, synchronous output = −BSV output +offset.
if you set polarity=1, synchronous output = BSV output + offset.
offset:
Offset voltage (in V). Numeric expression.
Available values: 0 to ±100 for SMU, 0 to ±200 for HPSMU.
Synchronous output must not be over the output range specified by the
BSV command.
Icomp:
Current compliance value (in A). Numeric expression. If you do not
specify this parameter, Icomp remains at its previous value. Zero amps
(0 A) is not a valid value for the Icomp parameter.
Example
Statements
OUTPUT @Hp4156;"BSSV 1,0,5,1E-6"
See Also
Refer to the BSV command for the source output value, output range, and the
available compliance values.
Agilent 4155C/4156C GPIB Command Reference, Edition 6
1-69
4155C/4156C FLEX Commands
BST
BST
The BST command sets the timing parameters for the binary search measurement.
This command is only for the US control mode.
Execution
Conditions
The MM 15 command must be sent before sending this command.
Syntax
BST hold,delay
Parameters
hold :
Hold time (in seconds). Numeric expression. This value is the time
from measurement trigger to the beginning of delay time.
0 to 655.35 sec. 0.01 sec resolution. Initial setting = 0.
delay :
Delay time (in seconds). Numeric expression. This is the time that has
elapsed between the end of hold time, or the change of the source
output value, and the start of the measurement.
0 to 65.535 sec. 0.0001 sec resolution. Initial setting = 0.
Example
Statements
OUTPUT @Hp4155;"BST 5,0.1"
1-70
Agilent 4155C/4156C GPIB Command Reference, Edition 6
4155C/4156C FLEX Commands
BSV
BSV
The BSV command specifies the voltage output channel, and its source parameters
in the binary search measurement. This command is only for the US control mode.
This command setting is cleared by the BSI, LSV, or LSI command.
After search stops, source output goes to the source start value.
Execution
Conditions
The MM 15 command must be sent before sending this command.
Syntax
BSV chnum,range,start,stop[,Icomp]
If you enter this command into the program memory (see the ST command), do not
omit the Icomp parameter. It is necessary when using the internal program memory.
Parameters
chnum:
Channel number of the unit used to force the voltage. Integer
expression.
chnum
Unit
1
SMU1
2
SMU2
3
SMU3
4
SMU4
5a
SMU5
6a
SMU6
21
VSU1
22
VSU2
a. For MPSMUs in the 41501A/B Expander. For HPSMU,
channel number is 6, not 5.
Agilent 4155C/4156C GPIB Command Reference, Edition 6
1-71
4155C/4156C FLEX Commands
BSV
range:
Ranging type for voltage output. Integer expression.
Ranging Type a
range
0
Auto ranging
11 (for SMU)
2 V limited auto ranging
12
20 V limited auto ranging
13 (for SMU)
40 V limited auto ranging
14 (for SMU)
100 V limited auto ranging
15 (only for HPSMU)
200 V limited auto ranging
a. Auto ranging uses the lowest output range that covers the
start and stop values. Limited auto ranging is the same, but
the specified range is the minimum range. For example, 20
V limited auto ranging uses the 20 V range to force 1 V
start value to 10 V stop value.
start:
Source start voltage (in V). Numeric expression. See Table 1-8.
The start and stop parameters must have different values.
0 to ±100 for SMU, 0 to ±200 for HPSMU.
stop:
Source stop voltage (in V). Numeric expression. See Table 1-8.
The start and stop parameters must have different values.
0 to ±100 for SMU, 0 to ±200 for HPSMU.
Icomp:
Example
Statements
Current compliance value (in A). Numeric expression. See Table 1-8. If
you do not specify this parameter, Icomp remains at its previous value.
Zero amps (0 A) is not allowed for Icomp.
OUTPUT @Hp4156;"BSV 1,0,0,20,1E-6"
1-72
Agilent 4155C/4156C GPIB Command Reference, Edition 6
4155C/4156C FLEX Commands
BSV
Table 1-8
Available Parameter Values for BSV Command
Output
Range
2V
20 V
40 V
100 V
200 V
Resolution
in V
100E–6
1E–3
2E–3
5E–3
10E–3
start and stop
in V
0 to ±2
0 to ±20
0 to ±40
0 to ±100
0 to ±200
Maximum
Icomp in A
Remarks
±100E–3
For SMU.
±1
For HPSMU.
±100E–3
For SMU.
±1
For HPSMU.
−
For VSU.
±50E–3
For SMU.
±500E–3
For HPSMU.
±20E–3
For SMU.
±125E–3
For HPSMU.
±50E–3
Agilent 4155C/4156C GPIB Command Reference, Edition 6
1-73
4155C/4156C FLEX Commands
BSVM
BSVM
The BSVM command selects the data output mode for the binary search
measurement. This command is only for the US control mode.
Execution
Conditions
The MM 15 command must be sent before sending this command.
Syntax
BSVM mode
Parameters
mode :
Data output mode. Integer expression. 0 (normal) or 1 (all data output).
0 : Outputs Search, Source_data, and Data.
1 : Outputs D1, D2, ..., Search, Source_data, and Data.
where,
Search is the search status.
Source_data is the source output data of the search target.
Data is the measurement data of the search target.
Dn (n: integer) is the data of the n th measurement point, and contains
Source_data and Measurement_data of each measurement point.
For the data output format, refer to “Data Output Format” on page 1-11.
Example
Statements
OUTPUT @Hp4155;"BSVM 1"
1-74
Agilent 4155C/4156C GPIB Command Reference, Edition 6
4155C/4156C FLEX Commands
CA
CA
The CA command performs calibration of the measurement unit. When you execute
the CA command, the output switches of the specified units are set to OFF.
Syntax
CA [slotnum]
Parameters
slotnum:
Slot number. Integer expression. See below.
slotnum
Unit calibrated
0
GNDU
1
SMU1
2
SMU2
3
SMU3
4
SMU4
5a
SMU5
6a
SMU6
7
VSU1, VSU2, VMU1 and VMU2
8
PGU1 and PGU2
a. For MPSMUs in the 41501A/B Expander. For HPSMU,
channel number is 6, not 5.
If you do not specify slotnum, all units are calibrated.
Example
Statements
OUTPUT @Hp4156;"CA"
OUTPUT @Hp4156;"CA 1"
Execution
Conditions
To perform the calibration properly, the measurement terminals should be opened
before starting the calibration.
Agilent 4155C/4156C GPIB Command Reference, Edition 6
1-75
4155C/4156C FLEX Commands
*CAL?
*CAL?
The CAL? query command performs a full calibration of the 4155C/4156C, then
returns a <numeric_value> to indicate the calibration result.
Syntax
*CAL?
Query Response
In US command mode:
result<LF^EOI>
In US42 command mode:
result<CR/LF^EOI>
where, result returns one of the following values:
0: Pass.
1: Fail.
Example
Statements
OUTPUT @Hp4156;"*CAL?"
ENTER @Hp4156;A
Execution
Conditions
To perform the calibration properly, the measurement terminals should be opened
before starting the calibration.
1-76
Agilent 4155C/4156C GPIB Command Reference, Edition 6
4155C/4156C FLEX Commands
CL
CL
The CL command disables the specified units by setting the output switches to OFF.
Execution
Conditions
No unit may be in the HIGH VOLTAGE state (forcing more than ±40 V, or voltage
compliance set to more than ±40 V). However, if you do not specify chnum for CL
command, there are no restrictions on the execution conditions.
Syntax
CL [chnum[,chnum...[,chnum]...]]
Parameters
chnum:
Channel number. Integer expression. See below.
chnum
Unit disabled
chnum
Unit disabled
1
SMU1
21
VSU1
2
SMU2
22
VSU2
3
SMU3
23 a
VMU1
4
SMU4
24 a
VMU2
5b
SMU5
26
GNDU
6b
SMU6
27
PGU1
28
PGU2
a. VMU1 and VMU2 have the output switch in common.
b. For MPSMUs in the 41501A/B Expander. For HPSMU,
channel number is 6, not 5.
If you do not specify chnum in the US command mode, the 4155C/4156C sets all
units to 0 V in order, from higher voltage range (output range or measurement
range) to lower voltage range, and all output switches are set to OFF.
If you do not specify chnum in the US42 command mode, the CL command does
not open the output switch of GNDU and VMU. For SMU, VSU and PGU, the
4155C/4156C does the same operation as in the US command mode.
If you specify multiple chnums, the 4155C/4156C sets the units to 0 V in the
specified order, and the output switches are set to OFF.
For example, OUTPUT @Hp4156;"CL 1,2,3" disables SMU1, SMU2, and SMU3,
in that order.
Agilent 4155C/4156C GPIB Command Reference, Edition 6
1-77
4155C/4156C FLEX Commands
CL
Remarks
The CL command sets the specified units to the following conditions:
Item
SMU
VSU
Source Mode
V
V
Output
Voltage
0V
0V
V Range
20 V
20 V
I Compliance
100 μA
100 mA
I limit
100 mA
I Range
100 μA
Filter
ON
VMU
GNDU
PGU
V
0V
20 V a
0V
20 V
100 mA
100 mA
a. In the differential voltage measurement mode, the voltage range is set
to 2 V.
Example
Statements
OUTPUT @Hp4156;"CL"
OUTPUT @Hp4156;"CL 1,2,3,5"
1-78
Agilent 4155C/4156C GPIB Command Reference, Edition 6
4155C/4156C FLEX Commands
CLOSE
CLOSE
The CLOSE command closes the file opened by the OPEN command.
Syntax
CLOSE
Example
Statements
OUTPUT @Hp4156;"CLOSE"
Agilent 4155C/4156C GPIB Command Reference, Edition 6
1-79
4155C/4156C FLEX Commands
*CLS
*CLS
The *CLS command clears the status byte register, standard event status register,
and error register. This command does not clear the enable registers.
This command also stops the monitoring of pending operations by the *OPC
command.
Syntax
*CLS
Example
Statements
OUTPUT @Hp4156;"*CLS"
1-80
Agilent 4155C/4156C GPIB Command Reference, Edition 6
4155C/4156C FLEX Commands
CM
CM
The CM command sets the Auto-Calibration mode to ON or OFF. If
Auto-Calibration is ON, and the following two conditions are satisfied, the
4155C/4156C automatically calibrates all units every 30 minutes.
•
Output switches of all units have been OFF for 30 minutes
•
The ST command is not entered at least 30 minutes after entering the last END
command.
Syntax
CM mode
Parameters
mode:
Auto-calibration mode ON/OFF. Integer expression. See below.
0: Auto-Calibration OFF
1: Auto-Calibration ON (initial setting)
Example
Statements
OUTPUT @Hp4156;"CM 0"
OUTPUT @Hp4156;"CM 1"
Execution
Conditions
To perform the calibration properly, the measurement terminals should be opened
before starting the calibration.
If the auto-calibration is enabled, do not forget to open the measurement terminals
or to disconnect the device under test from the measurement terminals after the
measurements.
Agilent 4155C/4156C GPIB Command Reference, Edition 6
1-81
4155C/4156C FLEX Commands
CMD?
CMD?
The CMD? command returns the current control language mode of the
4155C/4156C. This command has only the query form.
Syntax
CMD?
Query response
language_mode <terminator>
language_mode is NR1 response data type.
<terminator> depends on the language mode.
The values of language_mode and <terminator> are as follows:
Value
Example
Statements
Control Language Mode
<terminator>
0
SCPI command control mode
<LF^EOI>
1
Agilent FLEX command control mode
(US mode or US42 mode)
<LF^EOI>
2
4145 syntax command control mode
<CR/LF^EOI>
OUTPUT @Hp4155;"CMD?"
ENTER @Hp4155;A
1-82
Agilent 4155C/4156C GPIB Command Reference, Edition 6
4155C/4156C FLEX Commands
CMM
CMM
The CMM command sets the SMU measurement mode.
The measurement mode set by this command is kept until the measurement mode is
specified again by this command. If you want to return the setting to the normal
mode (initial measurement mode), enter the CMM command with mode=0.
Syntax
CMM chnum,mode
Parameters
chnum :
Channel number of SMU. Integer expression. See below.
chnum
Unit
chnum
Unit
1
SMU1
4
SMU4
2
SMU2
5a
SMU5
3
SMU3
6a
SMU6
a. For MPSMUs in the 41501A/B Expander. For HPSMU,
channel number is 6, not 5.
mode :
Example
Statements
Measurement mode. 0 to 3 are available. Integer expression. See below.
mode
Description
0
Compliance side measurement (initial setting). If SMU is
in the voltage source mode, SMU does current
measurement. If SMU is in the current source mode, SMU
does voltage measurement.
1
Current measurement. SMU does current measurement,
regardless of the SMU output source mode.
2
Voltage measurement. SMU does voltage measurement,
regardless of the SMU output source mode.
3
Force side measurement. If SMU is in the voltage source
mode, SMU does voltage measurement. If SMU is in the
current source mode, SMU does current measurement.
OUTPUT @Hp4156;"CMM 1,1"
Agilent 4155C/4156C GPIB Command Reference, Edition 6
1-83
4155C/4156C FLEX Commands
CN
CN
The CN command enables the specified units by setting the output switches to ON.
WARNING
SETTING THE OUTPUT SWITCH TO "ON" ENABLES THE UNIT TO
FORCE DANGEROUS VOLTAGES.
WHEN THE UNIT IS NOT IN USE, SET THE OUTPUT SWITCH TO
"OFF" WHENEVER POSSIBLE.
Execution
Conditions
No unit may be in the HIGH VOLTAGE state (forcing more than ±40 V, or voltage
compliance set to more than ±40 V).
Syntax
CN [chnum[,chnum...[,chnum]...]]
Parameters
chnum:
Channel number. Integer expression. See below.
chnum
Slot
No.
Unit
enabled
chnum
Slot
No.
Unit
enabled
1
1
SMU1
21
7
VSU1
2
2
SMU2
22
VSU2
3
3
SMU3
23
VMU1 a
4
4
SMU4
24
VMU2 a
5b
5
SMU5
26
0
GNDU
6b
6
SMU6
27
8
PGU1
28
PGU2
a. VMU1 and VMU2 have the output switch in common.
b. For MPSMUs in the 41501A/B Expander. For HPSMU,
channel number is 6, not 5.
If you do not specify chnum, the 4155C/4156C sets all output switches to ON, in the
order from lower to higher slot number.
If you specify multiple chnums, the 4155C/4156C sets the output switches to ON, in
the specified order.
For example, OUTPUT @Hp4156;"CN 1,2,3" enables the SMU1, SMU2, and
SMU3, in that order.
1-84
Agilent 4155C/4156C GPIB Command Reference, Edition 6
4155C/4156C FLEX Commands
CN
Remarks
The CN command sets the specified units to the following conditions:
Item
SMU
VSU
Output Switch
ON
ON
Source Mode
V
V
Output
Voltage
0V
0V
V Range
20 V
20 V
I Compliance
100 μA
100 mA
I limit
VMU
ON
GNDU
ON
100 μA
Filter
no
change
ON
V
0V
20 V a
100 mA
I Range
PGU
0V
20 V
100 mA
100 mA
a. In the differential voltage measurement mode, the voltage range is set
to 2 V range.
If the output switch of the specified unit is already set to ON, the CN command is
disabled.
Example
Statements
OUTPUT @Hp4156;"CN"
OUTPUT @Hp4156;"CN 1,2,3,5"
Agilent 4155C/4156C GPIB Command Reference, Edition 6
1-85
4155C/4156C FLEX Commands
DI
DI
The DI command forces current from the specified unit.
Execution
Conditions
The CN command has been executed for the specified unit. If the voltage
compliance is greater than ±40 V, the interlock circuit must be shorted.
Syntax
DI chnum,range,current[,Vcomp[,comp polarity]]
If you enter the DI command into the program memory (see the ST command), do
not omit the Vcomp parameter. Vcomp is necessary when using the internal program
memory.
Parameters
chnum:
Channel number of the unit used to force current. Integer expression.
chnum
Unit
1
SMU1
2
SMU2
3
SMU3
4
SMU4
5a
SMU5
6a
SMU6
a. For MPSMUs in the 41501A/B Expander. For HPSMU,
channel number is 6, not 5.
range:
Range type for current output. Integer expression.
range
1-86
Ranging Type a
0
Auto ranging
9 (only for 4156C)
10 pA limited auto ranging
10 (only for 4156C)
100 pA limited auto ranging
11
1 nA limited auto ranging
12
10 nA limited auto ranging
13
100 nA limited auto ranging
14
1 μA limited auto ranging
Agilent 4155C/4156C GPIB Command Reference, Edition 6
4155C/4156C FLEX Commands
DI
Ranging Type a
range
15
10 μA limited auto ranging
16
100 μA limited auto ranging
17
1 mA limited auto ranging
18
10 mA limited auto ranging
19
100 mA limited auto ranging
20 (only for HPSMU)
1 A limited auto ranging
a. Auto ranging uses the lowest output range (available for
the unit) that covers current value. Limited auto ranging
uses the specified range or above. For example, 10 μA limited auto ranging uses the 10 μA range to force 1 nA.
current:
Output current value (in A). Numeric expression. See Table 1-9.
0 to ±100E−3 (for 4155C/4156C and MPSMU in 41501A/B)
0 to ±1 (for HPSMU in 41501A/B)
Vcomp:
Voltage compliance value (in V). Numeric expression. See Table 1-9.
If you do not specify this parameter, Vcomp is set to the previous
setting. Voltage compliance range changing may cause 0 V output in a
moment.
comp
polarity:
Polarity of voltage compliance. Numeric expression.
0: Auto mode. Default.
The polarity of voltage compliance is automatically set to the same
value as the polarity of the output current (current), regardless of
the polarity of Vcomp value. If output current is 0 A, the polarity is
positive.
1: Manual mode.
This parameter must be specified if you want to set the polarity of
the voltage compliance to the same as the specified polarity of
Vcomp.
Example
Statements
OUTPUT @Hp4156;"DI 1,0,1E-6,100,1"
OUTPUT @Hp4156;"DI 3,14,5E-7,20,0"
Agilent 4155C/4156C GPIB Command Reference, Edition 6
1-87
4155C/4156C FLEX Commands
DI
Table 1-9
Available Parameter Values for DI Command
Output
Range
Resolution
in A a
current in A
Maximum
Vcomp in V
Remarks
10 pA
10E−15
0 to ±10E−12
±100
For 4156C.
100 pA
10E−15
0 to ±100E−12
±100
1 nA
100E−15
0 to ±1E−9
±100
±200
For HPSMU.
10 nA
1E−12
0 to ±10E−9
±100
For SMU.
±200
For HPSMU.
For SMU.
For SMU.
100 nA
10E−12
0 to ±100E−9
±100
±200
For HPSMU.
1 μA
100E−12
0 to ±1E−6
±100
For SMU.
±200
For HPSMU.
For SMU.
10 μA
1E−9
0 to ±10E−6
±100
±200
For HPSMU.
100 μA
10E−9
0 to ±100E−6
±100
For SMU.
±200
For HPSMU.
For SMU.
1 mA
100E−9
0 to ±1E−3
±100
±200
For HPSMU.
10 mA
1E−6
0 to ±10E−3
±100
For SMU.
±200
For HPSMU.
0 to ±20E−3
±100
For SMU.
to ±50E−3
±40
to ±100E−3
±20
0 to ±50E−3
±200
to ±100E−3
±100
100 mA
10E−6
100E−6
1A
100E−6
0 to ±50E−3
±200
to ±125E−3
±100
to ±500E−3
±40
to ±1
±20
For HPSMU.
a. Minimum resolution is Range×5E−5. However the setting accuracy is
not guaranteed for the resolution less than the value shown in the table.
1-88
Agilent 4155C/4156C GPIB Command Reference, Edition 6
4155C/4156C FLEX Commands
DO
DO
The DO command executes the 4155C/4156C internal memory programs (up to 8
programs) in the order specified.
Before executing the internal memory program, close the Interlock circuit. If you do
not close the interlock circuit, an error occurred and the measurement is aborted.
Execution
Conditions
The specified programs have been stored by using the ST and END commands.
Syntax
DO prog No.[,prog No.[,prog No....[,prog No.]...]]
Parameters
prog No.:
Remarks
The 4155C/4156C cannot detect errors during the internal memory program
execution.
Example
Statements
OUTPUT @Hp4156;"DO 1,2,3,4,5,6,7,8"
OUTPUT @Hp4156;"DO 98,99"
Internal memory program number. 1 to 255. Integer expression.
Agilent 4155C/4156C GPIB Command Reference, Edition 6
1-89
4155C/4156C FLEX Commands
DV
DV
The DV command forces output voltage from the specified unit.
Execution
Conditions
The CN command has been executed for the specified unit. If the output voltage is
greater than ±40 V, the interlock circuit must be shorted.
Syntax
DV chnum,range,voltage[,Icomp[,comp polarity]]
If you enter the DV command into the program memory (see the ST command), do
not omit the Icomp parameter. Icomp is necessary when using the internal program
memory.
Parameters
chnum:
Channel number of the unit used to force voltage. Integer expression.
chnum
Unit
chnum
Unit
1
SMU1
6a
SMU6
2
SMU2
21
VSU1
3
SMU3
22
VSU2
4
SMU4
27 b
PGU1
5a
SMU5
28 b
PGU2
a. For MPSMUs in the 41501A/B Expander. For HPSMU,
channel number is 6, not 5.
b. If you use the PGU, execute the SPG command before the
DV command.
range:
Ranging type for voltage output. Integer expression. Range changing
may cause 0 V output in a moment.
range
1-90
Ranging Type a
0
Auto ranging
11 (for SMU)
2 V limited auto ranging
12
20 V limited auto ranging
Agilent 4155C/4156C GPIB Command Reference, Edition 6
4155C/4156C FLEX Commands
DV
Ranging Type a
range
13 (for SMU and PGU)
40 V limited auto ranging
14 (for SMU)
100 V limited auto ranging
15 (only for HPSMU)
200 V limited auto ranging
a. Auto ranging uses the lowest output range (available for
the unit) that covers the voltage value. Limited auto ranging uses the specified range or above. For example, 20 V
limited auto ranging uses the 100 V range to force 50 V.
voltage:
Output voltage value (in V). Numeric expression. See Table 1-10.
0 to ±100 (for 4155C/4156C and MPSMU in 41501A/B)
0 to ±200 (for HPSMU in 41501A/B)
0 to ±20 (for VSU)
0 to ±40 (for PGU)
Icomp:
Current compliance value (in A). Numeric expression. See Table 1-10.
This parameter is not available for VSU and PGU. If you do not specify
this parameter, Icomp is set to the previous setting. 0 A is not allowed
for Icomp.
comp
polarity:
Polarity of current compliance. Integer expression. This parameter is
not available for VSU and PGU.
0: Auto mode. Default.
The polarity of the current compliance is automatically set to the
same value as the polarity of the output voltage (voltage),
regardless of the polarity of the Icomp value. If the output voltage
is 0 V, the polarity is positive.
1: Manual mode.
This parameter must be specified if you want to set the polarity of
the current compliance to the same value as the polarity of Icomp
you specified.
Example
Statements
OUTPUT @Hp4156;"DV 1,0,20,1E-6,0"
OUTPUT @Hp4156;"DV 21,12,10"
Agilent 4155C/4156C GPIB Command Reference, Edition 6
1-91
4155C/4156C FLEX Commands
DV
Table 1-10
Available Parameter Values for DV Command
Output
Range
2V
20 V
Resolution
in V
100E−6
1E−3
voltage in V
0 to ±2
0 to ±20
4E−3
40 V
2E−3
0 to ±40
8E−3
100 V
200 V
1-92
5E−3
10E−3
0 to ±100
0 to ±200
Maximum
Icomp in A
Remarks
±100E−3
For SMU.
±1
For HPSMU.
±100E−3
For SMU.
±1
For HPSMU.
−
For VSU.
−
For PGU.
±50E−3
For SMU.
±500E−3
For HPSMU.
−
For PGU.
±20E−3
For SMU.
±125E−3
For HPSMU.
±50E−3
Agilent 4155C/4156C GPIB Command Reference, Edition 6
4155C/4156C FLEX Commands
DZ
DZ
The DZ command stores the settings (V/I output values, V/I output ranges, and V/I
compliance values) of the specified units, and sets the units to Zero (0 V) Output.
The stored settings can be recovered by using the RZ command. The settings are
cleared by using a Device Clear (HP BASIC CLEAR) command, *RST, RZ, CL,
CA, or *TST?.
Execution
Conditions
The CN command has been executed for the specified units.
Syntax
DZ [chnum[,chnum...[,chnum]...]]
Parameters
chnum:
Channel number set to zero (0 V) output. Integer expression.
chnum
Unit
chnum
Unit
1
SMU1
21
VSU1
2
SMU2
22
VSU2
3
SMU3
23
VMU1
4
SMU4
24
VMU2
5a
SMU5
26
GNDU
6a
SMU6
27
PGU1
28
PGU2
a. For MPSMUs in the 41501A/B Expander. For HPSMU,
channel number is 6, not 5.
If you do not specify chnum, the DZ command applies the Zero Output to all units,
where the output switch is set to ON, in order from higher (output or measurement
range) to lower voltage range.
If you specify multiple chnums, the 4155C/4156C sets the units to Zero Output in
the specified order.
Agilent 4155C/4156C GPIB Command Reference, Edition 6
1-93
4155C/4156C FLEX Commands
DZ
Remarks
The DZ command sets the specified units to the following conditions:
Item
SMU
Output Switch
ON
Source Mode
V
Output Voltage
0V
V Range
I Compliance
ON
VMU
GNDU
PGU
ON
ON
ON
Not
changed
V
V
0V
Not
changed
0V
0V
Not
changed
20 V
Not
changed
See below
100 mA
Not
changed
100 mA
Not
changed
I Range
Filter
VSU
Not
changed
Previous range a
Not
changed
100 mA
Not
changed
I Compliance
10 pA to 10 nA
10 nA at 10 nA range
100 nA to 1 μA
1 μA at 1 μA range
over 10 μA
100 μA at 100 μA range
a. Previous range is the current output range, which
was set before the DZ command.
Example
Statements
OUTPUT @Hp4156;"DZ"
OUTPUT @Hp4156;"DZ 1,2,3"
1-94
Agilent 4155C/4156C GPIB Command Reference, Edition 6
4155C/4156C FLEX Commands
END
END
The END command is used with the ST command to store a program in the internal
program memory of the 4155C/4156C. See ST command.
Syntax
END
Example
Statements
OUTPUT @Hp4156;"ST 1;CN 1;DV 1,0,5,1E-4;TI? 1,0;CL 1"
OUTPUT @Hp4156;"END"
Agilent 4155C/4156C GPIB Command Reference, Edition 6
1-95
4155C/4156C FLEX Commands
ERR?
ERR?
The ERR? query command returns error codes from the 4155C/4156C error register
to the output data buffer (query buffer).
Output data is always stored in the query buffer in ASCII format, regardless of the
FMT command.
This command clears the error register.
Syntax
ERR?
Query Response
In US command mode:
Error Code #1,....,Error Code #7 <LF^EOI>
In US42 command mode:
Error Code #1,....,Error Code #4 <CR/LF^EOI>
where, Error Code #N (N: integer) indicates 3 digits, 5 digits, or 10 digits error code.
For the error codes, refer to “Error Messages” and User's Guide.
Example
Statements
OUTPUT @Hp4156;"ERR?"
ENTER @Hp4156;A$
1-96
Agilent 4155C/4156C GPIB Command Reference, Edition 6
4155C/4156C FLEX Commands
ESC
ESC
The ESC command enables or disables the sweep stop function and sets the stop
conditions. This command is only for the US control mode, and is available in the
following measurement modes:
Syntax
•
Staircase sweep measurement (MM 2)
•
Pulsed sweep measurement (MM 4)
•
Staircase sweep with pulsed bias measurement (MM 5)
ESC onoff[,chnum,condition1,value1,condition2,value2]
This command stops the sweep measurement when the condition1 or condition2
parameter is satisfied. If you do not specify the chnum parameter, the stop function
is disabled.
Parameters
onoff
Sweep stop function on or off. 0 or 1. Integer expression.
0: Disables the function
1: Enables the function
chnum:
Channel number of the unit used to monitor the stop conditions.
The unit must be one of the measurement channels specified by
the MM command. If the unit is not a measurement channel, the
stop function is disabled. Integer expression.
chnum
Unit
1
SMU1
2
SMU2
3
SMU3
4
SMU4
5a
SMU5 (MPSMU)
6a
SMU6 (MPSMU or HPSMU)
23
VMU1
24
VMU2
a. For SMUs in the 41501A/B Expander.
Agilent 4155C/4156C GPIB Command Reference, Edition 6
1-97
4155C/4156C FLEX Commands
ESC
condition1
Stop condition. 0, 1, 2, 3, or 4. Integer expression. If you do not
specify this parameter, 0 is set.
condition1
description
0
Disables the stop condition.
1
Stops measurement if Result1 ≤ Value1
2
Stops measurement if Result1 ≥ Value1
3
Stops measurement if | Result1 | ≤ | Value1 |
4
Stops measurement if | Result1 | ≥ | Value1 |
where Result1 is given by the following equation. Value1 is the
parameter value you specify (see the value1 parameter).
Result1 = (Data[n]−Data[n−1]) / Data[n−1]
Data[n] (n: integer) is the nth data measured by the unit
specified by the chnum parameter.
value1
Value compared with Result1. See condition1 parameter.
Available values: −10000 to 10000. Numeric expression.
If you do not specify this parameter, 0 is set.
condition2
Stop condition. 0, 1, 2, 3, or 4. Integer expression. If you do not
specify this parameter, 0 is set.
condition2
description
0
Disables the stop condition.
1
Stops measurement if Data[n] ≤ Value2
2
Stops measurement if Data[n] ≥ Value2
3
Stops measurement if | Data[n] | ≤ | Value2 |
4
Stops measurement if | Data[n] | ≥ | Value2 |
where Data[n] (n: integer) is the nth data measured by the unit
specified by the chnum parameter. Value2 is the parameter value
you specify (see the value2 parameter).
1-98
Agilent 4155C/4156C GPIB Command Reference, Edition 6
4155C/4156C FLEX Commands
ESC
value2
Value compared with Data[n]. See the condition2 parameter.
Available values: −200 to 200. Numeric expression.
If you do not specify this parameter, 0 is set.
Output Data
The 4155C/4156C returns the all measurement data until when the sweep stop
condition is detected. The output format of the last data will be as shown below:
Measurement Mode
Data for the stopped sweep step
1 channel sweep
Data[,Source_data]
Multi channel sweep
Data, .......... Data[,Source_data] a
a. Source_data will be returned if the chnum parameter of the ESC command specifies the last measurement channel defined by the MM command.
where,
Data: Measurement data.
Source_data: Source output data. Selected by the FMT command.
If the Source_data output is disabled, the status of the last Data will be 160
(128+32). where 128 means the EOD, and 32 means the ESC was detected.
For example, if there is 4 measurement channels, and if the ESC command specifies
the 2nd measurement channel to monitor the stop condition, the 4155C/4156C
returns only 2 data (Data,Data) for the stopped sweep step. And the status of the last
Data is 160. The order of the measurement channel is defined by the MM command.
Example
Statements
OUTPUT @Hp4155;"ESC 1,1,1,2,1,0.001"
Agilent 4155C/4156C GPIB Command Reference, Edition 6
1-99
4155C/4156C FLEX Commands
*ESE(?)
*ESE(?)
The *ESE command sets the bits of the Standard Event Status "Enable" Register.
Syntax
*ESE enable_number
Parameters
enable_number:
Decimal integer (the sum of the binary-weighted values for the
desired bits), hexadecimal, octal, or binary value.
1: Enables.
0: Masks.
Query Response
In US command mode:
enable_number<LF^EOI>
In US42 command mode:
enable_number<CR/LF^EOI>
where, enable_number is a decimal integer value that is the sum of the
binary-weighted values of the "Enable" register bits.
Semantics
The Standard Event Status "Enable" Register determines which bits of the Standard
Event Status Register are enabled. Enabled bits are ORed together, and the result is
reported to bit 5 of the Status Byte Register.
The Standard Event Status "Enable" Register consists of 16 bits, but only the lower
8 bits are used. These correspond to the bits of the Standard Event Status Register.
The following table shows the bits of the Standard Event Status Register and the
binary-weighted decimal value.
1-100
bit
binary-weight
description
0
1
OPC (Operation Complete)
1
2
Not used. (always zero)
2
4
Not used. (always zero)
3
8
Set to 1 if error occurred.
4
16
Set to 1 if parameter error occurred.
5
32
Set to 1 if syntax error occurred.
6
64
Not used. (always zero)
7
128
Not used. (always zero)
Agilent 4155C/4156C GPIB Command Reference, Edition 6
4155C/4156C FLEX Commands
*ESE(?)
Example
Statements
The following four lines enable the same bit (bit 6):
OUTPUT @Hp4156;"*ESE 32"
using decimal numeric
OUTPUT @Hp4156;"*ESE #B100000" using binary numeric
OUTPUT @Hp4156;"*ESE #Q40"
using octal numeric
OUTPUT @Hp4156;"*ESE #H20"
using hexadecimal numeric
The following is an example for a query:
OUTPUT @Hp4156;"*ESE?"
ENTER @Hp4156;A
Agilent 4155C/4156C GPIB Command Reference, Edition 6
1-101
4155C/4156C FLEX Commands
*ESR?
*ESR?
The *ESR? query command returns the present contents of the Standard Event
Status Register.
Syntax
*ESR?
Query Response
In US command mode:
register<LF^EOI>
In US42 command mode:
register<CR/LF^EOI>
Parameter
register
Semantics
Example
Statements
Type
NR1
Explanation
0 to 255 (decimal integer value that is the sum of
the binary-weighted values for the set bits)
The following table shows the bits of the Standard Event Status Register.
bit
binary-weight
description
0
1
OPC (Operation Complete)
1
2
Not used. (always zero)
2
4
Not used. (always zero)
3
8
Set to 1 if error occurred.
4
16
Set to 1 if parameter error occurred.
5
32
Set to 1 if syntax error occurred.
6
64
Not used. (always zero)
7
128
Not used. (always zero)
OUTPUT @Hp4156;"*ESR?"
ENTER @Hp4156;A
1-102
Agilent 4155C/4156C GPIB Command Reference, Edition 6
4155C/4156C FLEX Commands
FL
FL
The FL command sets the filter of specified units to ON or OFF. For pulsed source,
set the filter to OFF (to enable pulsed output) before measurement trigger.
Syntax
FL mode[,chnum[,chnum...[,chnum]...]]
Parameters
mode:
Status of the filter. Integer expression.
0: Filter OFF.
1: Filter ON.
chnum:
Channel number. Integer expression. If you do not specify chnum, the
FL command sets the filter of all channels to ON or OFF under the
mode setting.
chnum
Unit
1
SMU1
2
SMU2
3
SMU3
4
SMU4
5a
SMU5
6a
SMU6
a. For MPSMUs in the 41501A/B Expander. For HPSMU,
channel number is 6, not 5.
Example
Statements
OUTPUT @Hp4156;"FL"
OUTPUT @Hp4156;"FL 1,1,3,5"
Agilent 4155C/4156C GPIB Command Reference, Edition 6
1-103
4155C/4156C FLEX Commands
FMT
FMT
The FMT command specifies the measurement data output format and the data
terminator. For details about output data format, see “Data Output Format” on page
1-11.
Query command output data is always stored in the query buffer in ASCII format,
regardless of this command.
Syntax
FMT format[,mode]
Parameters
format :
Output data format. Integer expression. If you do not specify this
parameter, format is set to 1.
Terminator
format
Description
1
ASCII data format
with header.
Initial setting.
2
ASCII data format
without header
3
Binary data format
4
Binary data format
5
ASCII data format
with header
US mode a
<LF^EOI>
US42 mode b
<CR/LF^EOI>
<^EOI>
<,^EOI>
,
a. This column is effective for US command mode.
b. This column is effective for US42 command mode.
1-104
Agilent 4155C/4156C GPIB Command Reference, Edition 6
4155C/4156C FLEX Commands
FMT
mode:
Output data mode. Integer expression. If you do not specify this
parameter, mode is set to 0.
mode
0
Description
For the sweep measurements, sweep source data is not
output.
For the sampling measurements, sampling point index is
not output.
For the QSCV measurements, source output data is not
output.
1
For the sweep measurements, primary sweep source
data is output with measurement data.
For the sampling measurements, sampling point index is
output with measurement data.
For the QSCV measurements, source output data is
output with measurement data.
2
For the sweep measurements, secondary sweep source
data is output with measurement data. If WSI/WSV
command was not entered properly, the invalid source
data will be returned. Ignore the returned value.
For the sampling data, sampling point index is output
with measurement data.
Remarks
In the US command control mode, if you change the data output format, the FMT
command clears the 4155C/4156C output data buffer and sets the new data output
format. If the format specified by the FMT command is the same as the previous
setting, the FMT command does not clear the output data buffer.
In the US42 command control mode, the FMT command clears the 4155C/4156C
output data buffer and sets the data output format.
Example
Statements
OUTPUT @Hp4156;"FMT 1"
OUTPUT @Hp4156;"FMT 2,1"
Agilent 4155C/4156C GPIB Command Reference, Edition 6
1-105
4155C/4156C FLEX Commands
GOC
GOC
The GOC command measures the zero offset data and sets the zero offset cancel
function to ON. The zero offset cancel function is available for the SMU in the low
current measurement mode and the VMU in the differential voltage measurement
mode. For details of the zero offset cancel function, refer to User's Guide:
Measurement and Analysis.
The zero offset data is cleared by the US, US42, *RST command, or any emergency
condition.
Execution
Conditions
SMU must be set to the voltage force mode by the DV command.
Syntax
GOC chnum,range
Parameters
chnum :
Channel number of the unit used to measure the zero offset data and to
set the zero offset cancel function to ON. Integer expression.
chnum
Unit
1
SMU1
2
SMU2
3
SMU3
4
SMU4
5a
SMU5
6a
SMU6
23 b
VMU1
24 b
VMU2
a. For MPSMUs in the 41501A/B Expander. For HPSMU,
channel number is 6, not 5.
b. Differential voltage measurements use both VMU1 and
VMU2. Specify which VMU1 or VMU2.
1-106
Agilent 4155C/4156C GPIB Command Reference, Edition 6
4155C/4156C FLEX Commands
GOC
range :
Measurement range to measure the zero offset data. Integer expression.
range
Description
9 (for 4156C)
10 pA range
10 (for 4156C)
100 pA range
10 (for VMU)
0.2 V range
11 (for SMU)
1 nA range
Remarks
If the 4155C/4156C fails to measure the zero offset data in the GOC command
execution, the GOC command keeps the previous zero offset data and sets the
function to OFF.
Example
Statements
OUTPUT @Hp4156;"GOC 1,9"
OUTPUT @Hp4156;"GOC 23,10"
Agilent 4155C/4156C GPIB Command Reference, Edition 6
1-107
4155C/4156C FLEX Commands
*IDN?
*IDN?
The *IDN? query command requests the instrument model number and the ROM
version number, then stores the results in the 4155C/4156C output data buffer
(query buffer).
Output data is always stored in the query buffer in ASCII format, regardless of the
FMT command.
Syntax
*IDN?
Query Response
HEWLETT-PACKARD,model,0,HOST rev:SMUC rev:AD rev <LF^EOI>
Response
Explanation
model
4155C or 4156C
HOST rev
Revision number of HOST CPU.
SMUC rev
Revision number of SMU controller.
AD rev
Revision number of A/D converter.
Example
Statements
OUTPUT @Hp4156;"*IDN?"
ENTER @Hp4156;A$
Example
Response
HEWLETT-PACKARD,4156C,0,01.00:01.00:01.00
1-108
Agilent 4155C/4156C GPIB Command Reference, Edition 6
4155C/4156C FLEX Commands
IN
IN
The IN command sets the specified unit to Zero Output with an output range change.
Execution
Conditions
The CN command has been executed for the specified unit.
Syntax
IN [chnum[,chnum...[,chnum]...]]
Parameters
chnum:
Channel number. Integer expression. See below.
chnum
Unit
1
SMU1
2
SMU2
3
SMU3
4
SMU4
5a
SMU5
6a
SMU6
21
VSU1
22
VSU2
27
PGU1
28
PGU2
a. For MPSMUs in the 41501A/B Expander. For HPSMU,
channel number is 6, not 5.
If you do not specify chnum, this command sets all units to Zero Output in order
from higher voltage range (output or measurement range) to lower voltage range.
If you specify multiple chnums, the 4155C/4156C sets the units to Zero Output in
the specified order.
Agilent 4155C/4156C GPIB Command Reference, Edition 6
1-109
4155C/4156C FLEX Commands
IN
Remarks
The IN command sets the specified units to the following conditions, which are the
same as the conditions after executing the CN command.
Item
SMU
VSU
Output Switch
ON
ON
Source Mode
V
V
Output Voltage
0V
0V
V Range
20 V
20 V
I Compliance
100 μA
100 mA
I Limit
100 mA
I Range
100 μA
Filter
Not
changed
VMU
ON
GNDU
ON
PGU
ON
V
0V
20 V a
0V
20 V
100 mA
100 mA
a. For differential voltage measurement mode, the voltage range is set to 2
V range.
Example
Statements
OUTPUT @Hp4156;"IN"
OUTPUT @Hp4156;"IN 1,2,3,5,6"
1-110
Agilent 4155C/4156C GPIB Command Reference, Edition 6
4155C/4156C FLEX Commands
LGI
LGI
The LGI command specifies the current monitor channel and its search parameters
in the linear search measurement. This command is only for the US control mode.
This command ignores the RI command setting.
This command setting is cleared by the LGV, BGV or BGI command.
Execution
Conditions
The MM 14 command must be entered before this command.
Syntax
LGI chnum,mode,Irange,Itarget
Parameters
chnum:
The channel number of the unit used to measure the current. Integer
expression.
chnum
Unit
1
SMU1
2
SMU2
3
SMU3
4
SMU4
5a
SMU5 (MPSMU)
6a
SMU6 (MPSMU or HPSMU)
a. For SMUs in the 41501A/B Expander.
mode:
Search mode. 0 or 1.
0 : If the value of the measurement data is less than or equal to the value
of Itarget, it is the target data.
1 : If the value of the measurement data is greater than or equal to the
value of Itarget, it is the target data.
Agilent 4155C/4156C GPIB Command Reference, Edition 6
1-111
4155C/4156C FLEX Commands
LGI
Irange:
Ranging type for current measurement. Integer expression.
range
Ranging Type a
9 (only for 4156C)
10 pA limited auto ranging
10 (only for 4156C)
100 pA limited auto ranging
11
1 nA limited auto ranging
12
10 nA limited auto ranging
13
100 nA limited auto ranging
14
1 μA limited auto ranging
15
10 μA limited auto ranging
16
100 μA limited auto ranging
17
1 mA limited auto ranging
18
10 mA limited auto ranging
19
100 mA limited auto ranging
20 (only for HPSMU)
1 A limited auto ranging
a. Limited auto ranging uses the lowest available measurement range that covers the measurement value, where the
specified range is the minimum range. For example, 10 μA
limited auto ranging uses the 10 μA range to measure 1 nA,
and uses the 100 mA range to measure 50 mA.
Itarget:
Search target current (in A). Numeric expression.
0 to ±100 mA for SMU, 0 to ±1 A for HPSMU.
NOTE
Itarget and Irange
If the Itarget value is greater than the minimum measurement range specified by the
Irange parameter, the measurement unit does not use the measurement ranges below
the Itarget value, but uses the lowest range that covers the Itarget value.
Example
Statements
OUTPUT @Hp4156;"LGI 1,1,14,1E-6"
1-112
Agilent 4155C/4156C GPIB Command Reference, Edition 6
4155C/4156C FLEX Commands
LGV
LGV
The LGV command specifies the voltage monitor channel and its search parameters
in the linear search measurement. This command is only for the US control mode.
This command ignores the RV command setting.
This command setting is cleared by the LGI, BGV or BGI command.
Execution
Conditions
The MM 14 command must be entered before this command.
Syntax
LGV chnum,mode,Vrange,Vtarget
Parameters
chnum:
Channel number of the unit used to measure voltage. Integer
expression.
chnum
Unit
1
SMU1
2
SMU2
3
SMU3
4
SMU4
5a
SMU5 (MPSMU)
6a
SMU6 (MPSMU or HPSMU)
23
VMU1
24
VMU2
a. For SMUs in the 41501A/B Expander.
mode:
Search mode. 0 or 1.
0 : If the value of the measurement data is less than or equal to the value
of Vtarget, it is the target data.
1 : If the measurement data is greater than or equal to Vtarget, it is the
target data.
Agilent 4155C/4156C GPIB Command Reference, Edition 6
1-113
4155C/4156C FLEX Commands
LGV
Ranging type for voltage measurement. Integer expression.
Vrange:
Ranging Type a
range
10 (only for VMU in differential mode)
0.2 V limited auto ranging
11
2 V limited auto ranging
12 (for SMU and VMU in grounded mode)
20 V limited auto ranging
13 (for SMU)
40 V limited auto ranging
14 (for SMU)
100 V limited auto ranging
15 (only for HPSMU)
200 V limited auto ranging
a. Limited auto ranging uses the lowest available measurement
range that covers the measurement voltage, where the specified
range is the minimum range. For example, 20 V limited auto
ranging uses the 20 V range to measure 1 V, and uses the 100 V
range to measure 50 V.
Vtarget:
Search target voltage (in V). Numeric expression.
0 to ±100 for SMU, 0 to ±200 for HPSMU.
NOTE
Vtarget and Vrange
If the Vtarget value is greater than the minimum measurement range specified by the
Vrange parameter, the measurement unit does not use the measurement ranges
below the Vtarget value, but uses the lowest range that covers the Vtarget value.
Example
Statements
OUTPUT @Hp4156;"LGV 1,1,12,3"
1-114
Agilent 4155C/4156C GPIB Command Reference, Edition 6
4155C/4156C FLEX Commands
LOP?
LOP?
The LOP? query command requests the operation status of all source units (SMUs
and VSUs) and stores the results in the 4155C/4156C output data buffer (query
buffer).
Output data is always stored in the query buffer in ASCII format, regardless of the
FMT command.
Syntax
LOP?
Query Response
In US command mode:
LOP slot0 status,slot1 status..,slot8 status <LF^EOI>
In US42 command mode:
LOP slot1 status,slot2 status..,slot8 status <CR/LF^EOI>
where, slotN status (N: 0 to 8) means the following:
Parameter
Description
slot0 status
Status number indicates the operation status of GNDU.
slot1 status
Status number indicates the operation status of SMU1.
slot2 status
Status number indicates the operation status of SMU2.
slot3 status
Status number indicates the operation status of SMU3.
slot4 status
Status number indicates the operation status of SMU4.
slot5 status a
Status number indicates the operation status of SMU5.
slot6 status a
Status number indicates the operation status of SMU6.
slot7 status
Status number indicates the operation status of VSU1 and
VSU2.
slot8 status
Status number indicates the operation status of PGU1 and
PGU2.
a. For SMUs in the 41501A/B Expander. If the HPSMU is installed in the
41501A/B, slot6 status returns the HPSMU status, and slot5 status does
not have meaning.
Agilent 4155C/4156C GPIB Command Reference, Edition 6
1-115
4155C/4156C FLEX Commands
LOP?
Status numbers indicate whether the units are operating normally or not, as follows:
in US mode:
Available status numbers are 0 to 255 (decimal number) which represents an 8-bit
binary number. See the table below for a description of each bit of the binary
number.
Bit
7
(MSB) a
6
Unit
for All
for VSU
for PGU
5
4
3
1 and 2
for VMU
for VMU
for SMU
for SMU
for VSU
for PGU
0
for SMU
Value
Description
0
No unit is installed, or the output switch is OFF.
1
Unit is installed, and the output switch is ON.
0
No VSU2 is installed, or the output switch is OFF.
1
VSU2 is installed, and the output switch is ON.
0
No PGU2 is installed, or the output switch is OFF.
1
PGU2 is installed, and the output switch is ON.
0
VMU1 is not installed, or the output switch is OFF.
1
VMU1 is installed, and the output switch is ON.
0
VMU2 is not installed, or the output switch is OFF.
1
VMU2 is installed, and the output switch is ON.
0
SMU is in the voltage source mode.
1
SMU is in the current source mode.
00
SMU reaches voltage compliance.
01
SMU reaches negative current compliance.
10
SMU reaches positive current compliance.
01
VSU2 reaches the current limit.
10
VSU1 reaches the current limit.
11
Both VSU1 and VSU2 reach the current limit.
01
PGU2 reaches the current limit.
10
PGU1 reaches the current limit.
11
Both PGU1 and PGU2 reach the current limit.
0
SMU is not oscillating.
1
SMU is oscillating.
a. Most Significant Bit. Top digit of the 8-digit binary number which indicates the
operation status.
1-116
Agilent 4155C/4156C GPIB Command Reference, Edition 6
4155C/4156C FLEX Commands
LOP?
For example, if Slot1 status is 128 (10000000), SMU1 status is as follows:
1. SMU1 is installed in the slot and output switch is ON.
2. SMU1 is in the voltage force mode.
3. SMU1 reaches the voltage compliance.
4. SMU1 is not oscillating.
in US42 mode:
Status numbers are two-digit decimal numbers. Available numbers and meanings
are as follows:
Status Number
Description
00
No unit is installed, or the output switch is OFF.
01
SMU does not reach current compliance.
02
SMU does not reach voltage compliance.
03
SMU does not reach voltage compliance. Both VSUs
operate normally.
10
Both VSUs reach the current limit.
11
SMU reaches voltage compliance.
12
SMU reaches positive current compliance.
13
SMU reaches negative current compliance.
20
SMU is oscillating.
30
Not applicable.
The HPSMU, in the 41501A/B, occupies two slots (5 and 6). The status number is
returned for slot number 6, and 00 is returned for slot number 5.
Example
Statements
OUTPUT @Hp4156;"LOP?"
ENTER @Hp4156;A$
Agilent 4155C/4156C GPIB Command Reference, Edition 6
1-117
4155C/4156C FLEX Commands
*LRN?
*LRN?
The *LRN? (learn) query command requests information about the unit settings or
the 4155C/4156C command parameter settings, and stores the results in the
4155C/4156C output data buffer (query buffer).
Output data is always stored in the query buffer in ASCII format, regardless of the
FMT command.
Syntax
*LRN? type
Parameters and
Query Response
type :
Available values are 0 to 52. Integer expression. See below.
The parameter selects the type of query response.
For all query responses, the terminator depends on the control mode
(US or US42 command) as follows:
US command mode:
<LF^EOI>
US42 command mode: <CR/LF^EOI>
A description and the query response of each type is described below.
0:
Returns the output switch ON/OFF status:
CN [chnum[,chnum . . . [,chnum] . . . ]]<terminator>
where, chnum is the channel number for the unit whose output switch is
set to ON.
If no output switches are ON, the query response is:
CL<terminator>
1 to 28 :
Returns the SMU/VSU/PGU source status, or the VMU operation
mode.
The type parameter corresponds to the channel number of the unit as
shown in the following table. For example, enter 27 for the PGU1
source status.
For SMU (type: 1 to 6):
If the output switch is ON, the query response is:
DV chnum,range,voltage[,Icomp[,comp polarity]]<terminator>
or DI chnum,range,current[,Vcomp[,comp polarity]]<terminator>
where, range is the present setting of the output range.
1-118
Agilent 4155C/4156C GPIB Command Reference, Edition 6
4155C/4156C FLEX Commands
*LRN?
If the output switch is OFF, the query response is:
CL chnum <terminator>
The returned value of the comp polarity parameter may be different
from the value you set, but the force command works properly.
For VSU or VMU (type: 21 to 24):
DV VSU1 chnum,range,voltage; or
CL VSU1 chnum;
DV VSU2 chnum,range,voltage; or
CL VSU2 chnum;
VM VMU1 chnum,operation mode;
VM VMU2 chnum,operation mode<terminator>
where, range is the present setting of the output range.
For GNDU (type: 26):
CN<terminator> or CL<terminator>
For PGU (type: 27 or 28):
If the output switch is ON, the query response is:
DV chnum,range,voltage;
SPG chnum,pulse mode[,base[,pulse,Td,Tw,Tl,Tt,Tp,count]];
POR chnum,Zout<terminator>
If the output switch is OFF, the query response is:
CL chnum<terminator>
type or
Channel No.
Unit
type or
Channel No.
Unit
1
SMU1
21
VSU1
2
SMU2
22
VSU2
3
SMU3
23
VMU1
4
SMU4
24
VMU2
5a
SMU5
26
GNDU
6a
SMU6
27
PGU1
28
PGU2
a. For SMUs in the 41501A/B expander. For HPSMU, the
channel number is 6.
Agilent 4155C/4156C GPIB Command Reference, Edition 6
1-119
4155C/4156C FLEX Commands
*LRN?
29 :
Not used.
30 :
Returns the filter ON/OFF status:
FL 0 [off ch[,off ch . . . [,off ch] . . . ];FL 1 [on ch[,on ch . . . [,on ch] . . ]
<terminator>
If all units are Filter OFF, the query response is:
FL 0<terminator>
If all units are Filter ON, the query response is:
FL 1<terminator>
31 :
Returns the parameter values of the TM, AV, CM, FMT, and MM
commands:
TM trigger mode;AV number[,mode];CM auto calibration mode;
FMT output data format,output data mode
[;MM measurement mode[,chnum[,chnum...[,chnum]...]]]<terminator>
If the present averaging number parameter setting of the AV command
is a negative value, the *LRN? 31 command response of the averaging
number will be –1.
32 :
Returns the measurement ranging status (parameter values of the RI
and RV commands):
RI chnum,I measurement range[,ranging mode]
or RV chnum,V measurement range[,ranging mode]
[;RI chnum,I measurement range[,ranging mode]]
or [;RV chnum,V measurement range[,ranging mode]]
:
:
[;RI chnum,I measurement range[,ranging mode]]
or [;RV chnum,V measurement range[,ranging mode]]<terminator>
In US42 command mode, if the 4142B-like query response is specified,
the ranging mode is not returned. If the fixed ranging is specified, the
returned value of the measurement range will be a negative value
(–1× range).
1-120
Agilent 4155C/4156C GPIB Command Reference, Edition 6
4155C/4156C FLEX Commands
*LRN?
33 :
Returns the staircase sweep measurement settings (parameter values of
the WM, WT, WV, WI, WSV and WSI commands):
WM automatic sweep abort function,output after sweep;
WT hold time,delay time[,step delay time]
[;WV ch,mode,range,start,stop,nop[,Icomp [,pcomp[,rmode]]]]
or [;WI ch,mode,range,start,stop,nop[,Vcomp[,pcomp[,rmode]]]]
[;WSV ch,range,start,stop[,Icomp[,pcomp[,rmode]]]]
or [;WSI ch,range,start,stop[,Vcomp[,pcomp[,rmode]]]]<terminator>
The returned value of the ranging mode parameter can be different than
the value you set but the sweep command works properly.
When specifying the 4142B-like query response in the US42 command
mode, the step delay time and ranging mode are not returned.
34 :
Returns the pulsed source settings (parameter values of the PT, PV, PI,
PWV and PWI commands):
PT hold,width[,period[,trigger delay[,priority]]]
[;PV chnum,output range,base voltage,pulse voltage [,Icomp]]
or [;PI chnum,output range,base current,pulse current [,Vcomp]]
[;PWV ch,mode,range,base,start,stop,nop[,Icomp[,rmode]]]
or [;PWI ch,mode,range,baset,start,stop,nop[,Vcomp[,rmode]]]
<terminator>
The returned value of the ranging mode parameter may be different
from the value you set, but the sweep command works properly.
When specifying the 4142B-like query response in US42 command
mode, the trigger delay, priority and ranging mode are not returned.
35 to 38 :
Not used.
39 :
Returns the trigger mode status:
STG 0 state,polarity;STG 1 state,polarity<terminator>
40 :
Returns the channel assignment information:
ACH 4142ch,chnum;ACH 4142ch,chnum
;ACH 4142ch,chnum<terminator>
. . .
If no channel number is defined by the ACH command, the query
response is:
ACH<terminator>
Agilent 4155C/4156C GPIB Command Reference, Edition 6
1-121
4155C/4156C FLEX Commands
*LRN?
41 :
Returns the settings of the US42 command:
US42 mode<terminator>
If the 4155C/4156C is not in the US42 command mode, the following
response is returned.
US42 0<terminator>
42 :
Returns the zero offset cancel ON/OFF status:
SOC 0,chnum[;SOC 0,chnum . . . [;SOC 0,chnum] . . . ];
SOC 1,chnum[;SOC 1,chnum . . . [;SOC 1,chnum] . . . ]<terminator>
If all units are set to Zero offset cancel OFF, the query response is:
SOC 0<terminator>
If all units are set to Zero offset cancel ON, the query response is:
SOC 1<terminator>
43 :
Returns the integration time settings:
SLI type;SIT 1,time;SIT 3,time;
AZ 0 or
AZ 1
<terminator>
where, if the present number parameter setting of the AV command is a
negative value, the *LRN? 43 command response will be:
SLI 3;SIT 1,time;SIT 3, plc × |number|
The value of plc is 20 msec for a line frequency of 50 Hz, and
16.7 msec for a line frequency of 60 Hz.
44 :
Returns the Resistor Box settings:
RBC 1,resistance;RBC 2,resistance<terminator>
45 :
Returns the SMU/PGU selector settings:
SSP 0,mode;SSP 1,mode;SSP 2,mode;SSP 3,mode<terminator>
46 :
Returns the SMU measurement mode:
CMM chnum,mode . . . . ;CMM chnum,mode<terminator>
1-122
Agilent 4155C/4156C GPIB Command Reference, Edition 6
4155C/4156C FLEX Commands
*LRN?
47 :
Returns the sampling measurement settings (parameter values of the
MT, MSC, MV, MI and MP commands):
MSC stop mode
;MT hold time,init interval,sampling points
[;MV chnum,output range,base,bias[,Icomp]
[;MV . . . .
:
:
[;MV chnum,output range,base,bias[,Icomp]]...]]
[;MI chnum,output range,base,bias,[Vcomp]
[;MI . . . .
:
:
[;MI chnum,output range,base,bias,[Vcomp]]...]]
[;MP chnum,mode,base,bias,delay,width,lead, trail,period,count
[;MP . . . .
:
[;MP chnum,mode,base,bias,delay,width,lead, trail,period,count]...]]
<terminator>
48 :
Returns the stress settings (parameter values of the STP, STT, STM,
STI and STV commands):
STM stop mode;STT hold_time,stress_mode,stress_time[,period]
[;STI source,chnum,range,base,stress,Vcomp]
or [;STV source,chnum,range,base,stress,Icomp]
;STP source,ch,mode,base,stress[,delay[,width[,leading[,trailing]]]]
:
<terminator>
If you set the wrong values for the period parameter of the STT
command and for the delay and width parameters of the STP command,
the settings are automatically changed and you will see values different
from the ones you set.
49 :
Returns the quasi-static CV measurement settings (parameter values of
the QSM, QSL, QST, QSR and QSV commands):
QSM condition,output
;QSL data,compen
;QST integ,hold,delay1[,delay2]
;QSR range
[;QSV chnum,mode,range,start,stop,cvoltage,step,[Icomp]]
<terminator>
Agilent 4155C/4156C GPIB Command Reference, Edition 6
1-123
4155C/4156C FLEX Commands
*LRN?
50 :
Returns the linear search measurement settings (parameter values of the
LSTM, LSVM,WM, LGI, LGV, LSV, LSI, LSSV and LSSI
commands):
LSTM hold,delay
;LSVM mode
;WM automatic sweep abort function,output after sweep
[;LGI chnum,mode,Irange,Itarget]
or [;LGV chnum,mode,Vrange,Vtarget]
[;LSV chnum,range,start,stop,step[,Icomp]]
or [;LSI chnum,range,start,stop,step[,Vcomp]]
[;LSSV chnum,polarity,offset[,Icomp]]
or [;LSSI chnum,polarity,offset[,Vcomp]]
<terminator>
51 :
Returns the binary search measurement settings (parameter values of
the BSM, BST, BSVM, BGI, BGV, BSV, BSI, BSSV and BSSI
commands):
BSM mode
;BST hold,delay
;BSVM mode
[;BGI chnum,mode,condition,Irange,Itarget]
or [;BGV chnum,mode,condition,Vrange,Vtarget]
[;BSV chnum,range,start,stop[,Icomp]]
or [;BSI chnum,range,start,stop[,Vcomp]]
[;BSSV chnum,polarity,offset[,Icomp]]
or [;BSSI chnum,polarity,offset[,Vcomp]]
<terminator>
52 :
Returns the sweep stop condition settings:
ESC onoff [,chnum,condition1,value1,condition2,value2]<terminator>
53 :
Returns the auto ranging mode status:
RM chnum,mode,rate[;RM chnum,mode,rate[ . . . .
[;RM chnum,mode,rate]]]<terminator>
Example
Statements
DIM A$[200]
OUTPUT @Hp4156;"*LRN? 1"
ENTER @Hp4156;A$
1-124
Agilent 4155C/4156C GPIB Command Reference, Edition 6
4155C/4156C FLEX Commands
LSI
LSI
The LSI command specifies the current output channel and its source parameters in
the linear search measurement. This command is only for the US control mode.
This command setting is cleared by the LSV, BSV or BSI command.
After the search stops, the channel forces the value specified by the WM command.
Execution
Conditions
The MM 14 command must be entered before this command.
Syntax
LSI chnum,range,start,stop,step[,Vcomp]
If you enter this command into the program memory (see the ST command), do not
omit the Vcomp parameter. It is necessary when using the internal program memory.
Parameters
chnum:
Channel number of the unit used to force current. Integer expression.
chnum
Unit
1
SMU1
2
SMU2
3
SMU3
4
SMU4
5a
SMU5 (MPSMU)
6a
SMU6 (MPSMU or HPSMU)
a. For SMUs in the 41501A/B Expander.
range:
Ranging type for current output. Integer expression.
range
Ranging Type a
0
Auto ranging
9 (only for 4156C)
10 pA limited auto ranging
10 (only for 4156C)
100 pA limited auto ranging
11
1 nA limited auto ranging
12
10 nA limited auto ranging
Agilent 4155C/4156C GPIB Command Reference, Edition 6
1-125
4155C/4156C FLEX Commands
LSI
range
Ranging Type a
13
100 nA limited auto ranging
14
1 μA limited auto ranging
15
10 μA limited auto ranging
16
100 μA limited auto ranging
17
1 mA limited auto ranging
18
10 mA limited auto ranging
19
100 mA limited auto ranging
20 (only for HPSMU)
1 A limited auto ranging
a. Auto ranging uses the lowest available output range that
covers the start and stop values. Limited auto ranging uses
the specified range or above. For example, 10 μA limited
auto ranging uses the 10 μA range to force 1 nA start value
to 1 μA stop value.
start:
Source start current (in A). Numeric expression. See Table 1-11.
The start and stop parameters must have different values.
0 to ±100E–3 for SMU, 0 to ±1 for HPSMU
stop:
Source stop current (in A). Numeric expression. See Table 1-11.
The start and stop parameters must have different values.
0 to ±100E–3 for an SMU, 0 to ±1 for an HPSMU
step:
Source step current (in A). Numeric expression. See Table 1-11.
When the value of start < stop, the step must be positive, and when the
value of start > stop, the step must be negative. The number of steps
must be 1001 or less.
Vcomp:
Voltage compliance value (in V). Numeric expression. See Table 1-11.
If you do not specify this parameter, Vcomp remains at its previous
value.
Example
Statements
OUTPUT @Hp4156;"LSI 1,0,0,1E-6,1E-8,10"
1-126
Agilent 4155C/4156C GPIB Command Reference, Edition 6
4155C/4156C FLEX Commands
LSI
Table 1-11
Available Parameter Values for LSI Command
Output
Range
Resolution
in A
start and stop
in A
Maximum
Vcomp in V
10 pA
10E–15
0 to ±10E–12
±100
100 pA
10E–15
0 to ±100E–12
±100
1 nA
100E–15
0 to ±1E–9
±100
±200
10 nA
1E–12
0 to ±10E–9
10E–12
0 to ±100E–9
100E–12
0 to ±1E–6
1E–9
0 to ±10E–6
10E–9
0 to ±100E–6
100E–9
0 to ±1E–3
1E–6
0 to ±10E–3
10E–6
100E–6
1A
100E–6
For HPSMU.
For HPSMU.
±100
±200
100 mA
For HPSMU.
±100
±200
10 mA
For HPSMU.
±100
±200
1 mA
For HPSMU.
±100
±200
100 μA
For HPSMU.
±100
±200
10 μA
For HPSMU.
±100
±200
1 μA
For 4156C.
±100
±200
100 nA
Remarks
0 to ±20E–3
±100
to ±50E–3
±40
to ±100E–3
±20
0 to ±50E–3
±200
to ±100E–3
±100
0 to ±50E–3
±200
to ±125E–3
±100
to ±500E–3
±40
to ±1
±20
For HPSMU.
For HPSMU.
Agilent 4155C/4156C GPIB Command Reference, Edition 6
1-127
4155C/4156C FLEX Commands
LSSI
LSSI
The LSSI command specifies the synchronous current output channel and its source
parameters in the linear search measurement. This command is only for the US
control mode.
The synchronous source output will be:
Synchronous source output = LSI source output + offset current
where the LSI source output is the output set by the LSI command. This command
cannot be used with the LSV command (voltage force linear search).
This command setting is cleared by the LSSV, BSSV, or BSSI command.
Execution
Conditions
The MM 14 command must be entered before this command.
Syntax
LSSI chnum,polarity,offset[,Vcomp]
The LSI command must be entered before this command.
If you enter this command into the program memory (see the ST command), do not
omit the Vcomp parameter. It is necessary when using the internal program memory.
Parameters
chnum:
Channel number of the unit used for synchronous current source.
Integer expression.
chnum
Unit
1
SMU1
2
SMU2
3
SMU3
4
SMU4
5a
SMU5 (MPSMU)
6a
SMU6 (MPSMU or HPSMU)
a. For SMUs in the 41501A/B Expander.
polarity:
Polarity of the LSI source output. 0 (negative) or 1 (positive).
if you set polarity=0, synchronous output = −LSI output +offset.
if you set polarity=1, synchronous output = LSI output + offset.
1-128
Agilent 4155C/4156C GPIB Command Reference, Edition 6
4155C/4156C FLEX Commands
LSSI
offset:
Offset current (in A). Numeric expression.
Available values: 0 to ±0.1 for SMU, 0 to ±1 for HPSMU.
The synchronous output level must not be greater than the output range
specified by the LSI command.
Vcomp:
Voltage compliance value (in V). Numeric expression. If you do not
specify this parameter, Vcomp remains at its previous value.
Example
Statements
OUTPUT @Hp4156;"LSSI 1,1,1E-6,5"
See Also
Refer to the LSI command for the source output value, output range, and the
available compliance values.
Agilent 4155C/4156C GPIB Command Reference, Edition 6
1-129
4155C/4156C FLEX Commands
LSSV
LSSV
The LSSV command specifies the synchronous voltage output channel and its
source parameters in the linear search measurement. This command is only for the
US control mode.
The synchronous source output will be:
Synchronous source output = LSV source output + offset voltage
where the LSV source output is the value set by the LSV command. This command
cannot be used with the LSI command (current force linear search).
This command setting is cleared by the LSSI, BSSV, or BSSI command.
Execution
Conditions
The MM 14 command must be entered before this command.
Syntax
LSSV chnum,polarity,offset[,Icomp]
The LSV command must be entered before this command.
If you enter this command into the program memory (see the ST command), do not
omit the Icomp parameter. It is necessary when using the internal program memory.
Parameters
chnum:
Channel number of the unit used for synchronous voltage source.
Integer expression.
chnum
Unit
1
SMU1
2
SMU2
3
SMU3
4
SMU4
5a
SMU5 (MPSMU)
6a
SMU6 (MPSMU or HPSMU)
21
VSU1
22
VSU2
a. For SMUs in the 41501A/B Expander.
1-130
Agilent 4155C/4156C GPIB Command Reference, Edition 6
4155C/4156C FLEX Commands
LSSV
polarity:
Polarity of the LSV source output. 0 (negative) or 1 (positive).
if you set polarity=0, synchronous output = −LSV output +offset.
if you set polarity=1, synchronous output = LSV output + offset.
offset:
Offset voltage (in V). Numeric expression.
Available values: 0 to ±100 for an SMU, 0 to ±200 for an HPSMU.
Synchronous output must not be over the output range specified by the
LSV command.
Icomp:
Current compliance value (in A). Numeric expression. If you do not
specify this parameter, Icomp remains at its previous value. Zero amps
(0 A) is not a valid value for the Icomp parameter.
Example
Statements
OUTPUT @Hp4156;"LSSV 1,0,5,1E-6"
See Also
Refer to the LSV command for the source output value, output range, and the
available compliance values.
Agilent 4155C/4156C GPIB Command Reference, Edition 6
1-131
4155C/4156C FLEX Commands
LST?
LST?
The LST? query command stores a catalog of internal memory programs or a
specific program listing in the output data buffer (query buffer) of the
4155C/4156C.
The output data is always stored in the query buffer in ASCII format, regardless of
the FMT command.
Syntax
To get the catalog of internal memory programs:
LST?
To get the list of a specific internal memory program:
LST? prog No.
Parameters
prog No.:
Query Response
Response by LST?:
Internal memory program number. 1 to 255. Integer expression.
Number of programs,[prog No.[,prog No.... [,prog No.]...]]
<terminator2>
Response by LST? program No.:
ST prog No.<terminator1>
[saved command #1]<terminator1>
[saved command #2]<terminator1>
:
:
[saved command #n]<terminator1>
END<terminator2>
To read this listing, set up a loop containing the ENTER command, and continue the
loop until encountering the END command. The commands are read, one at a time,
until the END command is encountered.
In the query response, <terminator1> and <terminater2> are as follows.
US command mode:
<terminator1>: <LF>
<terminator2>: <LF^EOI>
US42 command mode:
<terminator1>: <CR/LF>
<terminator2>: <CR/LF^EOI>
1-132
Agilent 4155C/4156C GPIB Command Reference, Edition 6
4155C/4156C FLEX Commands
LST?
Example
Statements
Example of LST? :
OUTPUT @Hp4156;"LST?"
ENTER @Hp4156;A$
Example of LST? prog No. :
OUTPUT @Hp4156;"ST 3;CN;DV 1,0,20,1E-6;TI 1,0;CL"
OUTPUT @Hp4156;"END"
OUTPUT @Hp4156;"LST? 3"
LOOP
ENTER @Hp4156;A$
PRINT A$
EXIT IF A$="END"
END LOOP
Agilent 4155C/4156C GPIB Command Reference, Edition 6
1-133
4155C/4156C FLEX Commands
LSTM
LSTM
The LSTM command sets the timing parameters for the linear search measurement.
This command is only for the US control mode.
Execution
Conditions
The MM 14 command must be entered before this command.
Syntax
LSTM hold,delay
Parameters
hold :
Hold time (in seconds). Numeric expression. This value is the time
from the measurement trigger to the beginning of the delay time.
0 to 655.35 sec. 0.01 sec resolution. Initial setting = 0.
delay :
Delay time (in seconds). Numeric expression. This value is the time
from the end of hold time or the change of source output value to the
start of the measurement.
0 to 65.535 sec. 0.0001 sec resolution. Initial setting = 0.
Example
Statements
OUTPUT @Hp4155;"LSTM 5,0.1"
1-134
Agilent 4155C/4156C GPIB Command Reference, Edition 6
4155C/4156C FLEX Commands
LSV
LSV
The LSV command specifies the voltage output channel and its source parameters in
the linear search measurement. This command is only for the US control mode.
This command setting is cleared by the LSI, BSV, or BSI command.
After search stops, the channel forces the value specified by the WM command.
Execution
Conditions
The MM 14 command must be entered before this command.
Syntax
LSV chnum,range,start,stop,step[,Icomp]
If you enter this command into the program memory (see the ST command), do not
omit the Icomp parameter. It is necessary when using the internal program memory.
Parameters
chnum:
Channel number of the unit used to force voltage. Integer expression.
chnum
Unit
1
SMU1
2
SMU2
3
SMU3
4
SMU4
5a
SMU5 (MPSMU)
6a
SMU6 (MPSMU or HPSMU)
21
VSU1
22
VSU2
a. For SMUs in the 41501A/B Expander.
Agilent 4155C/4156C GPIB Command Reference, Edition 6
1-135
4155C/4156C FLEX Commands
LSV
range:
Ranging type for voltage output. Integer expression.
Ranging Type a
range
0
Auto ranging
11 (for SMU)
2 V limited auto ranging
12
20 V limited auto ranging
13 (for SMU)
40 V limited auto ranging
14 (for SMU)
100 V limited auto ranging
15 (only for HPSMU)
200 V limited auto ranging
a. Auto ranging uses the lowest available output range that
covers the start and stop values. Limited auto ranging uses
the specified range or above. For example, 20 V limited
auto ranging uses the 20 V range to force 1 V start value to
10 V stop value.
start:
Source start voltage (in V). Numeric expression. See Table 1-12.
The start and stop parameters must have different values.
0 to ±100 for SMU, 0 to ±200 for HPSMU.
stop:
Source stop voltage (in V). Numeric expression. See Table 1-12.
The start and stop parameters must have different values.
0 to ±100 for SMU, 0 to ±200 for HPSMU.
step:
Source step voltage (in V). Numeric expression. See Table 1-12.
When the value of start < stop, the step must be positive, and when the
value of start > stop, the step must be negative. The number of steps
must be 1001 or less.
Icomp:
Example
Statements
Current compliance value (in A). Numeric expression. See Table 1-12.
If you do not specify this parameter, Icomp remains at its previous
value. Zero amps (0 A) is not allowed for Icomp.
OUTPUT @Hp4156;"LSV 1,0,0,20,.5,1E-6"
1-136
Agilent 4155C/4156C GPIB Command Reference, Edition 6
4155C/4156C FLEX Commands
LSV
Table 1-12
Available Parameter Values for LSV Command
Output
Range
2V
20 V
40 V
100 V
200 V
Resolution
in V
100E–6
1E–3
2E–3
5E–3
10E–3
start and stop
in V
0 to ±2
0 to ±20
0 to ±40
0 to ±100
0 to ±200
Maximum
Icomp in A
Remarks
±100E–3
For SMU.
±1
For HPSMU.
±100E–3
For SMU.
±1
For HPSMU.
−
For VSU.
±50E–3
For SMU.
±500E–3
For HPSMU.
±20E–3
For SMU.
±125E–3
For HPSMU.
±50E–3
Agilent 4155C/4156C GPIB Command Reference, Edition 6
1-137
4155C/4156C FLEX Commands
LSVM
LSVM
The LSVM command selects the data output mode for the linear search
measurement. This command is only for the US control mode.
Execution
Conditions
The MM 14 command must be entered before this command.
Syntax
LSVM mode
Parameters
mode :
Data output mode. Integer expression. 0 (result only) or 1 (all data
output).
0 : Outputs Search, Source_data, and Data.
1 : Outputs D1, D2, ..., Search, Source_data, and Data.
where,
Search is the search status.
Source_data is the source output data of the search target.
Data is the measurement data of the search target.
Dn (n: integer) is the data of the n th measurement point, and contains
the Source_data and Measurement_data of each measurement point.
For the data output format, refer to “Data Output Format” on page 1-11.
Example
Statements
OUTPUT @Hp4155;"LSVM 1"
1-138
Agilent 4155C/4156C GPIB Command Reference, Edition 6
4155C/4156C FLEX Commands
MCC
MCC
The MCC command clears the settings of the specified sampling channels defined
by the MV, MI or MP command.
Syntax
MCC [chnum[,chnum...[,chnum[,chnum]]...]]
Parameters
chnum :
Channel number of the unit to clear the settings. Integer expression.
You can specify a maximum of 16 chnums at once as the MCC
command parameters.
If you do not specify chnum, the MCC command clears the settings of
the all sampling channels.
chnum
Unit
1
SMU1
2
SMU2
3
SMU3
4
SMU4
5a
SMU5
6a
SMU6
21
VSU1
22
VSU2
27
PGU1
28
PGU2
a. For MPSMUs in the 41501A/B Expander. For HPSMU,
channel number is 6, not 5.
Example
Statements
OUTPUT @Hp4156;"MCC"
OUTPUT @Hp4156;"MCC 1,2,3"
Agilent 4155C/4156C GPIB Command Reference, Edition 6
1-139
4155C/4156C FLEX Commands
MI
MI
The MI command specifies the dc current source (SMU) synchronized with the
sampling measurements, and its parameters.
The output starts at the beginning of the sampling measurements (starts by the XE
command). To stop the output, use the DI command. The output goes to the output
value specified by the DI command.
Execution
Conditions
If the voltage compliance is greater than ±40 V, the interlock circuit must be shorted.
Syntax
MI chnum,range,base,bias[,Vcomp]
If you enter the MI command into the program memory (see the ST command), do
not omit the Vcomp parameter. Vcomp is necessary when using the internal program
memory.
Parameters
chnum:
Channel number of the unit used to force the current. Integer
expression.
chnum
Unit
1
SMU1
2
SMU2
3
SMU3
4
SMU4
5a
SMU5
6a
SMU6
a. For MPSMUs in the 41501A/B Expander. For HPSMU,
channel number is 6, not 5.
range:
Ranging type for current output. Integer expression.
range
1-140
Ranging Type a
0
Auto ranging
9 (only for 4156C)
10 pA limited auto ranging
10 (only for 4156C)
100 pA limited auto ranging
Agilent 4155C/4156C GPIB Command Reference, Edition 6
4155C/4156C FLEX Commands
MI
Ranging Type a
range
11
1 nA limited auto ranging
12
10 nA limited auto ranging
13
100 nA limited auto ranging
14
1 μA limited auto ranging
15
10 μA limited auto ranging
16
100 μA limited auto ranging
17
1 mA limited auto ranging
18
10 mA limited auto ranging
19
100 mA limited auto ranging
20 (only for HPSMU)
1 A limited auto ranging
a. Auto ranging uses the lowest output range (available for
the unit) that covers both bias and base values. Limited
auto ranging uses the specified range or above. For example, 10 μA limited auto ranging uses the 100 mA range to
force 50 mA with 0 A base current.
base:
Base current (in A). Numeric expression. Set the source unit output
value which has been forced before the XE command. This minimizes
the spike. See Table 1-13.
0 to ±100E−3 (for 4155C/4156C and MPSMU in 41501A/B)
0 to ±1 (for HPSMU in 41501A/B)
bias:
Output bias current (in A). Numeric expression. See Table 1-13.
0 to ±100E−3 (for 4155C/4156C and MPSMU in 41501A/B)
0 to ±1 (for HPSMU in 41501A/B)
Vcomp:
Voltage compliance value (in V). Numeric expression. See Table 1-13.
If this parameter is not specified, then Vcomp is set to the previous
setting.
Example
Statements
OUTPUT @Hp4156;"MI 1,18,0,5E-5,10"
Agilent 4155C/4156C GPIB Command Reference, Edition 6
1-141
4155C/4156C FLEX Commands
MI
Table 1-13
Available Parameter Values for MI Command
Output
Range
10 pA
Resolution
in A a
bias and base
in A
10E−15
0 to ±10E−12
Maximum
Vcomp in V
±100
Remarks
For 4156C.
100 pA
10E−15
0 to ±100E−12
±100
1 nA
100E−15
0 to ±1E−9
±100
For SMU.
±200
For HPSMU.
±100
For SMU.
±200
For HPSMU.
±100
For SMU.
±200
For HPSMU.
10 nA
100 nA
1E−12
10E−12
0 to ±10E−9
0 to ±100E−9
1 μA
100E−12
0 to ±1E−6
±100
For SMU.
±200
For HPSMU.
10 μA
1E−9
0 to ±10E−6
±100
For SMU.
±200
For HPSMU.
±100
For SMU.
±200
For HPSMU.
±100
For SMU.
±200
For HPSMU.
For SMU.
100 μA
1 mA
10E−9
100E−9
0 to ±100E−6
0 to ±1E−3
10 mA
1E−6
0 to ±10E−3
±100
±200
For HPSMU.
100 mA
10E−6
0 to ±20E−3
±100
For SMU.
to ±50E−3
±40
to ±100E−3
±20
0 to ±50E−3
±200
to ±100E−3
±100
0 to ±50E−3
±200
to ±125E−3
±100
to ±500E−3
±40
to ±1
±20
100E−6
1A
100E−6
For HPSMU.
a. Minimum resolution is Range×5E−5. However the setting accuracy is
not guaranteed for the resolution less than the value shown in the table.
1-142
Agilent 4155C/4156C GPIB Command Reference, Edition 6
4155C/4156C FLEX Commands
MM
MM
The MM command sets the measurement mode and the measurement units.
This command is not required for the high speed spot measurements using the
following commands.
TI, TI?, TV, TV?, TTI, TTI?, TTV, TTV?
Syntax
For spot, staircase sweep, sampling, 1ch pulsed spot, pulsed sweep, and
staircase sweep with pulsed bias measurements:
MM mode,chnum[,chnum...[,chnum]...]
For quasi-static CV measurement:
MM 13[,chnum]
For stress force, binary search and linear search measurements:
MM mode
Parameters
mode :
Measurement mode. Integer expression.
mode
Description
Related Source Setup
Command
1
Spot measurement
DI, DV, TDI, TDV
2
Staircase sweep measurement
WI, WV, WT, WM, WSI,
WSV
3
1ch pulsed spot measurement
PI, PV, PT
4
Pulsed sweep measurement
PWI, PWV, PT, WM,
WSI, WSV
5
Staircase sweep with
pulsed bias measurement
WI, WV, WM, WSI,
WSV, PI, PV, PT
6 to 9
Not defined.
10
Sampling measurement
MI, MV, MP, MT, MSC,
MCC
11
Stress force
POR, STI, STV, STP,
STT, STM, STC
12
Not defined.
Agilent 4155C/4156C GPIB Command Reference, Edition 6
1-143
4155C/4156C FLEX Commands
MM
Related Source Setup
Command
mode
Description
13 a
Quasi-static CV measurement
QSV, QSM, QST
14 a
Linear search measurement
LSV, LSI, LGV, LGI,
LSTM, LSSV, LSSI,
LSVM, WM
15 a
Binary search measurement
BSV, BSI, BGV, BGI,
BSM, BST, BSSV, BSSI,
BSVM
a. This measurement is available only for the US control
mode.
chnum :
The channel number of the unit which executes the measurement. This
parameter is not available for the linear search (MM 14) and binary
search (MM 15) measurements.
chnum
Unit
1
SMU1
2
SMU2
3
SMU3
4
SMU4
5a
SMU5
6a
SMU6
23 b
VMU1
24 b
VMU2
a. For MPSMUs in the 41501A/B expander. For HPSMU, the
channel number is 6, not 5.
b. Not available for the quasi-static CV (MM 13), linear
search (MM 14), and binary search (MM 15) measurements.
1-144
Agilent 4155C/4156C GPIB Command Reference, Edition 6
4155C/4156C FLEX Commands
MM
A maximum of 8 units can be used for the measurements. But, for the
following measurement mode, you can use only one measurement unit
(only one chnum can be defined in the MM command).
1. Quasi-static CV measurement (MM 13)
2. 1ch pulsed spot measurements (MM 3) with "keep pulse width"
3. Pulsed sweep measurements (MM 4) with "keep pulse width"
4. Staircase sweep with pulsed bias measurements (MM 5) with "keep
pulse width"
5. Sampling measurement (MM 10) with the sampling interval less
than 2 msec (see the MT command)
where, "keep pulse width" means the measurement setup which the PT
command priority parameter is set to 0 or default setting (see the PT
command).
Remarks
For the SMU or HPSMU, the SMU measurement mode is defined by the CMM
command. Refer to the CMM command.
The measurement range is defined by the RI or RV command. Refer to the RI and
RV command.
To execute the measurement, use the XE command. Refer to the XE command. The
measurement unit performs a measurement even if the source output value is 0.
If you specify multiple measurement units in the MM command, the measurement is
performed by the units in the order defined in the MM command.
For the 1ch pulsed spot, pulsed sweep or staircase sweep with pulsed bias
measurements, the WT command is ignored.
For the 1ch pulsed spot, pulsed sweep or staircase sweep with pulsed bias
measurements with "keep pulse width" (PT command priority parameter setting),
the AV and SLI commands are ignored. The integration time is automatically set to
80 μsec.
For the sampling measurement with a sampling interval of less than 2 msec, the AV
and SLI commands are ignored.
Example
Statements
OUTPUT @Hp4156;"MM 1,1"
OUTPUT @Hp4156;"MM 2,1,3"
Agilent 4155C/4156C GPIB Command Reference, Edition 6
1-145
4155C/4156C FLEX Commands
MP
MP
The MP command specifies the PGU synchronized with the sampling
measurements, and its parameters.
The output starts at the beginning of the sampling measurements (starts by the XE
command). To stop the output, use the DV command. Or to stop the pulse output,
use the SPP command. The output goes to the output value specified by the DV
command or the base value specified by the MP command.
If you specify the pulse output mode and pulse count (not free run), the pulse output
starts at the beginning of the sampling measurements, and the PGU forces the pulses
specified by count.
Execution
Conditions
If the output voltage is greater than ±40 V, the interlock circuit must be shorted.
Syntax
MP chnum,mode,base,bias[,Td,Tw,Tl,Tt,Tp,count]
Parameters
chnum :
Channel number of PGU 27 or 28. Integer expression.
27: PGU1
28: PGU2
mode :
Output mode. 0 or 1. Integer expression.
0: dc voltage output. Set base and bias.
1: Pulse voltage output. Set all parameters.
base :
Base voltage (in V). Numeric expression.
0 to ±40 V.
in 4 mV resolution (0 to ±20 V), in 8 mV resolution (±20 to ±40 V).
bias :
Bias voltage (in V). Numeric expression.
0 to ±40 V.
in 4 mV resolution (0 to ±20 V), in 8 mV resolution (±20 to ±40 V).
Td :
Delay time (in seconds). Only for pulse output.
0 to 10 sec. Numeric expression. See Table 1-14.
Tw :
Pulse width (in seconds). Only for pulse output.
1 μsec to 9.99 sec. Numeric expression. See Table 1-14.
1-146
Agilent 4155C/4156C GPIB Command Reference, Edition 6
4155C/4156C FLEX Commands
MP
Tl :
Leading edge transition time (in seconds). Only for pulse output.
100 nsec to 10 msec. Numeric expression. See Table 1-15.
Restrictions: Tl ≤ Tw × 0.8
Tt :
Trailing edge transition time (in seconds). Only for pulse output.
100 nsec to 10 msec. Numeric expression. See Table 1-15.
Restrictions: Tt ≤ (Tp−Tw) × 0.8
Tp :
Pulse period (in seconds). Only for pulse output.
2 μsec to 10 sec. Numeric expression. See Table 1-14.
Tp parameter setting is effective for both PGU1 and PGU2. If you use
both PGUs, the pulse period setting must be the same. Check the pulse
period setting value of the MP command and the SPG command in
your program.
count :
Pulse count. Only for pulse output.
0 to 65535. Numeric expression.
count=0 specifies free run pulse force.
count parameter setting is effective for both PGU1 and PGU2. If you
use both PGUs, the pulse count setting must be the same. Check the
pulse count setting value of the MP command and the SPG command in
your program.
If you enter the MP command into the internal program memory, do not
set count=0. Free run pulse output is not available.
Example
Statements
OUTPUT @Hp4156;"MP 28,0,0,5"
OUTPUT @Hp4156;"MP 28,1,0,5,5E-6,1E-5,1E-6,1E-6,5E-5,0"
Agilent 4155C/4156C GPIB Command Reference, Edition 6
1-147
4155C/4156C FLEX Commands
MP
Table 1-14
Ranges of Pulse Period, Pulse Width and Delay Time for MP Command
Resolution
in sec
Range a
Tp in sec
Td in sec
1
2E−6 to 100E−6
0 to 100E−6
1E−6 to 99.9E−6
0.1E−6
2
100E−6 to 1E−3
0 to 1E−3
1E−6 to 999E−6
1E−6
3
1E−3 to 10E−3
0 to 10E−3
10E−6 to 9.99E−3
10E−6
4
10E−3 to
100E−3
0 to 100E−3
100E−6 to
99.9E−3
100E−6
5
100E−3 to 1
0 to 1
1E−3 to 999E−3
1E−3
6
1 to 10
0 to 10
10E−3 to 9.99
10E−3
Tw in sec
a. Settings of Tp, Td and Tw for a PGU must be in the same range. If you
use two PGUs, these three parameters must be set in the same range for
both PGUs.
Table 1-15
Leading and Trailing Edge Transition Time for MP Command
Range a
Tl or Tt in sec
Resolution in sec
1
100E−9 to 1E−6
1E−9
2
500E−9 to 10E−6
10E−9
3
5E−6 to 100E−6
100E−9
4
50E−6 to 1E−3
1E−6
5
500E−6 to 10E−3
10E−6
a. Leading time and trailing time for a PGU must be in the same range.
1-148
Agilent 4155C/4156C GPIB Command Reference, Edition 6
4155C/4156C FLEX Commands
MSC
MSC
The MSC command sets the automatic abort condition (stop condition) for the
sampling measurement.
Syntax
MSC abort
Parameters
abort :
Automatic abort condition (stop condition). Integer expression. The
following values are available:
abort
Abort condition
1
Disables the automatic abort function.
2
One of following occurs.
- Compliance on the measurement unit.
- Compliance on the non-measurement unit.
- Overflow on the AD converter.
- Oscillation on any unit.
4
Compliance on the non-measurement unit.
8
Compliance on the measurement unit.
16
Overflow on the AD converter.
32
Oscillation on any unit.
If you want to set multiple abort conditions, specify the sum of the
abort values for the abort conditions shown above. This is allowed for
abort=4 to 32.
For example, if you want to enable the abort function when compliance
on the measurement unit (abort=8) or oscillation (abort=32) are
detected, set abort to 40 (8 + 32).
Agilent 4155C/4156C GPIB Command Reference, Edition 6
1-149
4155C/4156C FLEX Commands
MSC
Output Data
The 4155C/4156C returns the all measurement data until when any abort condition
is detected. The output format of the last data will be as shown below:
Data for the index when abort occurs
Measurement Mode
if aborted in the index n if aborted in the last index
1 channel sampling
[Index_dummy,]Dummy
[Index,]Data
The data is returned after
the nth Data.
Multi channel sampling [Index_dummy,]Dummy
[Index,]Data, ...... Data
The data is returned after
the m×n th Data.
The status of the last data will be greater than 128 (EOD).
where,
Data: Measurement data.
Dummy: Dummy of the measurement data.
Index: Data index. Selected by the FMT command.
Index_dummy: Dummy of the data index. Selected by the FMT command.
m: Number of the measurement channels.
Example
Statements
OUTPUT @Hp4156;"MSC 32"
1-150
Agilent 4155C/4156C GPIB Command Reference, Edition 6
4155C/4156C FLEX Commands
MT
MT
The MT command sets the sampling measurement conditions.
Syntax
MT hold,interval,points
Parameters
hold :
Hold time (in seconds). −0.03 to 655.35 sec. Numeric expression.
Positive value gives the time to keep the bias value output by the
MI/MV channels before starting sampling measurement. Negative
value gives the time to keep the base value output after starting
sampling measurement.
interval :
Initial interval time (in seconds). This value is the initial value of the
sampling interval. 0.00006 to 65.535 sec. Numeric expression.
points :
Sampling points. 1 to 10001. Numeric expression.
Sampling
Operation
Sampling measurement will be started by a measurement trigger such as the XE
command or an external trigger, and performed as shown below. Before the
measurement trigger, the source channels set by the DI/DV commands will start
output at the timing of the DI/DV command execution.
1. By the measurement trigger, source channels set by the MI/MV commands start
the bias value output. Each source channel controls the output simultaneously.
The channels keep the value until the end of the sampling measurement.
2. hold seconds later, the measurement channels start measurement for the first
sampling point. The measurement channels perform the measurement in series
by the order set to the MM command.
3. After that, the following operation is repeated with the specified time interval.
•
Measurement channels start measurement if they are ready to measure.
•
Measurement channels keep the condition if they are busy.
This operation is repeated until the number of measurement result data reaches
to the specified number of measurement data (points).
4. The sampling measurement is completed. And the source channel set by the
MI/MV command forces the base or bias value specified by the MSC command.
The source channel set by the DI/DV command keeps its output.
Example
Statements
OUTPUT @Hp4156;"MT 5,0.1,1001"
Agilent 4155C/4156C GPIB Command Reference, Edition 6
1-151
4155C/4156C FLEX Commands
MV
MV
The MV command specifies the voltage source (SMU or VSU) synchronized with
the sampling measurement, and its parameters.
The output starts at the beginning of the sampling measurements (starts by the XE
command). To stop the output, use the DV command. The output goes to the output
value specified by the DV command.
Execution
Conditions
If the output voltage is greater than ±40 V, the interlock circuit must be shorted.
Syntax
MV chnum,range,base,bias[,Icomp]
If you enter the MV command into the program memory (see the ST command), do
not omit the Icomp parameter. Icomp is necessary when using the internal program
memory.
Parameters
chnum:
Channel number of the unit used to force voltage. Integer expression.
chnum
Unit
chnum
Unit
1
SMU1
5a
SMU5
2
SMU2
6a
SMU6
3
SMU3
21
VSU1
4
SMU4
22
VSU2
a. For MPSMUs in the 41501A/B Expander. For HPSMU,
channel number is 6, not 5.
range:
Range type for voltage output. Integer expression.
range
1-152
Ranging Type a
0
Auto ranging
11 (for SMU)
2 V limited auto ranging
12
20 V limited auto ranging
Agilent 4155C/4156C GPIB Command Reference, Edition 6
4155C/4156C FLEX Commands
MV
Ranging Type a
range
13 (for SMU)
40 V limited auto ranging
14 (for SMU)
100 V limited auto ranging
15 (only for HPSMU)
200 V limited auto ranging
a. Auto ranging uses the lowest output range (available for
the unit) that covers both the bias value and the base value.
Limited auto ranging uses the specified range or above. For
example, 20 V limited auto ranging uses the 100 V range to
force 50 V with 0 V base voltage.
base:
Base voltage (in V). Numeric expression. Set the source unit output
value which has been forced before the XE command. This minimizes
the spike. See Table 1-16.
0 to ±100 (for 4155C/4156C and MPSMU in 41501A/B)
0 to ±200 (for HPSMU in 41501A/B)
0 to ±20 (for VSU)
bias:
Output bias voltage (in V). Numeric expression. See Table 1-16.
0 to ±100 (for 4155C/4156C and MPSMU in 41501A/B)
0 to ±200 (for HPSMU in 41501A/B)
0 to ±20 (for VSU)
Icomp:
Current compliance value (in A). Numeric expression. See Table 1-16.
This parameter is not available for VSU.
If you do not specify this parameter, Icomp is set to the previous setting.
0 A is not allowed for Icomp.
Example
Statements
OUTPUT @Hp4156;"MV 1,12,0,5,1E-3"
Agilent 4155C/4156C GPIB Command Reference, Edition 6
1-153
4155C/4156C FLEX Commands
MV
Table 1-16
Available Parameter Values for MV Command
Output
Range
2V
20 V
40 V
100 V
200 V
1-154
Resolution
in V
bias and base
in V
100E−6
0 to ±2
1E−3
2E−3
5E−3
10E−3
0 to ±20
0 to ±40
0 to ±100
0 to ±200
Maximum
Icomp in A
Remarks
±100E−3
For SMU.
±1
For HPSMU.
±100E−3
For SMU.
±1
For HPSMU.
−
For VSU.
±50E−3
For SMU.
±500E−3
For HPSMU.
±20E−3
For SMU.
±125E−3
For HPSMU.
±50E−3
Agilent 4155C/4156C GPIB Command Reference, Edition 6
4155C/4156C FLEX Commands
NUB?
NUB?
The NUB? query command checks the number of measurement data in the output
data buffer, and stores the results in the output data buffer (query buffer).
The output data is always stored in the query buffer in ASCII format, regardless of
the FMT command.
The NUB? command cannot check and return the number of the measurement data
measured by the TI? command and TV? command.
Syntax
NUB?
Query Response
In US command mode:
Number of measurement data<LF^EOI>
In US42 command mode:
Number of measurement data<CR/LF^EOI>
Example
Statements
OUTPUT @Hp4156;"NUB?"
ENTER @Hp4156;A
Agilent 4155C/4156C GPIB Command Reference, Edition 6
1-155
4155C/4156C FLEX Commands
*OPC(?)
*OPC(?)
The *OPC command monitors the pending operations, and sets/clears the Operation
Complete (OPC) bit in the Standard Event Status Register as follows:
•
If there are no pending operations, sets the OPC bit to 1.
•
If there are any pending operations, sets the OPC bit to 0. The bit will be set to 1
when all pending operations are completed.
The *OPC command is required to enable the OPC bit. To stop monitoring pending
operations (disable the OPC bit), execute the *CLS command.
Syntax
*OPC
Query Response
In US command mode:
1<LF^EOI>
In US42 command mode:
1<CR/LF^EOI>
*OPC? places ASCII character 1 into the Output Queue when all pending
operations are completed.
Example
Statements
OUTPUT @Hp4156;"*OPC"
The following example is for query:
OUTPUT @Hp4156;"*OPC?"
ENTER @Hp4156;A
1-156
Agilent 4155C/4156C GPIB Command Reference, Edition 6
4155C/4156C FLEX Commands
OPEN
OPEN
The OPEN command opens the specified file on the mass storage device specified
by the SDSK command. If the file does not exist on the device, this command
creates a new file with the specified file name.
To read data in the file, use the RD? command. To write data into the file, use the
WR command. After the file operation, enter the CLOSE command to close the file.
Execution
Conditions
Mass storage device is specified by the SDSK command.
Syntax
OPEN file[,mode]
Parameters
file :
File name to be opened.
mode :
Open mode. 0, 1 or 2. Integer expression. See below.
If you do not specify this parameter, mode is set to 0.
0: Reads data from the file.
1: Writes data to the file. The data is written over the file. The previous
data will be deleted.
2: Writes data to the file. The data is appended to the file. Not available
for the flexible disk drive (SDSK 0 command).
Remarks
If you open a new file on a LIF formatted diskette into the built-in flexible disk
drive, the OPEN command creates a 8 KB file.
Example
Statements
OUTPUT @Hp4156;"OPEN 'MDATA'"
OUTPUT @Hp4156;"OPEN 'MDATA',2"
Agilent 4155C/4156C GPIB Command Reference, Edition 6
1-157
4155C/4156C FLEX Commands
*OPT?
*OPT?
The *OPT? query command returns the reportable device options, which are the
units in the 41501A/B Expander.
The output data is always stored in the query buffer in ASCII format, regardless of
the FMT format.
Syntax
*OPT?
Query Response
•
In US command mode:
GNDU,0|MPSMU,0|MPSMU|HPSMU,0|PGU<LF^EOI>
•
In US42 command mode:
GNDU,0|MPSMU,0|MPSMU|HPSMU,0|PGU<CR/LF^EOI>
Example
Statements
OUTPUT @Hp4156;"*OPT?"
ENTER @Hp4156;A$
Example response:
GNDU,0,0,PGU with option 41501B-402
GNDU,0,HPSMU,PGU with option 41501B-412
GNDU,MPSMU,MPSMU,PGU with option 41501B-422
1-158
Agilent 4155C/4156C GPIB Command Reference, Edition 6
4155C/4156C FLEX Commands
OS
OS
The OS command causes the 4155C/4156C to send a trigger signal from the
external trigger output terminal (Ext Trig Out) on the rear panel.
Execution
Conditions
Trigger mode must be set to the trigger output mode, and it must be enabled. See
STG command.
Syntax
OS
Example
Statements
OUTPUT @Hp4156;"OS"
Agilent 4155C/4156C GPIB Command Reference, Edition 6
1-159
4155C/4156C FLEX Commands
PA
PA
The PA command pauses the command execution or internal memory program
execution, until the specified wait time has elapsed or until receiving an event
specified by the TM command.
The event only releases the paused status. It does not start the measurement.
Syntax
PA [wait time]
Parameters
wait time : 0 to 99.9999 seconds, with 100 μsec resolution. Numeric expression.
If this parameter is not specified, the paused status is kept until
receiving the event specified by the TM command.
Remarks
If the TM3 event mode is set, the PA command causes the 4155C/4156C to pause
the operation until the specified wait time has elapsed, until receiving the XE
command, or until receiving an external trigger from the Ext Trig In terminal.
If you send the PA command after the DV or DI command, actual wait time includes
the wait time of the DV or DI command for the output setting.
Example
Statements
OUTPUT @Hp4156;"PA"
OUTPUT @Hp4156;"PA 10"
1-160
Agilent 4155C/4156C GPIB Command Reference, Edition 6
4155C/4156C FLEX Commands
PI
PI
The PI command specifies the pulse current source and its parameters. This
command also clears, and is cleared by, the PV command setting.
In the staircase sweep with pulsed bias measurement mode (set by the MM 5
command), the output forced by the PI command synchronized with the staircase
sweep outputs forced by the WI or WV command.
Execution
Conditions
The filter must be set to OFF using the FL command before the measurement
trigger.
Syntax
PI chnum,range,base,pulse[,Vcomp]
If you enter the PI command into the program memory (see the ST command), do
not omit the Vcomp parameter. The all parameters are necessary when using the
internal program memory.
Parameters
chnum :
Channel number of the unit used to force pulse current. Integer
expression.
chnum
Unit
1
SMU1
2
SMU2
3
SMU3
4
SMU4
5a
SMU5
6a
SMU6
a. For MPSMUs in the 41501A/B Expander. For HPSMU,
channel number is 6, not 5.
Agilent 4155C/4156C GPIB Command Reference, Edition 6
1-161
4155C/4156C FLEX Commands
PI
range:
Ranging type for pulse current output. Integer expression.
range
Ranging Type a
0
Auto ranging
13
100 nA limited auto ranging
14
1 μA limited auto ranging
15
10 μA limited auto ranging
16
100 μA limited auto ranging
17
1 mA limited auto ranging
18
10 mA limited auto ranging
19
100 mA limited auto ranging
20 (only for HPSMU)
1 A limited auto ranging
a. Auto ranging uses the lowest output range (available for the
unit) that covers both the base and pulse values. Limited
auto ranging uses the specified range or above. For example, 10 μA limited auto ranging uses the 100 mA range to
force pulse=50 mA with base=0.
base :
Pulse base current (in A). Numeric expression. See Table 1-17.
0 to ±100E−3 (for 4155C/4156C and MPSMU in 41501A/B) 0 to ±1
(for HPSMU in 41501A/B)
base and pulse must have the same polarity.
pulse :
Pulse current (in A). Numeric expression. See Table 1-17.
0 to ±100E−3 (for 4155C/4156C and MPSMU in 41501A/B) 0 to ±1
(for HPSMU in 41501A/B)
base and pulse must have the same polarity.
1-162
Agilent 4155C/4156C GPIB Command Reference, Edition 6
4155C/4156C FLEX Commands
PI
Vcomp:
Voltage compliance value (in V). Numeric expression. See Table 1-17.
If this parameter is not specified, Vcomp is set to the previous setting.
Voltage compliance range changing may cause 0 V output in a moment.
Compliance polarity is automatically set to the same polarity as the
output value, regardless of the specified Vcomp. If the output value is 0,
the compliance polarity is positive.
Table 1-17
Available Parameter Values for PI Command
Output
Range
Resolution
in A a
100 nA
1 μA
10 μA
100 μA
10E−12
100E−12
1E−9
10E−9
0 to ±100E−9
0 to ±1E−6
0 to ±10E−6
0 to ±100E−6
1 mA
100E−9
0 to ±1E−3
10 mA
1E−6
0 to ±10E−3
100 mA
10E−6
0 to ±20E−3
to ±50E−3
to ±100E−3
0 to ±50E−3
to ±100E−3
0 to ±50E−3
to ±125E−3
to ±500E−3
to ±1
100E−6
1A
100E−6
Maximum
Vcomp in V b
base and
pulse in A
±2
±2
±2
±100
±200
±100
±200
±100
±200
±100
±40
±20
±200
±100
±200
±100
±40
±20
Remarks
For SMU.
For HPSMU.
For SMU.
For HPSMU.
For SMU.
For HPSMU.
For SMU.
For HPSMU.
a. Minimum resolution is Range×5E−5. However the setting accuracy is
not guaranteed for the resolution less than the value shown in the table.
b. If base or pulse value is within 10 μA and not 0, the maximum Vcomp
value must be 2 V even though the output range is 100 μA or large.
Example
Statements
OUTPUT @Hp4156;"PI 1,16,0,5E-5,20"
OUTPUT @Hp4156;"PI 3,15,0,5E-6,2"
Agilent 4155C/4156C GPIB Command Reference, Edition 6
1-163
4155C/4156C FLEX Commands
POR
POR
The POR command sets the output impedance of the PGU.
Syntax
POR chnum,impedance
Parameters
chnum :
Channel number of PGU 27 or 28. Integer expression.
27: PGU1
28: PGU2
impedance : Output impedance. 0 or 1. Integer expression.
0: Low impedance. Almost 0 Ω.
1: 50 Ω.
Example
Statements
OUTPUT @Hp4156;"POR 28,0"
1-164
Agilent 4155C/4156C GPIB Command Reference, Edition 6
4155C/4156C FLEX Commands
PRN
PRN
The PRN command prints the data that the SPL command spools in the temporary
file on the network file system. This command deletes the temporary file.
Execution
Conditions
The SDSK command specifies the network file system. The SPR command
specifies the remote printer. The SPL command specifies the data to be printed.
Syntax
PRN
Example
Statements
OUTPUT @Hp4156;"TI? 1,0"
ENTER @Hp4156 USING "#,5X,13D,X";Mdata
Mdata$="’Id(A)="&VAL$(Mdata)&CHR$(13)&CHR$(10)&"’"
Title$="’Test Results"&CHR$(13)&CHR$(10)&"’"
OUTPUT @Hp4156;"SDSK 1"
OUTPUT @Hp4156;"SPR 1"
OUTPUT @Hp4156;"SPL ";Title$
OUTPUT @Hp4156;"SPL ";Mdata$
OUTPUT @Hp4156;"PRN"
This example makes the following example output.
TestResults
Id(A)=4.156E-12
Agilent 4155C/4156C GPIB Command Reference, Edition 6
1-165
4155C/4156C FLEX Commands
PT
PT
The PT command sets timing parameters (hold time, pulse width, and pulse period)
for a pulse source set by the PI, PV, PWI or PWV command.
Syntax
For 1ch pulsed spot measurements:
PT hold time,width[,period[,trigger delay[,priority]]]
For pulsed sweep or staircase sweep with pulsed bias measurements:
PT hold time,width,period[,trigger delay[,priority]]
Parameters
hold time : Hold time (in seconds). Numeric expression.
0 to 655.35 sec. 0.01 sec resolution. Initial setting = 0.
width :
Pulse width (in seconds). Numeric expression.
0.5E−3 to 0.1 sec. 0.1E−3 sec resolution. Initial setting = 1E−3 sec.
period :
Pulse period (in seconds). Numeric expression.
5E−3 to 1 sec. 0.1E−3 sec resolution. Initial setting = 10E−3 sec.
Restrictions: period ≥ width + 4 ms
If you do not specify period for the pulse spot measurements, period is
automatically set to 10 msec.
trigger
delay :
Trigger output delay time (in seconds). Numeric expression.
0 to 32.7E−3 sec. 0.1E−3 sec resolution. Initial setting = 0.
Restrictions: trigger delay < width
This parameter is the time from pulse leading edge to timing of trigger
output from the Ext Trig Out connector.
If you do not use the external trigger, set trigger delay to 0.
If you do not specify this parameter, the value is set to the previous
setting.
1-166
Agilent 4155C/4156C GPIB Command Reference, Edition 6
4155C/4156C FLEX Commands
PT
priority :
Priority to force the pulse output. 0 or 1.
0: Keep pulse width (default)
In this mode,
•
If the measurement time is greater than the specified pulse width,
the pulse does not wait the measurement completion, and goes to
the base level. Then measurement result data will be meaningless.
•
Only 1 measurement unit (either a pulse measurement unit or a dc
measurement unit) is available.
•
Measurement range set by the RI or RV command must be the fixed
range or compliance range.
•
The AV, SLI and WT command settings are ignored.
•
Integration time is always set to 80 μsec.
1: Wait for measurement completion
In this mode,
Example
Statements
•
If the measurement time is greater than the specified pulse width,
the pulse keeps the peak level until the measurement completion.
•
Multi channel measurement is available. This allows to use a pulse
measurement unit and dc measurement units.
•
The WT command settings are ignored.
OUTPUT @Hp4156;"PT 1,0.01"
OUTPUT @Hp4156;"PT 1,0.005,0.01,0.001,1"
Agilent 4155C/4156C GPIB Command Reference, Edition 6
1-167
4155C/4156C FLEX Commands
PV
PV
The PV command specifies the pulse voltage source and its parameters. This
command also clears, and is cleared by, the PI command setting.
In the staircase sweep with pulsed bias measurement mode (MM 5 command), the
output forced by the PV command synchronized with the staircase sweep outputs
forced by the WI or WV command.
Execution
Conditions
Filter must be set to OFF using the FL command before the measurement trigger.
Syntax
For SMU:
PV chnum,range,base,pulse[,Icomp]
If you enter the PV command into the program memory (see the ST command), do
not omit the Icomp parameter. The all parameters are necessary when using the
internal program memory.
For VSU:
PV chnum,range,base,pulse
Parameters
chnum :
Channel number of the unit used to force pulse voltage. Integer
expression.
chnum
Unit
1
SMU1
2
SMU2
3
SMU3
4
SMU4
5a
SMU5
6a
SMU6
21
VSU1
22
VSU2
a. For MPSMUs in the 41501A/B Expander. For HPSMU,
channel number is 6, not 5.
1-168
Agilent 4155C/4156C GPIB Command Reference, Edition 6
4155C/4156C FLEX Commands
PV
range:
Ranging type for pulse voltage output. Integer expression. Range
changing may cause 0 V output in a moment.
Ranging Type a
range
0
Auto ranging
11 (for SMU)
2 V limited auto ranging
12
20 V limited auto ranging
13 (for SMU)
40 V limited auto ranging
14 (for SMU)
100 V limited auto ranging
15 (only for HPSMU)
200 V limited auto ranging
a. Auto ranging uses the lowest output range (available for
the unit) that covers both the base and pulse values. Limited auto ranging uses the specified range or above. For
example, 20 V limited auto ranging uses the 100 V range to
force pulse=50 V with base=0.
base :
Pulse base voltage (in V). Numeric expression. See Table 1-18.
0 to ±100 (for 4155C/4156C and MPSMU in 41501A/B)
0 to ±200 (for HPSMU in 41501A/B)
0 to ±20 (for VSU)
pulse :
Pulse voltage (in V). Numeric expression. See Table 1-18.
0 to ±100 (for 4155C/4156C and MPSMU in 41501A/B)
0 to ±200 (for HPSMU in 41501A/B)
0 to ±20 (for VSU)
Agilent 4155C/4156C GPIB Command Reference, Edition 6
1-169
4155C/4156C FLEX Commands
PV
Icomp:
Current compliance value (in A). Numeric expression. See Table 1-18.
If you do not specify this parameter, Icomp is set to the previous setting.
The minimum value (lower limit) of |Icomp| must be as shown in the
following table.
V pulse a
Icomp
0 < |Vp-p| < 2 V
|Icomp| > 2 nA
2 V < |Vp-p| < 20 V
|Icomp| > |Vp-p|×1.111×10E−6 −2.22×10E−6
20 V < |Vp-p|
|Icomp| > 20 μA
a. |Vp-p| is the voltage from the base value to the pulse value.
Compliance polarity is automatically set to the same polarity as the
output value, regardless of the specified Icomp. If the output value is 0,
the compliance polarity is positive.
Table 1-18
Available Parameter Values for PV Command
Output
Range
2V
20 V
40 V
100 V
200 V
Example
Statements
Resolution
in V
100E−6
1E−3
2E−3
5E−3
10E−3
base and
pulse in V
0 to ±2
0 to ±20
0 to ±40
0 to ±100
0 to ±200
Maximum
Icomp in A
Remarks
±100E−3
For SMU.
±1
For HPSMU.
±100E−3
For SMU.
±1
For HPSMU.
−
For VSU.
±50E−3
For SMU.
±500E−3
For HPSMU.
±20E−3
For SMU.
±125E−3
For HPSMU.
±50E−3
OUTPUT @Hp4156;"PV 1,12,0,5,1E-3"
OUTPUT @Hp4156;"PV 21,12,-3,5"
1-170
Agilent 4155C/4156C GPIB Command Reference, Edition 6
4155C/4156C FLEX Commands
PWI
PWI
The PWI command specifies the pulsed sweep current source and its parameters.
This command clears the settings of the PWV, WSV and WSI commands.
The settings specified by this command are cleared by the PWV command.
Execution
Conditions
Syntax
Filter must be set to OFF using the FL command before the measurement trigger.
If you do not specify the Rmode value, the 4155C/4156C uses the lowest output
range that covers all base, start and stop values. Then the setting resolution must be
the same for the base, start, and stop values. See Rmode on page 1-173.
PWI chnum,mode,range,base,start,stop,step[,Vcomp
[,Rmode]]
If you enter the PWI command into the program memory (see the ST command), do
not omit the Vcomp parameter. Vcomp is necessary when using the internal program
memory.
Parameters
chnum :
Channel number of the unit for the pulsed sweep current source. Integer
expression.
chnum
Unit
1
SMU1
2
SMU2
3
SMU3
4
SMU4
5a
SMU5
6a
SMU6
a. For MPSMUs in the 41501A/B Expander. For HPSMU,
channel number is 6, not 5.
mode :
Sweep mode. 1 to 4 are available. Integer expression.
1: Linear sweep (single stair)
2: Log sweep (single stair)
3: Linear sweep (double stair)
4: Log sweep (double stair)
Agilent 4155C/4156C GPIB Command Reference, Edition 6
1-171
4155C/4156C FLEX Commands
PWI
range :
Ranging type for pulsed current sweep. Integer expression.
Operation of ranging depends on the Rmode (ranging mode) setting.
See Rmode on page 1-173.
Ranging Type a
range
0
Auto ranging
9 (only for 4156C)
10 pA limited auto ranging
10 (only for 4156C)
100 pA limited auto ranging
11
1 nA limited auto ranging
12
10 nA limited auto ranging
13
100 nA limited auto ranging
14
1 μA limited auto ranging
15
10 μA limited auto ranging
16
100 μA limited auto ranging
17
1 mA limited auto ranging
18
10 mA limited auto ranging
19
100 mA limited auto ranging
20 (only for HPSMU)
1 A limited auto ranging
a. Auto ranging uses the lowest output range (available for
the unit) that covers all base, start and stop values. Limited
auto ranging uses the specified range or above.
base :
Base current (in A). Numeric expression. See Table 1-19.
0 to ±100E−3 (for 4155C/4156C and MPSMU in 41501A/B)
0 to ±1 (for HPSMU in 41501A/B)
base, start and stop must have the same polarity.
1-172
Agilent 4155C/4156C GPIB Command Reference, Edition 6
4155C/4156C FLEX Commands
PWI
start :
Start pulse current (in A). Numeric expression. See Table 1-19.
0 to ±100E−3 (for 4155C/4156C and MPSMU in 41501A/B)
0 to ±1 (for HPSMU in 41501A/B)
base, start and stop must have the same polarity.
stop :
Stop pulse current (in A). Numeric expression. See Table 1-19.
0 to ±100E−3 (for 4155C/4156C and MPSMU in 41501A/B)
0 to ±1 (for HPSMU in 41501A/B)
base, start and stop must have the same polarity.
step :
Number of steps for staircase sweep. 1 to 1001 are available. Numeric
expression.
Vcomp :
Voltage compliance (in V). Numeric expression. See Table 1-19. If you
do not specify this parameter, Vcomp is set to the previous setting.
Voltage compliance range changing may cause 0 V output in a moment.
Compliance polarity is automatically set to the same polarity as the
output value, regardless of the specified Vcomp. If the output value is 0,
the compliance polarity is positive.
Rmode :
Ranging mode. 0 or 1. Integer expression. If you do not specify Rmode,
ranging mode is set to 0 (fixed mode).
0: Fixed
Uses the output range, which covers all base, start and stop values,
during the pulsed sweep.
For example, if you enter the following command, the 4155C/4156C
uses the 100 mA range to force both 1 mA pulse and 100 mA pulse.
PWI 1,1,17,0,0.001,0.1,2,10,0
1: Auto
Uses the optimum output range for the output pulse.
For example, if you enter the following command, the 4155C/4156C
uses 1 mA range to force 1 mA, and uses 100 mA range to force 100
mA.
PWI 1,1,17,0,0.001,0.1,2,10,1
Agilent 4155C/4156C GPIB Command Reference, Edition 6
1-173
4155C/4156C FLEX Commands
PWI
Table 1-19
Available Parameter Values for PWI Command
Output
Range
Resolution
in A a
base, start or
stop in A
Maximum
Vcomp in V b
Remarks
10 pA
10E−15
0 to ±10E−12
±2
100 pA
10E−15
0 to ±100E−12
±2
1 nA
100E−15
0 to ±1E−9
±2
10 nA
1E−12
0 to ±10E−9
±2
100 nA
10E−12
0 to ±100E−9
±2
1 μA
100E−12
0 to ±1E−6
±2
10 μA
1E−9
0 to ±10E−6
±2
100 μA
10E−9
0 to ±100E−6
±100
For SMU.
±200
For HPSMU.
±100
For SMU.
±200
For HPSMU.
±100
For SMU.
±200
For HPSMU.
0 to ±20E−3
±100
For SMU.
to ±50E−3
±40
to ±100E−3
±20
0 to ±50E−3
±200
to ±100E−3
±100
0 to ±50E−3
±200
to ±125E−3
±100
to ±500E−3
±40
to ±1
±20
1 mA
10 mA
100 mA
100E−9
1E−6
10E−6
100E−6
1A
100E−6
0 to ±1E−3
0 to ±10E−3
For 4156C.
For HPSMU.
a. Minimum resolution is Range×5E−5. However the setting accuracy is
not guaranteed for the resolution less than the value shown in the table.
b. If base, start, or stop value is within 10 μA and not 0, the maximum
Vcomp value must be 2 V even though the output range is 100 μA or
large.
Example
Statements
OUTPUT @Hp4156;"PWI 1,1,17,0,0,0.1"
OUTPUT @Hp4156;"PWI 3,2,13,0,1E-7,1E-2,100,10,1"
1-174
Agilent 4155C/4156C GPIB Command Reference, Edition 6
4155C/4156C FLEX Commands
PWV
PWV
The PWV command specifies the pulsed sweep voltage source and its parameters.
This command also clears the settings of the PWI, WSV and WSI commands.
The settings specified by this command are cleared by the PWI command.
Execution
Conditions
Syntax
Filter must be set to OFF using the FL command before the measurement trigger.
If you do not specify the Rmode value, the 4155C/4156C uses the lowest output
range that covers all base, start and stop values. Then the setting resolution must be
the same for the base, start, and stop values. See Rmode on page 1-177.
PWV chnum,mode,range,base,start,stop,step[,Icomp
[,Rmode]]
If you enter the PWV command into the program memory (see the ST command),
do not omit the Icomp parameter. Icomp is necessary when using the internal
program memory.
Parameters
chnum :
Channel number of the unit for the pulsed sweep voltage source.
Integer expression.
chnum
Unit
chnum
Unit
1
SMU1
5a
SMU5
2
SMU2
6a
SMU6
3
SMU3
21
VSU1
4
SMU4
22
VSU2
a. For MPSMUs in the 41501A/B Expander. For HPSMU,
channel number is 6, not 5.
mode :
Sweep mode. 1 to 4 are available. Integer expression.
1: Linear sweep (single stair)
2: Log sweep (single stair)
3: Linear sweep (double stair)
4: Log sweep (double stair)
Agilent 4155C/4156C GPIB Command Reference, Edition 6
1-175
4155C/4156C FLEX Commands
PWV
range:
Ranging type for pulsed voltage sweep. Integer expression.
Operation of ranging depends on the Rmode (ranging mode) setting.
See Rmode on page 1-177.
Ranging Type a
range
0
Auto ranging
11 (for SMU)
2 V limited auto ranging
12
20 V limited auto ranging
13 (for SMU)
40 V limited auto ranging
14 (for SMU)
100 V limited auto ranging
15 (only for HPSMU)
200 V limited auto ranging
a. Auto ranging uses the lowest output range (available for
the unit) that covers all base, start and stop values. Limited
auto ranging uses the specified range or above.
base :
Base voltage (in V). Numeric expression. See Table 1-20.
0 to ±100 (for 4155C/4156C and MPSMU in 41501A/B)
0 to ±200 (for HPSMU in 41501A/B)
0 to ±20 (for VSU)
base, start and stop must have the same polarity for log sweep.
start :
Start pulse voltage (in V). Numeric expression. See Table 1-20.
0 to ±100 (for 4155C/4156C and MPSMU in 41501A/B)
0 to ±200 (for HPSMU in 41501A/B)
0 to ±20 (for VSU)
base, start and stop must have the same polarity for log sweep.
stop :
Stop pulse voltage (in V). Numeric expression. See Table 1-20.
0 to ±100 (for 4155C/4156C and MPSMU in 41501A/B)
0 to ±200 (for HPSMU in 41501A/B)
0 to ±20 (for VSU)
base, start and stop must have the same polarity for log sweep.
1-176
Agilent 4155C/4156C GPIB Command Reference, Edition 6
4155C/4156C FLEX Commands
PWV
step :
Number of steps for staircase sweep. Numeric expression. 1 to 1001 are
available.
Icomp :
Current compliance (in A). Numeric expression. See Table 1-20.
If you do not specify this parameter, Icomp is set to the previous setting.
The minimum value (lower limit) of |Icomp| must be as shown in the
following table.
V pulse a
Icomp
0 < |Vp-p| < 2 V
|Icomp| > 2 nA
2 V < |Vp-p| < 20 V
|Icomp| > |Vp-p|×1.111×10E−6 −2.22×10E−6
20 V < |Vp-p|
|Icomp| > 20 μA
a. |Vp-p| is the voltage from the base value to the pulse value.
Compliance polarity is automatically set to the same polarity as the
output value, regardless of the specified Icomp. If the output value is 0,
the compliance polarity is positive.
Rmode :
Ranging mode. 0 or 1. Integer expression. If you do not specify Rmode,
ranging mode is set to 0 (fixed mode).
0: Fixed
Uses the output range, which covers all base, start and stop values,
during the pulsed sweep.
For example, if you enter the following command, the 4155C/4156C
uses the 20 V range to force both 1 V pulse and 10 V pulse.
PWV 1,1,12,0,1,10,2,1E-3,0
1: Auto
Uses the optimum output range for the output pulse.
For example, if you enter the following command, the 4155C/4156C
uses the 2 V range to force 1 V, and uses the 20 V range to force 10 V.
PWV 1,1,12,0,1,10,2,1E-3,1
Range changing may cause 0 V output in a moment.
Agilent 4155C/4156C GPIB Command Reference, Edition 6
1-177
4155C/4156C FLEX Commands
PWV
Table 1-20
Available Parameter Values for PWV Command
Output
Range
2V
20 V
40 V
100 V
200 V
Example
Statements
Resolution
in V
100E−6
1E−3
2E−3
5E−3
10E−3
base, start or
stop in V
0 to ±2
0 to ±20
0 to ±40
0 to ±100
0 to ±200
Maximum
Icomp in A
Remarks
±100E−3
For SMU.
±1
For HPSMU.
±100E−3
For SMU.
±1
For HPSMU.
−
For VSU.
±50E−3
For SMU.
±500E−3
For HPSMU.
±20E−3
For SMU.
±125E−3
For HPSMU.
±50E−3
OUTPUT @Hp4156;"PWV 1,1,12,0,1,10,2"
OUTPUT @Hp4156;"PWV 3,3,14,0,1,10,100,0.1,1"
1-178
Agilent 4155C/4156C GPIB Command Reference, Edition 6
4155C/4156C FLEX Commands
QSL
QSL
The QSL command enables or disables the leakage current data output, and enables
or disables the leakage current compensation for the quasi-static CV measurements.
This command is only for the US control mode.
Execution
Conditions
The MM 13 command must be sent before sending this command.
Syntax
QSL data,compen
Parameters
data :
Leakage current data output. Integer expression.
data
compen :
Description
0
Disables data output. Default setting.
1
Enables data output.
Leakage current compensation. Integer expression.
compen
Description
0
Disables compensation. Default setting.
1
Enables compensation.
Example
Statements
OUTPUT @Hp4156;"QSL 0,0"
See Also
For details on the quasi-static CV measurements, refer to the QSV command.
If you send the above command, the leakage current is not measured during the
quasi-static CV measurements.
Agilent 4155C/4156C GPIB Command Reference, Edition 6
1-179
4155C/4156C FLEX Commands
QSM
QSM
The QSM command sets the automatic abort condition for the quasi-static CV
measurements. This command is only for the US control mode.
Execution
Conditions
The MM 13 command must be sent before sending this command.
Syntax
QSM condition[,output]
If you send this command to the program memory (see the ST command), do not
omit the output parameter. It is necessary when using the internal program memory.
Parameters
condition : Automatic abort condition. Integer expression. The following values
are available:
condition
Abort condition
1
Disables the automatic abort function. Default setting.
2
One of following occurs.
- Compliance on the non-measurement unit.
- Compliance on the leakage current measurement unit.
- Integration time too short at the capacitance measurement.
- Overflow on ADC.
- Oscillation on any unit.
4
Compliance on the non-measurement unit.
8
One of following occurs.
- Compliance on the leakage current measurement unit.
- Integration time too short at the capacitance measurement.
16
Overflow on ADC.
32
Oscillation on any unit.
To set multiple conditions, specify the sum of the condition values for
the abort conditions shown above. This is allowed for condition=4 to
32. For example, if you want to enable the abort function for when
integration time is too short (abort=8) or oscillation (abort=32) are
detected, set abort to 40 (8 + 32).
1-180
Agilent 4155C/4156C GPIB Command Reference, Edition 6
4155C/4156C FLEX Commands
QSM
output :
Source output value after abort condition occurred. Integer expression.
output
Output Data
Description
1
Returns to the start value. Default setting.
2
Keeps the stop value.
The 4155C/4156C returns the all measurement data until when any abort condition
is detected. The output format of the last data will be as shown below:
[DataL,]DataC[,Source_data]
where,
DataL: Leakage current measurement data. Selected by the QSL command.
DataC: Capacitance measurement data.
Source_data: Source output data. Selected by the FMT command.
If the Source_data output is disabled, the status of the last DataC will be greater
than 128 (EOD).
Example
Statements
OUTPUT @Hp4156;"QSM 24"
Agilent 4155C/4156C GPIB Command Reference, Edition 6
1-181
4155C/4156C FLEX Commands
QSR
QSR
The QSR command sets the current measurement range used for the quasi-static CV
measurements. This command is only for the US control mode.
Execution
Conditions
The MM 13 command must be sent before sending this command.
Syntax
QSR range
Parameters
range:
The available range values are shown below. Integer expression.
range
Remarks
Ranging type
−9 (only for 4156C)
10 pA range fixed
−10 (only for 4156C)
100 pA range fixed
−11
1 nA range fixed (default setting)
−12
10 nA range fixed
The range set by this command is used for both the leakage current measurement
and the capacitance measurement.
Use the QST command to set the integration time of the capacitance measurement
and the leakage current measurement.
Example
Statements
OUTPUT @Hp4155;"QSR -11"
See Also
For details on the quasi-static CV measurements, refer to the QSV command.
1-182
Agilent 4155C/4156C GPIB Command Reference, Edition 6
4155C/4156C FLEX Commands
QST
QST
The QST command sets the timing parameters of the quasi-static CV measurements.
This command is only for the US control mode.
Execution
Conditions
The MM 13 command must be sent before sending this command.
Syntax
QST cinteg,linteg,hold,delay1[,delay2]
If you send this command to the program memory (see the ST command), do not
omit the delay2 parameter. It is necessary when using the internal program memory.
Parameters
cinteg :
Integration time for the capacitance measurement, in seconds. Numeric
expression. The available values are 0.04 to 400 s for a 50 Hz line
frequency, and 0.033333 to 333.33 s for 60 Hz. But the value is
rounded as follows:
cinteg = n / selected line frequency (n : integer. 2 to 20000.)
The initial setting is 5/ selected line frequency. So this value is 0.1 s for
a 50 Hz line frequency, and approximately 0.083 s for 60 Hz.
linteg :
Integration time for the leakage current measurement, in seconds.
Numeric expression. The available values are 0.02 to 2 s for a 50 Hz
line frequency, and 0.016667 to 1.6667 s for 60 Hz. But the value is
rounded as follows:
linteg = n / selected line frequency (n : integer. 1 to 100.)
The initial setting is 5/ selected line frequency. So this value is 0.1 s for
a 50 Hz line frequency, and approx. 0.083 s for 60 Hz.
hold :
Hold time (in seconds). Numeric expression. This is the time from the
start of the first sweep step to the beginning of the delay time (delay1).
0 to 655.35 sec. 0.01 sec resolution. Initial setting = 0.
delay1 :
Delay time (in seconds). Numeric expression. This is the time from the
start of each sweep step to the start of the measurement.
0 to 65.535 sec. 0.0001 sec resolution. Initial setting = 0.
delay2 :
Delay time (in seconds). Numeric expression. This is the time from the
end of the measurement to the start of the next sweep step or the end of
the sweep. delay2 is not effective for the spot measurement.
0 to 65.535 sec. 0.0001 sec resolution. Initial setting = 0.
Agilent 4155C/4156C GPIB Command Reference, Edition 6
1-183
4155C/4156C FLEX Commands
QST
Example
Statements
OUTPUT @Hp4155;"QST 0.35,0.1,5,0.2"
This example sets a hold time of 5 s and a delay time of 0.2 s for delay1. The
integration time for the capacitance measurement is 0.35 s for a line frequency of
60 Hz, and 0.36 s for 50 Hz. The integration time for the leakage current is 0.1 s for
50 Hz and 60 Hz.
Where, 0.35 is equal to 21 / 60 and 17.5 / 50. This means 0.35 s is not a suitable
value for the integration time at 50 Hz. Because n must be integer. In this case, the
integration time is automatically set to 0.36 s (=18 / 50). n is rounded to 18, not 17.
See Also
For details on the quasi-static CV measurements, refer to the QSV command.
1-184
Agilent 4155C/4156C GPIB Command Reference, Edition 6
4155C/4156C FLEX Commands
QSV
QSV
The QSV command specifies the voltage sweep source and its parameters for the
quasi-static CV measurements. This command is only for the US control mode.
For the operation of the sweep source, see “Remarks” on page 1-188
Execution
Conditions
The MM 13 command must be sent before sending this command. If you do not
specify the channel number for the MM command, the channel specified by the
QSV command forces the sweep voltage, and measures the capacitance.
Syntax
QSV chnum,mode,range,start,stop,cvoltage,step[,Icomp]
If you send this command to the program memory (see the ST command), do not
omit the Icomp parameter. Icomp is necessary when using the internal program
memory.
Parameters
chnum:
Channel number of the voltage source. Integer expression.
chnum
Unit
1
SMU1
2
SMU2
3
SMU3
4
SMU4
5a
SMU5 (MPSMU)
6a
SMU6 (MPSMU or HPSMU)
a. For SMUs in the 41501A/B Expander.
mode :
Sweep mode. Integer expression.
mode
Description
1
Single sweep mode (start to stop).
2
Double sweep mode (start to stop to start).
Agilent 4155C/4156C GPIB Command Reference, Edition 6
1-185
4155C/4156C FLEX Commands
QSV
range:
Ranging type for voltage output. Integer expression.
range
Ranging Type
0
Auto ranging
11
2 V limited auto ranging
12
20 V limited auto ranging
13
40 V limited auto ranging
14
100 V limited auto ranging
15 (only for HPSMU)
200 V limited auto ranging
Auto ranging uses the lowest output range that covers both the start and
the stop value. Limited auto ranging uses the specified range or above.
For example, 20 V limited auto ranging uses the 20 V range even if
both the start and stop values are less than 2 V.
start :
Start voltage (in V). Numeric expression. See Table 1-21.
0 to ±100 (for 4155C/4156C and MPSMU in 41501A/B)
0 to ±200 (for HPSMU in 41501A/B)
This value is the upper or lower limit of the sweep output voltage.
stop :
Stop voltage (in V). Numeric expression. See Table 1-21.
0 to ±100 (for 4155C/4156C and MPSMU in 41501A/B)
0 to ±200 (for HPSMU in 41501A/B)
This value is the upper or lower limit of the sweep output voltage.
NOTE
In the QSCV measurement, the 4155C/4156C executes the capacitance
measurement at the sweep steps except for the sweep start voltage and stop voltage.
At each sweep step, the capacitance measurement is executed over the voltage
range: output voltage ± cvoltage/2 (V).
1-186
Agilent 4155C/4156C GPIB Command Reference, Edition 6
4155C/4156C FLEX Commands
QSV
cvoltage :
Capacitance measurement voltage (in V).
The minimum value is double the resolution of the output range, and
the maximum value is 10 V. The value must be ≤ |sweep step voltage|
you desire. If you set the value greater than |sweep step voltage|, the
cvoltage is automatically set to the same value as |sweep step voltage|.
See step.
step :
The number of steps for the voltage sweep. 1 to 1001. Integer
expression. Define the sweep step voltage at first, then calculate the
step value by using the following formula:
step = |start-stop| / |sweep step voltage|- 1
If you set step=1 and |stop−start| ≤ 10, the 4155C/4156C executes a
one-point capacitance measurement between the start and stop values.
Then cvoltage value is ignored.
Icomp :
Current compliance (in A). Numeric expression. See Table 1-21.
If this parameter is not specified, Icomp is set to the previous setting.
The current compliance polarity is automatically set to the same
polarity value as the output value (voltage), regardless of polarity of the
specified Icomp.
Table 1-21
Available Parameter Values for QSV Command
Output
Range
2V
20 V
40 V
100 V
200 V
Resolution
in V
start and stop
in V
100E–6
0 to ±2
1E–3
2E–3
5E–3
10E–3
0 to ±20
0 to ±40
0 to ±100
0 to ±200
Maximum
Icomp in A
Remarks
±100E–3
For SMU.
±1
For HPSMU.
±100E–3
For SMU.
±1
For HPSMU.
±50E–3
For SMU.
±500E–3
For HPSMU.
±20E–3
For SMU.
±125E–3
For HPSMU.
±50E–3
Agilent 4155C/4156C GPIB Command Reference, Edition 6
1-187
4155C/4156C FLEX Commands
QSV
Remarks
In the QSCV measurement, the 4155C/4156C executes the capacitance
measurement at the sweep steps except for the sweep start voltage and stop voltage.
At each sweep step, the capacitance measurement is executed over the voltage
range: output voltage ± cvoltage/2 (V). where cvoltage is the capacitance
measurement voltage. See Figure 1-1.
Source parameters; start, stop, cvoltage, and step are set by the QSV command.
Time parameters; hold time, delay1, delay2, linteg, and cinteg are set by the QST
command. linteg and cinteg are the integration time for the leakage current
measurement and the capacitance measurement, respectively.
Figure 1-1
Setting Parameters and Operation of QSCV Measurement
stop
(limit of sweep source output)
last step voltage
cvoltage= 2 × Vq
Trigger (XE)
delay1
3rd step voltage
0V
0V
Measurement items
at Nth step
2nd step voltage
step voltage
1st step
voltage
V 0 IL 0
Vq
V IL
cinteg
Vq
hold time
I
linteg
linteg
step voltage
delay1
start
(limit of sweep source output)
1-188
delay1
delay2
Agilent 4155C/4156C GPIB Command Reference, Edition 6
4155C/4156C FLEX Commands
QSV
The operation of the quasi-static CV measurements is explained below. This is the
case of start < stop.
a. Measurement trigger enables the sweep source output. The sweep source forces
the first step output voltage−Vq V, and waits for hold time.
where Vq=cvoltage/2 V.
b. Repeats c. and d. for the Nth sweep step. where N is integer, 1 to step (number of
sweep steps. step = |start-stop| / |step voltage|- 1).
c. The sweep source changes the output voltage to the Nth step output voltage−Vq
V, and waits for delay time (delay1).
d. The measurement unit measures the following items, and waits for delay time
(delay2).
V0
Voltage at the Nth step voltage−Vq V
IL0
Leakage current at the Nth step voltage−Vq V
I
Current at the voltage transition to the Nth step voltage+Vq V
V
Voltage at the Nth step voltage+Vq V
IL
Leakage current at the Nth step voltage+Vq V
e. After the sweep measurement, the sweep source changes output voltage to 0 V.
NOTE
when step voltage = capacitance measurement voltage (cvoltage):
• delay2 is automatically set to 0.
• V0 and IL0 are not measured for the second step and later. The capacitance
calculation uses the V and IL values at the previous step, instead.
Capacitance Data
At each sweep step, the capacitance data is calculated by using the following
formula.
C = (I - Leak) × cinteg /(V-V0)
The QSL0,0 command disables the leakage current compensation and the leakage
current data output. Then the leakage current measurement is not executed. The
capacitance data is calculated by using the following formula.
C = I × cinteg /(V-V0)
Leakage Current
Data
At each sweep step, the leakage current data is calculated by using the following
formula. This data output is enabled by the QSL1,0 or QSL1,1 command.
Leak = IL + τ × (IL0 - IL)/(2 × cinteg), where τ is the time for electrical charge
Agilent 4155C/4156C GPIB Command Reference, Edition 6
1-189
4155C/4156C FLEX Commands
QSV
Example
Statements
OUTPUT @Hp4155;"QSV 1,1,0,0,5,1,4,0.1"
This example sets the following parameter values:
start=0 V, stop=5 V, cvoltage=1 V, step=4
This sets the sweep step voltage to 1 V. And the capacitance measurement is then
executed over the following voltage ranges:
1st sweep step: 0.5 to 1.5 V
2nd sweep step: 1.5 to 2.5 V
3rd sweep step: 2.5 to 3.5 V
4th sweep step: 3.5 to 4.5 V
For easy definition, use variables to set the parameters as shown below:
Start=0
!Start voltage (V)
Stop=5
!Stop voltage (V)
Cvolt=1
!C meas voltage (V)
Svolt=1
!Sweep step voltage (V)
Nop=ABS(Start-Stop)/Svolt-1 ! Number of steps
!
OUTPUT @Hp4155;"QSV 1,1,0,Start,Stop,Cvolt,Nop,0.1"
1-190
Agilent 4155C/4156C GPIB Command Reference, Edition 6
4155C/4156C FLEX Commands
QSZ/QSZ?
QSZ/QSZ?
The QSZ command executes the capacitance offset measurement and returns the
offset data, or it enables/disables the offset capacitance cancel function for the
quasi-static CV measurements. This command is only for the US control mode.
Execution
Conditions
The MM 13 command must be sent before sending this command.
The QSCV measurement setup must be completed before executing the offset
measurement.
Syntax
QSZ mode
QSZ?
Parameters
mode :
Offset cancel mode. Integer expression.
mode
Query Response
Description
0
Disables offset cancel. Default setting.
1
Enables offset cancel.
2
Executes an offset data measurement, and returns the
offset data. Does not enable the offset cancel function.
QSZ? and QSZ 2 returns the capacitance offset data.
offset data <terminator>
<terminator> depends on the FMT command setting.
Example
Statements
OUTPUT @Hp4156;"QSZ 2"
OUTPUT @Hp4156;"RMD? 1"
ENTER @Hp4156 USING "#,5X,13D,X";Offset
OUTPUT @Hp4156;"QSZ 1"
OUTPUT @Hp4156;"QSZ?"
ENTER @Hp4156 USING "#,5X,13D,X";Offset
Agilent 4155C/4156C GPIB Command Reference, Edition 6
1-191
4155C/4156C FLEX Commands
RBC
RBC
The RBC command controls the 16441A R-BOX.
Syntax
RBC chnum,resistance
Parameters
chnum :
Channel number of the R-BOX. 1 or 2. Integer expression. See
below.
1: Channel 1.
2: Channel 2.
resistance :
Resistance for the specified channel. Integer expression. 0, 1, 2
or 3. See below.
0: 0 Ω.
1: 10 kΩ.
2: 100 kΩ.
3: 1 MΩ.
Example
Statements
OUTPUT @Hp4156;"RBC 1,3"
1-192
Agilent 4155C/4156C GPIB Command Reference, Edition 6
4155C/4156C FLEX Commands
RCV
RCV
The RCV command enables the units that fail self-test.
If a unit fails self-test, the unit is disabled and does not respond to any command
except the RCV and TST? commands. The RCV command enables the unit so that it
can receive commands again. This command should only be used for servicing the
4155C/4156C. DO NOT use this command during normal operation.
If the 4155C/4156C fails self-test, contact the nearest Agilent Technologies Sales
and Service Office.
Syntax
RCV slotnum
Parameters
slotnum :
Slot number where the unit is installed. 0 to 8 are available. Integer
expression.
slotnum
Unit
0
GNDU
1
SMU1
2
SMU2
3
SMU3
4
SMU4
5a
SMU5
6a
SMU6
7b
VSU1, VSU2, VMU1 and VMU2
8c
PGU1 and PGU2
a. For MPSMUs in the 41501A/B Expander. For HPSMU,
slot number is 6, not 5.
b. All VSU1, VSU2, VMU1, and VMU2 are enabled by specifying this value.
c. Both PGU1 and PGU2 are enabled by specifying this value.
Example
Statements
OUTPUT @Hp4156;"RCV 1"
OUTPUT @Hp4156;"RCV 3"
Agilent 4155C/4156C GPIB Command Reference, Edition 6
1-193
4155C/4156C FLEX Commands
RD?
RD?
The RD? command reads an ASCII data in the file opened by the OPEN command.
The ASCII data is read sequentially, and is put in the output buffer of the
4155C/4156C. The data may be read by using the ENTER (HP BASIC) command.
Execution
Conditions
The OPEN command mode parameter is set to 0 (reading the data).
Output Response
In the control mode by US command:
[Data]<LF^EOI>
In the control mode by US42 command:
[Data]<CR/LF^EOI>
where, Data is the contents of the file now opened by the OPEN command. The
RD? command reads the maximum 8 KB data at once. If the data is less than 8 KB,
the RD? command reads the data from the head until receiving EOF. If the data is
more than 8 KB, the RD? command reads the data from the head to the 8 KB.
For the HP LIF file, the RD? command reads the data written in a file by one write
operation. So if the data was written by two write operations, you need to enter the
RD? command twice to read whole data in the file, even if the file is less than 8 KB.
Example
Statements
This example reads data from the “MDATA” file, and print the data.
OUTPUT @Hp4156;"SDSK 1"
OUTPUT @Hp4156;"OPEN 'MDATA',0"
OUTPUT @Hp4156;"RD?"
OUTPUT @Hp4156;"CLOSE"
ENTER @Hp4156;A$
PRINT A$
1-194
Agilent 4155C/4156C GPIB Command Reference, Edition 6
4155C/4156C FLEX Commands
RI
RI
The RI command specifies the current measurement ranging mode for all types of
measurements, except for the high-speed spot measurements. The RI command only
specifies the measurement range or ranging type, and the ranging mode. Range
changing occurs immediately after the trigger (that is, during the measurements).
For high-speed spot measurements, the current measurement range is set by the
TI/TI? command.
Syntax
RI chnum,range[,Rmode]
Parameters
chnum :
Channel number of the unit used to measure current. Integer
expression.
chnum
Unit
1
SMU1
2
SMU2
3
SMU3
4
SMU4
5a
SMU5
6a
SMU6
a. For MPSMUs in the 41501A/B Expander. For HPSMU,
channel number is 6, not 5.
range and
Rmode:
Ranging type or the measurement range for the current measurements.
The range value is used to specify the ranging type or the measurement
range by itself. If you specify the Rmode parameter, the ranging type or
the measurement range is specified by a combination of the range and
Rmode values.
For example, both an "RI 1,14" command and an "RI 1,14,1" command
can be used for the same operation (to measure current by the 1 μA
limited auto ranging, using SMU1). However, an "RI 1,14,0" command
is for a different operation.
Agilent 4155C/4156C GPIB Command Reference, Edition 6
1-195
4155C/4156C FLEX Commands
RI
If you omit Rmode value.
Available range value is shown below. Integer expression.
Ranging type a
range
0
Auto ranging
9 (only for 4156C)
10 pA limited auto ranging
10 (only for 4156C)
100 pA limited auto ranging
11
1 nA limited auto ranging
12
10 nA limited auto ranging
13
100 nA limited auto ranging
14
1 μA limited auto ranging
15
10 μA limited auto ranging
16
100 μA limited auto ranging
17
1 mA limited auto ranging
18
10 mA limited auto ranging
19
100 mA limited auto ranging
20 (only for HPSMU)
1 A limited auto ranging
−9 (only for 4156C)
10 pA range fixed
−10 (only for 4156C)
100 pA range fixed
−11
1 nA range fixed
−12
10 nA range fixed
−13
100 nA range fixed
−14
1 μA range fixed
−15
10 μA range fixed
−16
100 μA range fixed
−17
1 mA range fixed
−18
10 mA range fixed
−19
100 mA range fixed
−20 (only for HPSMU)
1 A range fixed
a. Auto ranging uses the lowest measurement range (available for the unit)
that covers the measurement value. Limited auto ranging uses the specified range or above. For example, 10 μA limited auto ranging uses the
10 μA range to measure 1 nA, and uses the 100 mA range to measure 50
mA.
1-196
Agilent 4155C/4156C GPIB Command Reference, Edition 6
4155C/4156C FLEX Commands
RI
NOTE
For the following measurement mode, use the following table instead of the table
above.
•
1ch pulsed spot measurements with "keep pulse width"
•
Pulsed sweep measurements with "keep pulse width"
•
Staircase sweep with pulsed bias measurements with "keep pulse width"
•
Sampling measurement with the sampling interval less than 2 msec (see the MT
command)
where, "keep pulse width" means the measurement setup which the PT command
priority parameter is set to 0 or default setting (see the PT command).
range
Ranging type
0 (for SMU)
100mA range fixed
0 (for HPSMU)
1 A range fixed
9, −9 (only for 4156C)
10 pA range fixed
10, −10 (only for 4156C)
100 pA range fixed
11, −11
1 nA range fixed
12, −12
10 nA range fixed
13, −13
100 nA range fixed
14, −14
1 μA range fixed
15, −15
10 μA range fixed
16, −16
100 μA range fixed
17, −17
1 mA range fixed
18, −18
10 mA range fixed
19, −19
100 mA range fixed
20, −20 (only for HPSMU)
1 A range fixed
Agilent 4155C/4156C GPIB Command Reference, Edition 6
1-197
4155C/4156C FLEX Commands
RI
If you specify Rmode value.
The following ranging mode is available:
NOTE
•
Auto ranging mode (Rmode=0)
•
Limited auto ranging mode (Rmode=1)
•
Fixed range mode (Rmode=2)
•
Compliance range mode (Rmode=3)
For the following measurement mode, only the fixed range mode (Rmode=2) and
the compliance range mode (Rmode=3) are available. If you set Rmode=0 or 1, the
RI command works as same as when Rmode=3.
•
1ch pulsed spot measurements with "keep pulse width"
•
Pulsed sweep measurements with "keep pulse width"
•
Staircase sweep with pulsed bias measurements with "keep pulse width"
•
Sampling measurement with the sampling interval less than 2 msec (see the MT
command)
where, "keep pulse width" means the measurement setup which the PT command
priority parameter is set to 0 or default setting (see the PT command).
•
To use auto ranging (Rmode=0):
Measurement unit uses the lowest measurement range that covers the
measurement value. The minimum range depends on the unit you use.
Set the parameters as follows:
•
range :
One of 9 to 20. Used as a placeholder only, the value is ignored.
Rmode :
0
To use compliance range (Rmode=3):
Measurement unit uses the lowest measurement range that covers the current
compliance value or the current output value set by the source output command
you use, such as DV, DI, WV, WI and so on.
Set the parameters as follows:
range :
One of 9 to 20. Used as a placeholder only, the value is ignored.
Rmode :
3
1-198
Agilent 4155C/4156C GPIB Command Reference, Edition 6
4155C/4156C FLEX Commands
RI
•
To use limited auto ranging (Rmode=1):
Measurement unit uses the lowest measurement range that covers the
measurement value. The minimum allowed range is the range specified by the
range value.
Set the parameters as follows:
range :
One of 9 to 20. See below.
Rmode :
1
range
Ranging type
9 (only for 4156C)
10 pA limited auto ranging
10 (only for 4156C)
100 pA limited auto ranging
11
1 nA limited auto ranging
12
10 nA limited auto ranging
13
100 nA limited auto ranging
14
1 μA limited auto ranging
15
10 μA limited auto ranging
16
100 μA limited auto ranging
17
1 mA limited auto ranging
18
10 mA limited auto ranging
19
100 mA limited auto ranging
20 (only for HPSMU)
1 A limited auto ranging
Agilent 4155C/4156C GPIB Command Reference, Edition 6
1-199
4155C/4156C FLEX Commands
RI
•
To use fixed range (Rmode=2):
Measurement unit uses the range specified by the range value.
Set the parameters as follows:
range :
One of 9 to 20. See below.
Rmode :
2
range
Example
Statements
Measurement range
9 (only for 4156C)
10 pA range fixed
10 (only for 4156C)
100 pA range fixed
11
1 nA range fixed
12
10 nA range fixed
13
100 nA range fixed
14
1 μA range fixed
15
10 μA range fixed
16
100 μA range fixed
17
1 mA range fixed
18
10 mA range fixed
19
100 mA range fixed
20 (only for HPSMU)
1 A range fixed
OUTPUT @Hp4156;"RI 1,0"
OUTPUT @Hp4156;"RI 3,14,1"
1-200
Agilent 4155C/4156C GPIB Command Reference, Edition 6
4155C/4156C FLEX Commands
RM
RM
This command specifies the auto range operation for the current measurement.
Syntax
RM chnum,mode[,rate]
where the rate parameter is available for mode=2 or 3.
Parameters
chnum :
SMU current measurement channel number. Integer expression. 1 to 6.
See “RI” on page 1-195.
mode :
Range changing operation mode. Integer expression. 1, 2 or 3.
mode
Description
1
Initial setting. If you set mode=1, do not set rate.
2
If measured data ≥ current1, the range changes up after
measurement.
3
If measured data ≤ current2, the range changes down
immediately, and if measured data ≥ current1, the range
changes up after measurement.
where current1 and current2 are given by the following formula:
current1 = measurement range × rate /100
current2 = measurement range × rate /1000
For example, if measurement range=10 mA and rate=90, these values
are as follows:
current1 = 9 mA
current2 = 0.9 mA
rate:
Example
Statements
Parameter used to calculate the current value. Numeric expression.
11 to 100. Default setting is 50.
OUTPUT @Hp4156;"RM 1,2"
OUTPUT @Hp4156;"RM 2,3,60"
Agilent 4155C/4156C GPIB Command Reference, Edition 6
1-201
4155C/4156C FLEX Commands
RMD?
RMD?
The RMD? command puts the measurement data into the 4155C/4156C output data
buffer.
Read the data before the 4155C/4156C output buffer becomes full up. The output
buffer can store approximately 1500 measurement data.
For the high-speed spot measurements by the TI? or TV? command, and for the
US42 command mode with level=16, the RMD? command is not required after the
measurement execution command.
For the data output format, refer to “Data Output Format” on page 1-11.
Syntax
RMD? [count]
Parameters
count :
Number of data to read. Integer expression. Available number is 0 to
20002. count must be the number of measurement data or less.
If count is more than the number of measurement data, the
4155C/4156C goes to the wait state after putting all data into the output
buffer. To release this wait state, send the device clear (ex: CLEAR
command of HP BASIC) to the 4155C/4156C. Then the data will be
cleared. If you do not specify count or if you specify count=0, the
RMD? command reads the data until EOD (end of data). If you set
count=1500 or more, read the measurement data immediately. The
output data buffer will become full up.
Example
Statements
OUTPUT @Hp4156;"XE"
OUTPUT @Hp4156;"RMD? 1"
ENTER @Hp4156;A
If the output data is:
1.1111,2.2222,3.3333<terminator>
A is:
1.1111,
1-202
Agilent 4155C/4156C GPIB Command Reference, Edition 6
4155C/4156C FLEX Commands
*RST
*RST
The *RST command resets the 4155C/4156C to the initial settings, and clears the
zero offset data. This command does not clear the self calibration data.
Initial settings by the *RST command is shown below:
Item
with US command
with US42 command
Output Switch
ON for all units
Filter (SMUs)
SMU Measurement Mode
SMU Measurement Range
ON
Compliance side measurement mode (see CMM)
Auto for spot and staircase sweep.
Compliance range for others.
Grounded measurement mode
Auto for spot and staircase sweep.
20 V range for others.
Cleared for both sweep source and pulse source
0 sec, 0 sec
0.001 sec, 0.01 sec
Auto, 1
ON
OFF
Not cleared. Cleared by power on.
XE, TV, TI, and GET (Group Execute Trigger)
ASCII with Header data
<LF^EOI>
<CR/LF^EOI>
Cleared
Cleared
Only bit 6 is enabled.
VMU Operation Mode
VMU Measurement Range
Source Parameters
Hold Time, Delay Time
Pulse Width, Period
Averaging Mode, Number
Auto Calibration
Auto Abort Function
Program Memory
Trigger
Output Data Format
Terminator for Output Data
Output Data Buffer
Error Register
Status Byte
GNDU, VMU: ON
SMU, VSU, PGU: OFF
Syntax
*RST
Remarks
If you want to reset units while a sweep measurement is being performed, you must
first send the AB command, then the *RST command.
Device Clear (CLEAR statement for HP BASIC) resets the 4155C/4156C more
directly than this command, bypassing the input buffer.
Example
Statement
OUTPUT @Hp4156;"*RST"
Agilent 4155C/4156C GPIB Command Reference, Edition 6
1-203
4155C/4156C FLEX Commands
RU
RU
The RU command sequentially executes the 4155C/4156C internal memory
programs.
Before executing the internal memory program, close the Interlock circuit. If you do
not close the interlock circuit, an error occurred and the measurement is aborted.
Execution
Conditions
The specified programs have been stored by using the ST and END commands,
from the start program number through the stop program number.
Syntax
RU start,stop
Parameters
start :
Start program number. 1 to 255 are available. Integer expression.
stop :
Stop program number. 1 to 255 are available. Integer expression.
where, stop value must be greater than or equal to the start value.
Remarks
The 4155C/4156C does not detect errors during the internal memory program
execution.
Example
Statements
OUTPUT @Hp4156;"RU 1,10"
OUTPUT @Hp4156;"RU 3,6"
1-204
Agilent 4155C/4156C GPIB Command Reference, Edition 6
4155C/4156C FLEX Commands
RV
RV
The RV command specifies the voltage measurement ranging mode for all types of
voltage measurements, except for high-speed spot measurements. The RV command
only specifies the measurement range or ranging type, and the ranging mode. Range
changing occurs immediately after the trigger (that is, during the measurements).
For high-speed spot measurements, the voltage measurement range is set by the
TV/TV? command.
Syntax
RV chnum,range[,Rmode]
Parameters
chnum :
Channel number of the unit used to measure voltage. Integer
expression.
chnum
Unit
chnum
Unit
1
SMU1
5a
SMU5
2
SMU2
6a
SMU6
3
SMU3
23
VMU1
4
SMU4
24
VMU2
a. For MPSMUs in the 41501A/B Expander. For HPSMU,
channel number is 6, not 5.
range and
Rmode:
Ranging type or the measurement range for the voltage measurements.
The range value is used to specify the ranging type or the measurement
range by itself. If you specify the Rmode parameter, the ranging type or
the measurement range is specified by the combination of the range
and Rmode values. In this case, the meaning of range is changed as
described in the next table.
For example, both an "RV 1,14" command and an "RV 1,14,1"
command can be used for the same operation (to measure voltage by
the 100 V limited auto ranging using SMU1). The "RI 1,14,0"
command is for different operations.
Agilent 4155C/4156C GPIB Command Reference, Edition 6
1-205
4155C/4156C FLEX Commands
RV
If you omit Rmode value.
Available range value is shown below: Integer expression.
Ranging type a
range
0
10, −10 (only for VMU in differential mode)
11, −11
12, −12 (for SMU and VMU in grounded mode)
13, −13 (for SMU)
14, −14 (for SMU)
15, −15 (only for HPSMU)
Auto ranging
0.2 V limited auto ranging
2 V limited auto ranging
20 V limited auto ranging
40 V limited auto ranging
100 V limited auto ranging
200 V limited auto ranging
a. Auto ranging uses the lowest measurement range (available for the unit)
that covers the measurement value. Limited auto ranging uses the specified range or above. For example, 20 V limited auto ranging uses the 20
V range to measure 1 V, and uses the 40 V range to measure 30 V.
NOTE
For the following measurement mode, see the following table instead of the table
above.
1. 1ch pulsed spot measurements with "keep pulse width"
2. Pulsed sweep measurements with "keep pulse width"
3. Staircase sweep with pulsed bias measurements with "keep pulse width"
4. Sampling measurement with the sampling interval less than 2 msec (see the MT
command)
where, "keep pulse width" means the measurement setup which the PT command
priority parameter is set to 0 or default setting (see the PT command).
range
0 (for SMU)
0 (for HPSMU)
10, −10 (only for VMU in differential mode)
11, −11
12, −12 (for SMU and VMU in grounded mode)
13, −13 (for SMU)
14, −14 (for SMU)
15, −15 (only for HPSMU)
1-206
Ranging type
100 V range fixed
200 V range fixed
0.2 V range fixed
2 V range fixed
20 V range fixed
40 V range fixed
100 V range fixed
200 V range fixed
Agilent 4155C/4156C GPIB Command Reference, Edition 6
4155C/4156C FLEX Commands
RV
If you specify Rmode value.
The following ranging mode is available:
NOTE
•
Auto ranging mode (Rmode=0)
•
Limited auto ranging mode (Rmode=1)
•
Fixed range mode (Rmode=2)
•
Compliance range mode (Rmode=3)
For the following measurement mode, only the fixed range mode and the
compliance range mode (Rmode=2 or 3) are available. If you enter Rmode=0 or 1,
the RI command works as same as when Rmode=3.
1. 1ch pulsed spot measurements with "keep pulse width"
2. Pulsed sweep measurements with "keep pulse width"
3. Staircase sweep with pulsed bias measurements with "keep pulse width"
4. Sampling measurement with the sampling interval less than 2 msec (see the MT
command)
where, "keep pulse width" means the measurement setup which the PT command
priority parameter is set to 0 or default setting (see the PT command).
Agilent 4155C/4156C GPIB Command Reference, Edition 6
1-207
4155C/4156C FLEX Commands
RV
•
To use auto ranging (Rmode=0):
The measurement unit uses the lowest measurement range that covers the
measurement value. The minimum range depends on the unit you use.
Set the parameters as follows:
•
range :
One of 10 to 15. Used as a placeholder only, the value is ignored.
Rmode :
0
To use limited auto ranging (Rmode=1):
The measurement unit uses the lowest measurement range that covers the
measurement value. The minimum allowed range is the range specified by the
range value.
Set the parameters as follows:
range :
One of 10 to 15. See below.
Rmode :
1
range
Ranging type
10 (only for VMU in differential mode)
0.2 V limited auto ranging
11
2 V limited auto ranging
12 (for SMU and VMU in grounded mode)
20 V limited auto ranging
13 (for SMU)
40 V limited auto ranging
14 (for SMU)
100 V limited auto ranging
15 (only for HPSMU)
200 V limited auto ranging
1-208
Agilent 4155C/4156C GPIB Command Reference, Edition 6
4155C/4156C FLEX Commands
RV
•
To use fixed range (Rmode=2):
The measurement unit uses the range specified by the range value.
Set the parameters as follows:
range :
One of 10 to 15. See below.
Rmode :
2
range
•
Measurement range
10 (only for VMU in differential mode)
0.2 V range fixed
11
2 V range fixed
12 (for SMU and VMU in grounded mode)
20 V range fixed
13 (for SMU)
40 V range fixed
14 (for SMU)
100 V range fixed
15 (only for HPSMU)
200 V range fixed
To use compliance range (Rmode=3):
The measurement unit uses the lowest measurement range that covers the
voltage compliance value or the voltage output value set by the source output
command you use, such as DI, DV, WI, WV and so on.
Set the parameters as follows:
range :
One of 10 to 15. Used as a placeholder only, the value is ignored.
Rmode :
3
For VMU, the measurement range is fixed to 20 V in the grounded mode, and
fixed to 2 V in the differential mode.
Example
Statements
OUTPUT @Hp4156;"RV 23,10"
OUTPUT @Hp4156;"RV 1,12,1"
Agilent 4155C/4156C GPIB Command Reference, Edition 6
1-209
4155C/4156C FLEX Commands
RZ
RZ
The RZ command returns the unit to the settings that are stored by the DZ command
and clears the stored unit settings.
The DZ command stores the unit settings (V/I output values, V/I output ranges, and
V/I compliance values), then sets the unit to Zero Output.
Execution
Conditions
The DZ command has been executed for the specified unit. The US, US42, RZ, CL,
CA, *TST?, *RST or Device Clear command is not executed for the specified unit.
Syntax
RZ [chnum[,chnum...[,chnum]...]]
Parameters
chnum :
Channel number. Integer expression.
1: SMU1
2: SMU2
3: SMU3
4: SMU4
5: SMU5. For HPSMU, chnum 5 is not used.
6: SMU6. For HPSMU, chnum is 6.
21: VSU1
22: VSU2
27: PGU1
28: PGU2
If you do not specify this parameter, this command returns the settings
for all units that satisfy the conditions described in "Execution
Conditions" above, in the order that the DZ command stored them.
You can specify up to 10 channels at once using the RZ command. The
4155C/4156C returns the stored unit settings in the order specified.
Example
Statements
OUTPUT @Hp4156;"RZ"
OUTPUT @Hp4156;"RZ 1,2,3,21,22"
1-210
Agilent 4155C/4156C GPIB Command Reference, Edition 6
4155C/4156C FLEX Commands
SCR
SCR
The SCR command scratches the specified program from the internal program
memory of the 4155C/4156C.
Syntax
SCR [prog No.]
Parameters
prog No. : Program number. 1 to 255 are available. Integer expression. If you do
not specify this parameter, this command scratches all programs stored
in the program memory.
Example
Statements
OUTPUT @Hp4156;"SCR"
OUTPUT @Hp4156;"SCR 5,10"
Agilent 4155C/4156C GPIB Command Reference, Edition 6
1-211
4155C/4156C FLEX Commands
SDSK
SDSK
The SDSK command selects the mass storage device used to get or save data, such
as the measurement data or setup data.
Execution
Conditions
Network file system is registered on the NETWORK DISK SETUP table of the
SYSTEM: MISCELLANEOUS screen.
Syntax
SDSK disk
Parameters
disk :
Identification to specify the mass storage device. 0, 1, 2, 3 or 4. Integer
expression.
disk value is relative to the position of softkeys available for the DISK
field of the SYSTEM: FILER screen.
Softkeys for DISK
Position
top
Description
disk
Internal flexible disk drive.
0
Label
FLOPPY
second from top
−
Network file system.
1
third from top
−
Network file system.
2
4th from top
−
Network file system.
3
5th from top
−
Network file system.
4
Softkey label of the network file system can be defined by using the
NETWORK DISK SETUP table of the SYSTEM: MISCELLANEOUS
screen.
Example
Statements
OUTPUT @Hp4156;"SDSK 2"
1-212
Agilent 4155C/4156C GPIB Command Reference, Edition 6
4155C/4156C FLEX Commands
SIT
SIT
The SIT command changes the value of the integration time, Short or Long.
Syntax
SIT type,time
Parameters
type :
1 (Short) or 3 (Long). Integer expression.
time :
Integration time. Numeric expression. For the available values, see
table below.
type
time
Value
Description
1
Short
80E−6 to 10.16E−3 seconds
3
Long
16.7E−3 to 2 seconds
For the integration time Long, SIT command translates the input time value to the
PLC (Power Line Cycles) value. If you enter "SIT 3,2" command to the
4155C/4156C at 50 Hz line frequency site (1 PLC is 0.02 sec), the 4155C/4156C
sets the PLC value to 100 (= 2 sec / 0.02 sec) automatically.
Example
Statements
OUTPUT @Hp4156;"SIT 1,80E-6"
OUTPUT @Hp4156;"SIT 3,1"
Agilent 4155C/4156C GPIB Command Reference, Edition 6
1-213
4155C/4156C FLEX Commands
SLI
SLI
The SLI command selects the integration time setting, Short, Medium, or Long.
This command setting is ignored by the following measurement mode.
1. 1ch pulsed spot measurements with "keep pulse width"
2. Pulsed sweep measurements with "keep pulse width"
3. Staircase sweep with pulsed bias measurements with "keep pulse width"
4. Sampling measurements with the sampling interval less than 2 msec (see the MT
command)
where, "keep pulse width" means the measurement setup which the PT command
priority parameter is set to 0 or default setting (see the PT command).
Syntax
SLI type
Parameters
type :
1, 2 or 3. Integer expression. See below.
1: Selects the Short integration time
2: Selects the Medium integration time
3: Selects the Long integration time
Example
Statements
OUTPUT @Hp4156;"SLI 1"
1-214
Agilent 4155C/4156C GPIB Command Reference, Edition 6
4155C/4156C FLEX Commands
SOC
SOC
The SOC command enables or disables the zero offset cancel function for the SMU
low current measurements and the VMU differential voltage measurements.
Execution
Conditions
Zero offset data is already measured by the GOC command. If you do not measure
the zero offset data before executing the SOC command, the previous zero offset
data or 0 (zero) is used.
For SMU, the measurement mode must be set to the current measurement mode.
For VMU, the measurement mode must be set to the differential voltage
measurement mode.
Syntax
SOC chnum,status
Parameters
chnum :
Channel number of the unit to set the zero offset cancel function.
Integer expression.
chnum
Unit
chnum
Unit
1
SMU1
5a
SMU5
2
SMU2
6a
SMU6
3
SMU3
23 b
VMU1
4
SMU4
24 b
VMU2
a. For MPSMUs in the 41501A/B Expander. For HPSMU,
channel number is 6, not 5.
b. Differential voltage measurements use both VMU1 and
VMU2. Specify 23 or 24.
status :
ON/OFF status of the zero offset cancel function. 0 or 1. Integer
expression. Zero offset cancel function is initially set to OFF.
0: Zero offset function OFF.
1: Zero offset function ON.
Example
Statements
OUTPUT @Hp4156;"SOC 1,1"
Agilent 4155C/4156C GPIB Command Reference, Edition 6
1-215
4155C/4156C FLEX Commands
SPG
SPG
The SPG command specifies the PGU and its parameters.
To force the output, use the SRP command. To stop the output, use the SPP
command or the DV command. If you use two PGUs, the SRP, SPP and DV
commands are effective for both PGUs.
Syntax
SPG chnum,mode[,base[,pulse,Td,Tw,Tl,Tt,Tp,Pc]]
Parameters
chnum :
Channel number of PGU 27 or 28. Integer expression.
27: PGU1
28: PGU2
mode :
Output mode. 0, 1 or 2. Integer expression.
0: Clears the settings of the PGU specified by chnum.
1: dc voltage output. Set base.
2: Pulse voltage output. Set all parameters.
base :
Base voltage (in V). For mode = 1 or 2.
When mode=1, this value is set to the output value.
0 to ±40 V. Numeric expression.
Resolution: 4 mV (for 0 to ±20 V), 8 mV (for ±20 to ±40 V).
pulse :
Pulse voltage (in V). Only for pulse output.
0 to ±40 V. Numeric expression.
Resolution: 4 mV (for 0 to ±20 V), 8 mV (for ±20 to ±40 V).
1-216
Agilent 4155C/4156C GPIB Command Reference, Edition 6
4155C/4156C FLEX Commands
SPG
Td :
Delay time (in seconds). Only for pulse output.
0 to 10 sec. Numeric expression. See Table 1-22.
Restrictions: Td < Tp
Tw :
Pulse width (in seconds). Only for pulse output.
1 μsec to 9.99 sec. Numeric expression. See Table 1-22.
Restrictions: Tw < Tp
Tl :
Leading edge transition time (in seconds). Only for pulse output.
100 nsec to 10 msec. Numeric expression. See Table 1-23.
Restrictions: Tl < Tw × 0.8
Tt :
Trailing edge transition time (in seconds). Only for pulse output.
100 nsec to 10 msec. Numeric expression. See Table 1-23.
Restrictions: Tt < (Tp−Tw) × 0.8
Tp :
Pulse period (in seconds). Only for pulse output.
2 μsec to 10 sec. Numeric expression. See Table 1-22.
Tp parameter setting is effective for both PGU1 and PGU2. If you use
both PGUs, the pulse period setting must be the same. Check the pulse
period setting value of the SPG, MP and STT commands in your
program.
Pc :
Number of pulses. Only for pulse output.
1 to 65535, or 0. Numeric expression.
If you set Pc to 0, the 4155C/4156C forces pulse voltage in free run
mode (continues pulse output).
count parameter setting is effective for both PGU1 and PGU2. If you
use both PGUs, the pulse count setting must be the same. Check the
pulse count setting value of the SPG, MP and STT commands in your
program.
If you enter the SPG command into the internal program memory, do
not set Pc=0. Free run pulse output is not available.
Agilent 4155C/4156C GPIB Command Reference, Edition 6
1-217
4155C/4156C FLEX Commands
SPG
Table 1-22
Ranges of Pulse Period, Pulse Width and Delay Time for SPG Command
Range
a
Tp in sec
Tw in sec
Td in sec
Resolution
in sec
1
2E−6 to 100E−6
1E−6 to 99.9E−6
0 to 100E−6
0.1E−6
2
100E−6 to 1E−3
1E−6 to 999E−6
0 to 1E−3
1E−6
3
1E−3 to 10E−3
10E−6 to 9.99E−3
0 to 10E−3
10E−6
4
10E−3 to 100E−3
100E−6 to 99.9E−3
0 to 100E−3
100E−6
5
100E−3 to 1
1E−3 to 999E−3
0 to 1
1E−3
6
1 to 10
10E−3 to 9.99
0 to 10
10E−3
a. Settings of Tp, Tw and Td for a PGU must be in the same range. If you
use two PGUs, these three parameters must be set in the same range for
both PGUs.
Table 1-23
Leading and Trailing Edge Transition Time for SPG Command
Range a
Tl or Tt in sec
Resolution in sec
1
100E−9 to 1E−6
1E−9
2
500E−9 to 10E−6
10E−9
3
5E−6 to 100E−6
100E−9
4
50E−6 to 1E−3
1E−6
5
500E−6 to 10E−3
10E−6
a. Leading time and trailing time for a PGU must be in the same range.
Example
Statements
OUTPUT @Hp4156;"SPG 28,0"
OUTPUT @Hp4156;"SPG 28,1,5"
OUTPUT @Hp4156;"SPG 28,2,0,5,0,5E-6,1E-6,1E-6,1E-5,1000"
1-218
Agilent 4155C/4156C GPIB Command Reference, Edition 6
4155C/4156C FLEX Commands
SPL
SPL
The SPL command specifies the data to print, and spools the data.
This command requires a temporary file on the network file system specified by the
SDSK command to spool the data. If a temporary file is not opened, this command
creates a temporary file and names it with the IP address of the 4155C/4156C. The
temporary file is deleted by the PRN command which executes print-out.
Execution
Conditions
The SDSK command specifies the network file system.
Syntax
SPL data
Parameters
data :
Example
Statements
OUTPUT @Hp4156;"SPL 'TestResults'"
OUTPUT @Hp4156;"SPL";A$
The SPR command specifies the remote printer.
Data to print. Characters or numeric data (ASCII).
Agilent 4155C/4156C GPIB Command Reference, Edition 6
1-219
4155C/4156C FLEX Commands
SPP
SPP
The SPP command stops the PGU pulse output started by the SRP command. The
PGU output goes to the base value set by the SPG command. If you use two PGUs,
this command stops both PGU outputs.
Syntax
SPP
Example
Statements
OUTPUT @Hp4156;"SPP"
1-220
Agilent 4155C/4156C GPIB Command Reference, Edition 6
4155C/4156C FLEX Commands
SPR
SPR
The SPR command selects the remote printer used to print the data.
Execution
Conditions
Remote printer is registered on the NETWORK PRINTER SETUP table of the
SYSTEM: MISCELLANEOUS screen.
Syntax
SPR printer
Parameters
printer :
Identification for the printer. 1, 2, 3 or 4. Integer expression.
printer value is relative to the position of softkeys available for the
DESTINATION field of the SYSTEM: PRINT/PLOT SETUP screen.
Softkeys for
DESTINATION
Position
Description
printer
Label
top
GPIB
Printer connected to GP-IB
−
second from
top
PARALLEL
Printer connected to parallel
interface
−
third from top
−
Remote printer
1
4th from top
−
Remote printer
2
5th from top
−
Remote printer
3
6th from top
−
Remote printer
4
Softkey label of the remote printer can be defined by using the
NETWORK PRINTER SETUP table of the SYSTEM:
MISCELLANEOUS screen.
Example
Statements
OUTPUT @Hp4156;"SPR 1"
Agilent 4155C/4156C GPIB Command Reference, Edition 6
1-221
4155C/4156C FLEX Commands
*SRE
*SRE
The *SRE command enables the specified bits of the Status Byte Register for SRQ
(service requests), and masks (disables) the bits that are not specified.
Syntax
*SRE bit
Parameters
bit :
0 to 255 are available. Integer expression. To specify bit, use the
decimal value of the bits as shown in the following tables.
For example, to enable Bit 0, 4, and 7 for the SRQ, the bit value must
be 145 (1 + 16 + 128). If bit=0, or if you do not specify a bit value, all
bits, except for Bit 6, will be masked (disabled for the SRQ).
In US command mode: You cannot mask bit 6.
Decimal Value
Bit Number
Description
1
2
4
8
16
32
64
128
Bit 0
Bit 1
Bit 2
Bit 3
Bit 4
Bit 5
Bit 6
Bit 7
Emergency Status
Measurement/Stress Status
not used
Questionable Status
MAV (Message Available summary-message)
ESB (Event Status Bit)
Request Service (RQS) Message
not used
In US42 command mode: You cannot mask bit 6.
Example
Statements
Decimal Value
Bit Number
1
2
4
8
16
32
64
128
Bit 0
Bit 1
Bit 2
Bit 3
Bit 4
Bit 5
Bit 6
Bit 7
Description
Data Ready
Wait
not used
Interlock Open
Set Ready
Error
RQS
Shut Down
OUTPUT @Hp4156;"*SRE 6"
OUTPUT @Hp4156;"*SRE 128"
1-222
Agilent 4155C/4156C GPIB Command Reference, Edition 6
4155C/4156C FLEX Commands
*SRE?
*SRE?
The *SRE? query command requests information about which bits of the Status
Byte Register are enabled for the SRQ (service requests), and stores the results in
the output data buffer (query buffer).
The output data is always stored in the query buffer in ASCII format, regardless of
the FMT command.
Syntax
*SRE?
Query Response
In US command mode: enabled bits<LF^EOI>
enabled bits are represented by the corresponding decimal values shown below.
Decimal Value
1
2
4
8
16
32
64
128
Bit Number
Bit 0
Bit 1
Bit 2
Bit 3
Bit 4
Bit 5
Bit 6
Bit 7
Description
Emergency Status
Measurement/Stress Status
not used
Questionable Status
MAV (Message Available summary-message)
ESB (Event Status Bit)
Request Service (RQS) Message
not used
In US42 command mode: enabled bits<CR/LF^EOI>
enabled bits are represented by the corresponding decimal values shown below.
Decimal Value
1
2
4
8
16
32
64
128
Bit Number
Bit 0
Bit 1
Bit 2
Bit 3
Bit 4
Bit 5
Bit 6
Bit 7
Description
Data Ready
Wait
not used
Interlock Open
Set Ready
Error
RQS
Shut Down
For example, if Bit 0, 3, and 4 are enabled for the SRQ, 25 (1 + 8 + 16) will be
returned. If all bits, except for Bit 6, are masked, enabled bits will be 0.
Example
Statements
OUTPUT @Hp4156;"*SRE?"
ENTER @Hp4156;A
Agilent 4155C/4156C GPIB Command Reference, Edition 6
1-223
4155C/4156C FLEX Commands
SRP
SRP
SRP command forces the PGU output (dc voltage or pulse voltage) set by the SPG
command, immediately. If you use two PGUs, this command starts to force both
PGU outputs.
To stop the PGU pulse output, use the SPP command or the DV command. The SPP
command sets the PGU output to the base value set by the SPG command. And the
DV command sets the PGU output to the output value specified by the DV
command. For example, the following HP BASIC command sets the PGU output to
0 V.
OUTPUT @Hp4156;"DV 27,0,0"
To stop the PGU dc voltage output, use the DV command.
Execution
Conditions
The SPG command specifies the settings of the PGU.
Syntax
SRP
Example
Statements
OUTPUT @Hp4156;"SRP"
1-224
Agilent 4155C/4156C GPIB Command Reference, Edition 6
4155C/4156C FLEX Commands
SSP
SSP
The SSP command controls the 16440A SMU/Pulse Generator Selector.
Syntax
SSP port,status
Parameters
port :
Output port number. 0, 1, 2 or 3. Integer expression.
port
status :
Description
0
Output channel 1 of the primary 16440A.
1
Output channel 2 of the primary 16440A.
2
Output channel 1 of the secondary 16440A.
3
Output channel 2 of the secondary 16440A.
Connection status of the specified port. 0, 1, 2 or 3. Integer expression.
status
Example
Statements
Description
0
No input is connected to output.
1
Connects SMU input to output.
2
Connects PGU input to output.
3
Disconnects PGU input using the semiconductor relay.
No input is connected to output.
OUTPUT @Hp4156;"SSP 0,0"
OUTPUT @Hp4156;"SSP 1,3"
Agilent 4155C/4156C GPIB Command Reference, Edition 6
1-225
4155C/4156C FLEX Commands
ST
ST
The ST command is used with the END command to store a program in the internal
program memory of the 4155C/4156C. Maximum 255 programs can be stored (total
100 KB). The ST command indicates the start of the program, and assigns the
program number. If the assigned program number already exists, the 4155C/4156C
deletes the old program, and stores the new one.
The END command indicates the end of the program. If the END command is not
included, the 4155C/4156C stores the commands until the program memory is full.
Use the DO or RU command to execute stored programs. Before executing the
internal memory program, close the Interlock circuit. If you do not close the
interlock circuit, an error occurred and the measurement is aborted.
Internal program memory is available when the 4155C/4156C is in the FLEX
command control mode. The internal memory programs are deleted by the US or
US42 command execution.
Syntax
ST prog No.;command[;command...[;command]...]
END
or
ST prog No.
[command]
[command]
:
:
[command]
END
Parameters
prog No. :
Program number. 1 to 255. Integer expression.
command :
Command stored in the internal program memory. Specify commands
according to normal syntax − no special syntax is necessary.
Note that the following commands cannot be stored in program memory:
AB
CA
DO
*IDN?
NUB?
RCV
SCR
*SRE?
*TST?
WNU?
Remarks
ACH
CLOSE
END
LOP?
OPEN
RD?
SDSK
*STB?
UNT?
WR
CM
ERR?
LST?
*OPC(?)
RMD?
SPL
:SYST:ERR?
US
*WAI
*CAL?
*ESE?
*LRN?
*OPT?
RU
SPR
*CLS?
PRN
*RST
ST
QSZ/QSZ?
US42
The internal memory program should be the complete program which makes the
measurement setup completely, or executes the measurements with no error.
1-226
Agilent 4155C/4156C GPIB Command Reference, Edition 6
4155C/4156C FLEX Commands
ST
If you use the internal program memory to make a few changes in the present
measurement setup, grasp the present setup, decide the next setup carefully, and
enter the FLEX commands into the program memory. If there is mismatch in the
changes with the present setup, you cannot execute the measurement in the desirable
setup because of no error check for the commands in the program memory.
Create a complete program at first. And confirm that the program does not cause any
error during the program execution. Then enter the FLEX commands into the
program memory. The commands must make the complete measurement setup, or
execute the measurements with no error, or make changes consistently with the
present setup.
Example
Statements
Example 1:
OUTPUT @Hp4156;"ST 1;CN 1;DV 1,0,5,1E-4;TI? 1,0;CL 1"
OUTPUT @Hp4156;"END"
Example 2:
OUTPUT
OUTPUT
OUTPUT
OUTPUT
OUTPUT
OUTPUT
@Hp4156;"ST 1"
@Hp4156;"CN 1"
@Hp4156;"DV 1,0,5,1E-4"
@Hp4156;"TI? 1,0"
@Hp4156;"CL 1"
@Hp4156;"END"
Agilent 4155C/4156C GPIB Command Reference, Edition 6
1-227
4155C/4156C FLEX Commands
*STB?
*STB?
The *STB? query command stores the decimal representation of the status byte in
the output data buffer (query buffer).
The output data is always stored in the query buffer in ASCII format, regardless of
the FMT command.
The *STB? command is functionally identical to the SPOLL command of BASIC,
however this command does not clear the status byte (the SPOLL command clears
the status byte).
Syntax
*STB?
Query Response
In US command mode: status byte<LF^EOI>
Decimal Value
1
2
4
8
16
32
64
128
Bit Number
Bit 0
Bit 1
Bit 2
Bit 3
Bit 4
Bit 5
Bit 6
Bit 7
Description
Emergency Status
Measurement/Stress Status
not used
Questionable Status
MAV (Message Available summary-message)
ESB (Event Status Bit)
Request Service (RQS) Message
not used
In US42 command mode: status byte<CR/LF^EOI>
Decimal Value
1
2
4
8
16
32
64
128
Bit Number
Bit 0
Bit 1
Bit 2
Bit 3
Bit 4
Bit 5
Bit 6
Bit 7
Description
Data Ready
Wait
not used
Interlock Open
Set Ready
Error
RQS
Shut Down
where, the status byte value is a decimal number that indicates which bits of the
status byte are ON ("1"). Bits of the status byte indicate conditions that may require
attention. For example, if status byte is 40 (8 + 32), then Bit 3 and 5 are set to 1.
Example
Statements
OUTPUT @Hp4156;"*STB?"
ENTER @Hp4156;A
1-228
Agilent 4155C/4156C GPIB Command Reference, Edition 6
4155C/4156C FLEX Commands
STC
STC
The STC command clears the settings of the specified stress source.
Syntax
STC [source[,source[,source[,source]]]]
Parameters
source :
Reference number of the stress source.
0 to 3 are available. Integer expression.
source value is the value (0, 1, 2 or 3) you assigned for the stress source
using the STI, STV or STP command. Enter the source value for the
stress source you want to clear the settings.
If you do not specify source parameter, STC command clears the
settings for the all stress sources (4 sources).
Example
Statements
OUTPUT @Hp4156;"STC"
OUTPUT @Hp4156;"STC 0"
Agilent 4155C/4156C GPIB Command Reference, Edition 6
1-229
4155C/4156C FLEX Commands
STG
STG
The STG command sets the trigger function using the Ext Trig In/Out terminals on
the rear panel of the 4155C/4156C.
Syntax
STG mode,state,polarity
Parameter
mode :
Trigger mode. 0 or 1. Integer expression.
0: Trigger input.
1: Trigger output.
In the trigger input mode, the 4155C/4156C waits for the edge trigger
from the external instrument, and cannot output the trigger.
When the trigger mode is set to the output mode, the 4155C/4156C
outputs gate triggers in the stress force state, and outputs edge triggers
in other measurement states. In this case, the 4155C/4156C cannot
receive the external trigger signal.
state :
Trigger function status. 0 or 1. Integer expression.
0: Disables trigger function. (initial setting)
1: Enables trigger function.
polarity :
Polarity of the trigger. 0 or 1. Integer expression.
0: Positive trigger. (initial setting)
1: Negative trigger.
Example
Statements
OUTPUT @Hp4156;"STG 0,1,0"
OUTPUT @Hp4156;"STG 1,1,0"
1-230
Agilent 4155C/4156C GPIB Command Reference, Edition 6
4155C/4156C FLEX Commands
STI
STI
The STI command specifies the dc stress current source (SMU) and its parameters.
The XE command triggers the stress force. To stop the stress force, use the AB
command.
The 4155C/4156C allows to use maximum four stress sources (specified by the STI,
STV and/or STP command) for a measurement.
Syntax
STI source,chnum,range,base,stress[,Vcomp]
If you enter the STI command into the program memory (see the ST command), do
not omit the Vcomp parameter. Vcomp is necessary when using the internal program
memory.
Parameters
source :
Reference number for the stress source. 0 to 3 are available. Integer
expression.
Enter 0, 1, 2, or 3 to assign the reference number to the stress source.
If you specify multiple stress sources for a measurement, independent
source value should be defined for the stress setup command (STI, STV
or STP). If a source value is defined for multiple stress setup
commands, the last command is effective when executing the
measurement.
chnum :
Channel number of the unit that will force the stress current. Integer
expression.
chnum
Unit
1
SMU1
2
SMU2
3
SMU3
4
SMU4
5a
SMU5
6a
SMU6
a. For MPSMUs in the 41501A/B Expander. For HPSMU,
channel number is 6, not 5.
Agilent 4155C/4156C GPIB Command Reference, Edition 6
1-231
4155C/4156C FLEX Commands
STI
range :
Stress output range. Integer expression.
Ranging Type a
range
0
Auto ranging
9 (only for 4156C)
10 pA limited auto ranging
10 (only for 4156C)
100 pA limited auto ranging
11
1 nA limited auto ranging
12
10 nA limited auto ranging
13
100 nA limited auto ranging
14
1 μA limited auto ranging
15
10 μA limited auto ranging
16
100 μA limited auto ranging
17
1 mA limited auto ranging
18
10 mA limited auto ranging
19
100 mA limited auto ranging
20 (only for HPSMU)
1 A limited auto ranging
a. Auto ranging uses the lowest output range (available for the
unit) that covers both base and stress value. Limited auto
ranging uses the specified range or above. For example, 10
μA limited auto ranging uses the 100 mA range to force
stress=50 mA with base=1 mA.
base :
Base current (in A). Numeric expression. See Table 1-24.
0 to ±100E−3 (for 4155C/4156C and MPSMU in 41501A/B)
0 to ±1 (for HPSMU in 41501A/B)
Set the source unit output values which has been forced before the XE
command. This minimizes the spike.
1-232
Agilent 4155C/4156C GPIB Command Reference, Edition 6
4155C/4156C FLEX Commands
STI
stress :
Stress current (in A). Numeric expression. See Table 1-24.
0 to ±100E−3 (for 4155C/4156C and MPSMU in 41501A/B)
0 to ±1 (for HPSMU in 41501A/B)
Vcomp :
Voltage compliance (in V). Numeric expression. See Table 1-24.
If you do not specify this parameter, Vcomp is set to the previous
setting.
The voltage compliance polarity is automatically set to the same value
as the polarity of stress and base, regardless of the specified Vcomp. If
stress=0 and base=0, the polarity of the voltage compliance is positive.
Table 1-24
Available Parameter Values for STI Command
Output
Range
Resolution
in A a
base and
stress in A
Maximum
Vcomp in V
Remarks
10 pA
10E−15
0 to ±10E−12
±100
100 pA
10E−15
0 to ±100E−12
±100
1 nA
100E−15
0 to ±1E−9
±100
For SMU.
±200
For HPSMU.
±100
For SMU.
±200
For HPSMU.
±100
For SMU.
±200
For HPSMU.
±100
For SMU.
±200
For HPSMU.
±100
For SMU.
±200
For HPSMU.
±100
For SMU.
±200
For HPSMU.
10 nA
100 nA
1 μA
10 μA
100 μA
1E−12
10E−12
100E−12
1E−9
10E−9
0 to ±10E−9
0 to ±100E−9
0 to ±1E−6
0 to ±10E−6
0 to ±100E−6
For 4156C.
Agilent 4155C/4156C GPIB Command Reference, Edition 6
1-233
4155C/4156C FLEX Commands
STI
Output
Range
1 mA
10 mA
100 mA
Resolution
in A a
100E−9
1E−6
10E−6
100E−6
1A
100E−6
base and
stress in A
0 to ±1E−3
Maximum
Vcomp in V
Remarks
±100
For SMU.
±200
For HPSMU.
±100
For SMU.
±200
For HPSMU.
0 to ±20E−3
±100
For SMU.
to ±50E−3
±40
to ±100E−3
±20
0 to ±50E−3
±200
to ±100E−3
±100
0 to ±50E−3
±200
to ±125E−3
±100
to ±500E−3
±40
to ±1
±20
0 to ±10E−3
For HPSMU
a. Minimum resolution is Range×5E−5. However the setting accuracy is
not guaranteed for the resolution less than the value shown in the table.
Example
Statements
OUTPUT @Hp4156;"STI 0,1,14,0,5E-7,10"
1-234
Agilent 4155C/4156C GPIB Command Reference, Edition 6
4155C/4156C FLEX Commands
STM
STM
The STM command sets the automatic abort condition (stop condition) for the stress
force.
The automatic abort function of the stress force is available for the free run stress
mode and for the pulse count stress mode (more than 10 sec). Refer to the STT
command.
Syntax
STM abort
Parameters
abort :
Automatic abort condition (stop condition). Integer expression. The
following values are available:
abort
Abort condition
1
Disables the automatic abort function.
2
One of following occurs.
- Compliance on the non-measurement unit.
- Oscillation on any unit.
Example
Statements
4
Compliance on the non-measurement unit.
32
Oscillation on any unit.
OUTPUT @Hp4156;"STM 32"
Agilent 4155C/4156C GPIB Command Reference, Edition 6
1-235
4155C/4156C FLEX Commands
STP
STP
The STP command sets the PGU for the dc voltage stress output or pulse stress
output. The XE command triggers the stress force. To stop the stress force, use the
AB command.
The 4155C/4156C allows to use maximum four stress sources (specified by the STI,
STV and/or STP command) for a measurement.
Syntax
STP source,chnum,mode,base,stress[,Td[,Tw[,Tl[,Tt]]]]
Parameters
source :
Reference number for the stress source. 0 to 3 are available. Integer
expression.
Enter 0, 1, 2, or 3 to assign the reference number to the stress source.
If you specify multiple stress sources for a measurement, independent
source value should be defined for the stress setup command (STI, STV
or STP). If a source value is defined for multiple stress setup
commands, the last command is effective when executing the
measurement.
chnum :
Channel number of PGU 27 or 28. Integer expression.
27: PGU1
28: PGU2
mode :
Output mode. 0 or 1. Integer expression.
0: dc voltage output
1: pulse voltage output
base :
Base voltage (in V).
0 to ±40 V. Numeric expression.
Resolution: 4 mV (for 0 to ±20 V), 8 mV (for ±20 to ±40 V).
stress :
Stress voltage (in V).
0 to ±40V. Numeric expression.
Resolution: 4 mV (for 0 to ±20 V), 8 mV (for ±20 to ±40 V).
1-236
Agilent 4155C/4156C GPIB Command Reference, Edition 6
4155C/4156C FLEX Commands
STP
Delay time (in seconds). Only for pulse stress.
Td :
0 to 10 sec. Numeric expression. See Table 1-25.
Restrictions: Td < period of STT command
Tw :
Pulse width (in seconds). Only for pulse stress.
1 μsec to 9.99 sec. Numeric expression. See Table 1-25.
Restrictions: Tw < period of STT command
Leading edge transition time (in seconds). Only for pulse stress.
Tl :
100 nsec to 10 msec. Numeric expression. See Table 1-26.
Restrictions: Tl < Tw × 0.8
Trailing edge transition time (in seconds). Only for pulse stress.
Tt :
100 nsec to 10 msec. Numeric expression. See Table 1-26.
Restrictions: Tt < (period − Tw) × 0.8
where period is a parameter of STT command.
Table 1-25
Ranges of Delay Time and Pulse Width
Range
a
period b in sec
Tw in sec
Td in sec
Resolution
in sec
1
2E−6 to 100E−6
1E−6 to 99.9E−6
0 to 100E−6
0.1E−6
2
100E−6 to 1E−3
1E−6 to 999E−6
0 to 1E−3
1E−6
3
1E−3 to 10E−3
10E−6 to 9.99E−3
0 to 10E−3
10E−6
4
10E−3 to 100E−3
100E−6 to 99.9E−3
0 to 100E−3
100E−6
5
100E−3 to 1
1E−3 to 999E−3
0 to 1
1E−3
6
1 to 10
10E−3 to 9.99
0 to 10
10E−3
a. Settings of period, Tw and Td for a PGU must be in the same range. If
you use two PGUs, these three parameters must be set in the same range
for both PGUs.
b. This parameter is a STT command parameter.
Agilent 4155C/4156C GPIB Command Reference, Edition 6
1-237
4155C/4156C FLEX Commands
STP
Table 1-26
Leading and Trailing Edge Transition Time
Range a
Tl or Tt in sec
Resolution in sec
1
100E−9 to 1E−6
1E−9
2
500E−9 to 10E−6
10E−9
3
5E−6 to 100E−6
100E−9
4
50E−6 to 1E−3
1E−6
5
500E−6 to 10E−3
10E−6
a. Leading time and trailing time for a PGU must be in the same range.
Example
Statements
OUTPUT @Hp4156;"STP 0,28,0,0,5"
OUTPUT @Hp4156;"STP 0,28,1,0,5,1E-3,1E-3,1E-4,1E-4"
1-238
Agilent 4155C/4156C GPIB Command Reference, Edition 6
4155C/4156C FLEX Commands
STT
STT
The STT command sets the stress time and stress mode.
Syntax
STT hold,mode[,count[,period]]
Parameters
hold :
Hold time (in seconds).
0 to 655.35 sec. Numeric expression.
mode :
Stress mode.
0, 1 or 2. Integer expression. See Table 1-27.
If you use only the dc stress source, set mode to 0 or 2. mode=1 is not
available for the dc stress. Do not set count and period.
If you enter the STT command into the internal program memory, do
not set mode=0. Free run pulse output is not available.
count :
Stress time or pulse count. Numeric expression. See Table 1-27.
period :
Pulse period (in seconds). Only for pulse stress.
2E−6 to 10 sec. Numeric expression.
This value must match the STP command Td and Tw parameters. See
Table 1-25 of the STP command. Initial setting: 10 msec
If this parameter is not specified, period is set to the previous value or
the initial setting value.
If you use the automatic abort function in the pulse count mode, pulse
output must be more than 10 seconds. (count × period > 10 sec)
Agilent 4155C/4156C GPIB Command Reference, Edition 6
1-239
4155C/4156C FLEX Commands
STT
Table 1-27
Available mode and count value
mode
0
Description
Free run mode.
Continues stress output. Not
available for the program
memory.
1
Pulse count mode.
Forces pulse stress until the
number of pulses reaches the
total pulse count specified by
count. Available for the stress by
the STP command.
2
Duration mode.
Forces stress until the stress force
time reaches the total stress time
specified by count. Automatic
abort function is not available in
this mode.
NOTE
count
The value is ignored, but a
number must be entered for pulse
stress setup.
Specifies the total pulse count. 1
to 65535.
Specifies the total stress time.
500E−6 to 655 sec.
Pulse Count and Pulse Period
Pulse count and pulse period settings are effective for both PGU1 and PGU2. If you
use a PGU as a stress source, and another PGU as a pulse source (controlled by the
SPG/SRP/SPP commands), check the settings of the SPG command in your
program. The settings of each commands must be the same value.
Example
Statements
OUTPUT @Hp4156;"STT 1,0,100"
OUTPUT @Hp4156;"STT 1,1,100"
OUTPUT @Hp4156;"STT 1,2,100,0.1"
1-240
Agilent 4155C/4156C GPIB Command Reference, Edition 6
4155C/4156C FLEX Commands
STV
STV
The STV command specifies the dc stress voltage source (SMU or VSU) and its
parameters. The XE command triggers the stress force. To stop the stress force, use
the AB command.
The 4155C/4156C allows to use maximum four stress sources (specified by the STI,
STV and/or STP command) for a measurement.
Syntax
STV source,chnum,range,base,stress[,Icomp]
If you enter the STV command into the program memory (see the ST command), do
not omit the Icomp parameter. Icomp is necessary when using the internal program
memory.
Parameters
source :
Reference number for the stress source. 0 to 3 are available. Integer
expression.
Enter 0, 1, 2, or 3 to assign the reference number to the stress source.
If you specify multiple stress sources for a measurement, independent
source value should be defined for the stress setup command (STI, STV
or STP). If a source value is defined for multiple stress setup
commands, the last command is effective when executing the
measurement.
chnum :
Channel number of the unit that will force the stress voltage. Integer
expression.
chnum
Unit
chnum
Unit
1
SMU1
5a
SMU5
2
SMU2
6a
SMU6
3
SMU3
21
VSU1
4
SMU4
22
VSU2
a. For MPSMUs in the 41501A/B Expander. For HPSMU,
channel number is 6, not 5.
Agilent 4155C/4156C GPIB Command Reference, Edition 6
1-241
4155C/4156C FLEX Commands
STV
range :
Stress output range. Integer expression.
Ranging Type a
range
0
Auto ranging
11 (for SMU)
2 V limited auto ranging
12
20 V limited auto ranging
13 (for SMU)
40 V limited auto ranging
14 (for SMU)
100 V limited auto ranging
15 (only for HPSMU)
200 V limited auto ranging
a. Auto ranging uses the lowest output range (available for
the unit) that covers both base and stress value. Limited
auto ranging uses the specified range or above. For example, 20 V limited auto ranging uses the 100 V range to
force stress=50 V with base=0 V.
base :
Base voltage (in V). Numeric expression. See Table 1-28.
0 to ±100 (for 4155C/4156C and MPSMU in 41501A/B)
0 to ±200 (for HPSMU in 41501A/B)
0 to ±20 (for VSU)
stress :
Stress current (in V). Numeric expression. See Table 1-28.
0 to ±100 (for 4155C/4156C and MPSMU in 41501A/B)
0 to ±200 (for HPSMU in 41501A/B)
0 to ±20 (for VSU)
Icomp :
Current compliance (in A). Numeric expression. See Table 1-28.
If this parameter is not specified, Icomp is set to the previous setting.
0 A is not allowed for Icomp.
The current compliance polarity is automatically set to the same
polarity as the stress and base values, regardless of the specified Icomp.
If stress=0 and base=0, the polarity of the current compliance is
positive.
1-242
Agilent 4155C/4156C GPIB Command Reference, Edition 6
4155C/4156C FLEX Commands
STV
Table 1-28
Available Parameter Values for STV Command
Output
Range
2V
20 V
40 V
100 V
200 V
Example
Statements
Resolution
in V
100E−6
1E−3
2E−3
5E−3
10E−3
base and
stress in V
0 to ±2
0 to ±20
0 to ±40
0 to ±100
0 to ±200
Maximum
Icomp in A
Remarks
±100E−3
For SMU.
±1
For HPSMU.
±100E−3
For SMU.
±1
For HPSMU.
−
For VSU.
±50E−3
For SMU.
±500E−3
For HPSMU.
±20E−3
For SMU.
±125E−3
For HPSMU.
±50E−3
OUTPUT @Hp4156;"STV 0,1,12,0,5,1E-2"
Agilent 4155C/4156C GPIB Command Reference, Edition 6
1-243
4155C/4156C FLEX Commands
:SYST:ERR?
:SYST:ERR?
This query command returns an error code from the 4155C/4156C error register,
and the error message. An error code and error message pair is returned, and the
error code is deleted from the error register.
The output data is always stored in the query buffer in ASCII format, regardless of
the FMT command.
Syntax
:SYST:ERR?
Query Response
In US command mode:
error_code,message<LF^EOI>
In US42 command mode:
error_code,message<CR/LF^EOI>
Example
Statements
OUTPUT @Hp4156;":SYST:ERR?"
ENTER @Hp4156;A,A$
1-244
Agilent 4155C/4156C GPIB Command Reference, Edition 6
4155C/4156C FLEX Commands
TDI
TDI
The TDI command forces the current using the specified unit, and returns the time
stamp, which is the time that has elapsed between the execution of the TSR
command and the execution of this command. This command is only for the US
control mode.
Execution
Conditions
The CN command has been executed for the specified unit. If the voltage
compliance is greater than ±40 V, the interlock circuit must be shorted.
Syntax
TDI chnum,range,current[,Vcomp[,comp polarity]]
If you send the TDI command to the program memory (see the ST command), do
not omit the Vcomp parameter. Vcomp is necessary when using the internal program
memory.
Parameters
chnum:
Channel number of the unit used to force the current. Integer
expression.
chnum
Unit
1
SMU1
2
SMU2
3
SMU3
4
SMU4
5a
SMU5 (MPSMU)
6a
SMU6 (MPSMU or HPSMU)
a. For SMUs in the 41501A/B Expander.
range:
Ranging type for the current output. Integer expression.
range
Ranging Type a
0
Auto ranging
9 (only for 4156C)
10 pA limited auto ranging
10 (only for 4156C)
100 pA limited auto ranging
Agilent 4155C/4156C GPIB Command Reference, Edition 6
1-245
4155C/4156C FLEX Commands
TDI
Ranging Type a
range
11
1 nA limited auto ranging
12
10 nA limited auto ranging
13
100 nA limited auto ranging
14
1 μA limited auto ranging
15
10 μA limited auto ranging
16
100 μA limited auto ranging
17
1 mA limited auto ranging
18
10 mA limited auto ranging
19
100 mA limited auto ranging
20 (only for HPSMU)
1 A limited auto ranging
a. Auto ranging uses the lowest output range that covers the
current value. Limited auto ranging uses the specified
range or above. For example, 10 μA limited auto ranging
uses the 10 μA range to force 1 nA.
current:
Output current value (in A). Numeric expression.
0 to ±100E–3 (for the 4155C/4156C and MPSMU in the 41501A/B)
0 to ±1 (for HPSMU in the 41501A/B)
For the relation between the current value and the output range, and for
the resolution of the current value, see Table 1-29.
Vcomp:
Voltage compliance value (in V). Numeric expression. For available
values, see Table 1-29.
If you do not specify this parameter, Vcomp remains at its previous
value. Voltage compliance range changing may cause 0 V output in a
moment.
1-246
Agilent 4155C/4156C GPIB Command Reference, Edition 6
4155C/4156C FLEX Commands
TDI
comp
polarity:
Polarity of voltage compliance. Numeric expression.
0: Auto mode. Default.
The polarity of the voltage compliance is automatically set to the
same value as the polarity of the output current (current),
regardless of the polarity of the Vcomp value. If the output current
is 0 A, the polarity is positive.
1: Manual mode.
This parameter must be specified if you want the polarity of the
voltage compliance to be set the same as the specified polarity of
Vcomp.
Response
time <terminator>
Where time is the time that has elapsed between the execution of the TSR command
and the execution of this command.
<terminator> depends on the FMT command setting.
Example
Statements
OUTPUT @Hp4156;"TDI 1,0,1E-6,100,1"
ENTER @Hp4156;Time
Agilent 4155C/4156C GPIB Command Reference, Edition 6
1-247
4155C/4156C FLEX Commands
TDI
Table 1-29
Available Parameter Values for TDI Command
Output
Range
Resolution
in A a
current in A
Maximum
Vcomp in V
Remarks
10 pA
10E–15
0 to ±10E–12
±100
100 pA
10E–15
0 to ±100E–12
±100
1 nA
100E–15
0 to ±1E–9
±100
For SMU.
±200
For HPSMU.
10 nA
100 nA
1 μA
10 μA
100 μA
1 mA
10 mA
100 mA
1E–12
10E–12
100E–12
1E–9
10E–9
100E–9
1E–6
10E–6
100E–6
1A
100E–6
0 to ±10E–9
0 to ±100E–9
0 to ±1E–6
0 to ±10E–6
0 to ±100E–6
For 4156C.
±100
For SMU.
±200
For HPSMU.
±100
For SMU.
±200
For HPSMU.
±100
For SMU.
±200
For HPSMU.
±100
For SMU.
±200
For HPSMU.
±100
For SMU.
±200
For HPSMU.
±100
For SMU.
±200
For HPSMU.
±100
For SMU.
±200
For HPSMU.
0 to ±20E–3
±100
For SMU.
to ±50E–3
±40
0 to ±1E–3
0 to ±10E–3
to ±100E–3
±20
0 to ±50E–3
±200
to ±100E–3
±100
0 to ±50E–3
±200
to ±125E–3
±100
to ±500E–3
±40
to ±1
±20
For HPSMU.
a. Minimum resolution is Range×5E−5. However the setting accuracy is
not guaranteed for the resolution less than the value shown in the table.
1-248
Agilent 4155C/4156C GPIB Command Reference, Edition 6
4155C/4156C FLEX Commands
TDV
TDV
The TDV command forces the output voltage using the specified unit, and returns
the time stamp, which is the time that has elapsed between the execution of the TSR
command and the execution of this command. This command is only for the US
control mode.
Execution
Conditions
The CN command has been executed for the specified unit. If the output voltage is
greater than ±40 V, the interlock circuit must be shorted.
Syntax
TDV chnum,range,voltage[,Icomp[,comp polarity]]
If you send the TDV command to the program memory (see the ST command), do
not omit the Icomp parameter. Icomp is necessary when using the internal program
memory.
Parameters
chnum:
Channel number of the unit used to force voltage. Integer expression.
chnum
Unit
1
SMU1
2
SMU2
3
SMU3
4
SMU4
5a
SMU5 (MPSMU)
6a
SMU6 (MPSMU or HPSMU)
21
VSU1
22
VSU2
27
PGU1 b
28
PGU2 b
a. For SMUs in the 41501A/B Expander.
b. If you use the PGU, execute the SPG command before the
TDV command.
Agilent 4155C/4156C GPIB Command Reference, Edition 6
1-249
4155C/4156C FLEX Commands
TDV
range:
Ranging type for voltage output. Integer expression. Range changing
may cause 0 V output in a moment.
Ranging Type a
range
0
Auto ranging
11 (for SMU)
2 V limited auto ranging
12
20 V limited auto ranging
13 (for SMU and PGU)
40 V limited auto ranging
14 (for SMU)
100 V limited auto ranging
15 (only for HPSMU)
200 V limited auto ranging
a. Auto ranging uses the lowest output range that covers the
voltage value. Limited auto ranging uses the specified
range or above. For example, 20 V limited auto ranging
uses the 20 V range to force 1 V.
voltage:
Output voltage value (in V). Numeric expression.
0 to ±100 (for 4155C/4156C and MPSMU in 41501A/B)
0 to ±200 (for HPSMU in 41501A/B)
0 to ±20 (for VSU)
0 to ±40 (for PGU)
For the relation between the voltage and the output range and for the
resolution of the voltage value, see Table 1-30.
Icomp:
Current compliance value (in A). Numeric expression. If you do not
specify this parameter, Icomp remains at its previous value. Zero amps
(0 A) is not allowed for Icomp. This parameter is not available for the
VSU and PGU.
For available values, see Table 1-30.
comp
polarity:
Polarity of the current compliance. Integer expression. This parameter
is not available for the VSU and PGU.
0 (auto mode) or 1 (manual mode).
1-250
Agilent 4155C/4156C GPIB Command Reference, Edition 6
4155C/4156C FLEX Commands
TDV
0: Auto mode. Default.
The polarity of the current compliance is automatically set to the
same value as the polarity of the output voltage (voltage),
regardless of the polarity of the Icomp value. If the output voltage
is 0 V, the polarity is positive.
1: Manual mode.
This parameter must be specified if you want the polarity of the
current compliance to be set to the same value as the polarity of the
specified Icomp.
Table 1-30
Available Parameter Values for TDV Command
Output
Range
2V
20 V
Resolution
in V
100E–6
1E–3
voltage in V
0 to ±2
0 to ±20
4E–3
40 V
2E–3
0 to ±40
8E–3
100 V
200 V
Response
5E–3
10E–3
0 to ±100
0 to ±200
Maximum
Icomp in A
Remarks
±100E–3
For SMU.
±1
For HPSMU.
±100E–3
For SMU.
±1
For HPSMU.
−
For VSU.
−
For PGU.
±50E–3
For SMU.
±500E–3
For HPSMU.
−
For PGU.
±20E–3
For SMU.
±125E–3
For HPSMU.
±50E–3
time <terminator>
Where time is the time that has elapsed between the execution of the TSR command
and the execution of this command.
<terminator> depends on the FMT command setting.
Example
Statements
OUTPUT @Hp4156;"TDV 1,0,20,1E-6,0"
ENTER @Hp4156;Time
Agilent 4155C/4156C GPIB Command Reference, Edition 6
1-251
4155C/4156C FLEX Commands
TI/TI?
TI/TI?
The TI and TI? commands are the trigger command for high-speed spot current
measurement. The commands perform a high-speed spot current measurement,
independent of the SMU source mode, trigger mode (TM command), and
measurement mode (MM command).
Difference between the TI command and the TI? command is the way to read the
measurement data as shown in the Example Statements. If you use the TI?
command, you do not need to enter the RMD? command.
For the output data format, refer to “Data Output Format” on page 1-11.
The TI command cannot be used with the TI?, TV?, TTI?, or TTV? command in a
same measurement program. Also the TI? command cannot be used with the TI, TV,
TTI, or TTV command in a same measurement program.
Execution
Conditions
CN command has been executed for the specified unit.
Syntax
TI chnum[,range]
TI? chnum[,range]
If you enter the TI/TI? command into the program memory (see the ST command),
do not omit the range parameter. range is necessary when using the internal
program memory.
Parameters
chnum :
Channel number of the unit used to measure current. Integer
expression.
chnum
Unit
1
SMU1
2
SMU2
3
SMU3
4
SMU4
5a
SMU5
6a
SMU6
a. For MPSMUs in the 41501A/B Expander. For HPSMU,
channel number is 6, not 5.
1-252
Agilent 4155C/4156C GPIB Command Reference, Edition 6
4155C/4156C FLEX Commands
TI/TI?
range :
Ranging type for current measurement. 0, 9 to 20, and −9 to −20 are
available. Integer expression. See table below.
For SMU set to the current source, the input range value is ignored, and
the SMU measures the current using the current output range.
If you do not specify range, measurement range is automatically set to
the compliance range for voltage force SMU, and set to the current
output range for current force SMU.
Ranging type a
range
range
Ranging type a
0
Auto ranging
9b
10 pA limited auto ranging
−9 b
10 pA range fixed
10 b
100 pA limited auto ranging
−10 b
100 pA range fixed
11
1 nA limited auto ranging
−11
1 nA range fixed
12
10 nA limited auto ranging
−12
10 nA range fixed
13
100 nA limited auto ranging
−13
100 nA range fixed
14
1 μA limited auto ranging
−14
1 μA range fixed
15
10 μA limited auto ranging
−15
10 μA range fixed
16
100 μA limited auto ranging
−16
100 μA range fixed
17
1 mA limited auto ranging
−17
1 mA range fixed
18
10 mA limited auto ranging
−18
10 mA range fixed
100 mA limited auto ranging
−19
19
20
b
1 A limited auto ranging
−20
100 mA range fixed
b
1 A range fixed
a. Auto ranging uses the lowest measurement range (available for the unit)
that covers the measurement value. Limited auto ranging uses the specified range or above. For example, 10 μA limited auto ranging uses the
10 μA range to measure 1 nA, and uses the 100 mA range to measure 50
mA.
b. 9, 10, −9, and −10 are only for 4156C. 20 and −20 are only for HPSMU.
Example
Statements
For TI command:
OUTPUT @Hp4156;"TI 1,0"
OUTPUT @Hp4156;"RMD?"
ENTER @Hp4156;A
For TI? command:
OUTPUT @Hp4156;"TI? 1,0"
ENTER @Hp4156;A
Agilent 4155C/4156C GPIB Command Reference, Edition 6
1-253
4155C/4156C FLEX Commands
TM
TM
The TM command specifies how events are effective for the following actions:
•
Releasing the 4155C/4156C from the paused status set by the PA command
•
Starting the measurement except for high speed spot measurement (when the
4155C/4156C is not in the wait status set by the PA or WS command)
Syntax
TM mode
Parameters
mode :
Trigger mode. 1 to 4 are available. Integer expression. See below. The
mode value is initially set to 1.
mode
Events effective for trigger
1
XE command and GPIB GET (Group Execute Trigger,
trigger command in HP BASIC)
2
XE command
3
XE command and external trigger (signal via the Ext Trig
In terminal)
4
XE command and MM command (automatic trigger after
the MM command execution)
Remarks
If mode=3 and if the 4155C/4156C is not in the wait status set by the PA or WS
command, the 4155C/4156C can start the measurement by an external trigger from a
trigger input terminal. After the measurement, the 4155C/4156C sends a trigger to
the Ext Trig Out terminal.
Example
Statements
OUTPUT @Hp4156;"TM 1"
OUTPUT @Hp4156;"TM 3"
1-254
Agilent 4155C/4156C GPIB Command Reference, Edition 6
4155C/4156C FLEX Commands
TSC
TSC
The TSC command enables or disables the time stamp function. This command is
only for the US control mode.
Execution
Conditions
The TSC command is effective in the following measurement modes:
•
Spot measurement (MM 1)
•
Staircase sweep measurement (MM 2)
•
1-channel pulsed spot measurement (MM 3)
•
Pulsed sweep measurement (MM 4)
•
Staircase sweep with pulsed bias measurement (MM 5)
•
Sampling measurement (MM 10)
The initial interval must be 2 msec or more.
Syntax
TSC mode
Parameters
mode :
Time stamp function mode. Integer expression.
mode
Description
0
Disables the time stamp function. Default setting.
1
Enables the time stamp function.
When the function is enabled, the 4155C/4156C returns the time stamp
with the measurement data. The time stamp is the time that has elapsed
between the execution of the TSR command and the start of the
measurement. Refer to “Data Output Format” on page 1-11.
Example
Statements
OUTPUT @Hp4156;"TSC 1"
Agilent 4155C/4156C GPIB Command Reference, Edition 6
1-255
4155C/4156C FLEX Commands
TSQ?
TSQ?
The TSQ? command returns the time stamp which is the time that has elapsed
between the execution of the TSR command and the execution of this command.
This command is only for the US control mode.
This command is effective for all measurement modes, regardless of the TSC
setting.
Syntax
TSQ?
Query Response
time <terminator>
The time is the time that has elapsed between the execution of the TSR command
and the execution of this command.
<terminator> depends on the FMT command setting.
Example
Statements
OUTPUT @Hp4156;"TSQ?"
ENTER @Hp4156 USING "#,5X,13D,X";Dtime
1-256
Agilent 4155C/4156C GPIB Command Reference, Edition 6
4155C/4156C FLEX Commands
TSR
TSR
The TSR command resets the time stamp to zero. This command is only for the US
control mode.
This command is effective for all measurement modes, regardless of the TSC
setting.
Syntax
TSR
Example
Statements
OUTPUT @Hp4156;"TSR"
Agilent 4155C/4156C GPIB Command Reference, Edition 6
1-257
4155C/4156C FLEX Commands
*TST?
*TST?
The *TST? query command starts the 4155C/4156C self-test, and stores the results
in the output data buffer (query buffer).
The output data is always stored in the query buffer in ASCII format, regardless of
the FMT command.
When you execute the TST? command, the output switches of the specified units are
set to OFF (the same conditions as after the CL command execution). The *TST?
command also performs self-calibration.
If the 4155C/4156C fails self-test, contact the nearest Agilent Technologies Sales
and Service Office. Units that fail self-test are disabled, except for the *TST?
command, and can only be enabled by the RCV command.
Syntax
*TST? [test slot]
Parameters
test slot :
Slot number. 0 to 9 are available. Integer expression. If you do not
specify this parameter, the test slot value is set to 0.
test slot
Unit tested
0
All units and mainframe
1
SMU1
2
SMU2
3
SMU3
4
SMU4
5a
SMU5
6a
SMU6
7b
VSU1, VSU2, VMU1 and VMU2
8c
PGU1 and PGU2
9
GNDU
a. For SMUs in the 41501A/B Expander. If HPSMU is
installed in the 41501A/B, set test slot of HPSMU to 6, do
not set to 5.
b. All VSU1, VSU2, VMU1, and VMU2 are tested.
c. Both PGU1 and PGU2 are tested.
1-258
Agilent 4155C/4156C GPIB Command Reference, Edition 6
4155C/4156C FLEX Commands
*TST?
Query Response
In US command mode:
results<LF^EOI>
In US42 command mode:
results<CR/LF^EOI>
results
results has the meanings shown in the table below. If multiple failures
are detected, the returned results value is equal to the sum of the results
values corresponding to the failures.
results
Remarks
Description / Failures
0
Passed. No failure detected.
1
SMU1 failed.
2
SMU2 failed.
4
SMU3 failed.
8
SMU4 failed.
16
SMU5 failed.
32
SMU6 failed.
64
VSU/VMU failed.
128
PGU failed.
256
Mainframe failed.
512
GNDU failed.
1024
Not applicable.
If the self-test execution is aborted, fatal error occurred, or 41501A/B expander is
not turned on, the *TST? command returns 256 (Mainframe failed).
If test slot specifies the slot number that does not have a measurement unit, the
*TST? command returns 0 (Passed. No error.).
Example
Statements
OUTPUT @Hp4156;"*TST?"
ENTER @Hp4156;A
Agilent 4155C/4156C GPIB Command Reference, Edition 6
1-259
4155C/4156C FLEX Commands
TTI/TTI?
TTI/TTI?
The TTI and TTI? commands are the trigger commands for high-speed spot current
measurements. The commands perform a high-speed spot current measurement,
independent of the SMU source mode, trigger mode (TM command), and
measurement mode (MM command). This command also returns the time stamp
which is the time that has elapsed between the execution of the TSR command and
the execution of this command.
The TTI command and the TTI? command display the measurement data
differently, as shown in the example statements. If you use the TTI? command, you
do not need to enter the RMD? command.
For the output data format, refer to “Data Output Format” on page 1-11.
The TTI command cannot be used in a measurement program with the TI?, TV?,
TTI?, or TTV? commands. The TTI? command cannot be used in a measurement
program with the TI, TV, TTI, or TTV commands.
This command is only for the US control mode.
Execution
Conditions
The CN command has been executed for the specified unit.
Syntax
TTI chnum[,range]
TTI? chnum[,range]
If you send the TTI/TTI? command to the program memory (see the ST command),
do not omit the range parameter. The range parameter is necessary when using the
internal program memory.
Parameters
chnum :
Channel number of the unit used to measure current. Integer
expression.
chnum
Unit
1
SMU1
2
SMU2
3
SMU3
4
SMU4
5
a
6a
SMU5 (MPSMU)
SMU6 (MPSMU or HPSMU)
a. For SMUs in the 41501A/B Expander.
1-260
Agilent 4155C/4156C GPIB Command Reference, Edition 6
4155C/4156C FLEX Commands
TTI/TTI?
range :
Ranging type for the current measurement. Ranges from 0, 9 to 20, and
−9 to −20 are available. Integer expression. See the table below.
If the unit specified by the chnum parameter is set to the current source,
this parameter value is ignored, and the unit uses the current output
range to measure current.
If you do not specify a range, it is automatically set to the compliance
range for the voltage force SMU, and set to the current output range for
current force SMU.
range
Ranging type a
range
Ranging type a
0
Auto ranging
9b
10 pA limited auto ranging
–9 b
10 pA range fixed
10 b
100 pA limited auto ranging
–10 b
100 pA range fixed
11
1 nA limited auto ranging
–11
1 nA range fixed
12
10 nA limited auto ranging
–12
10 nA range fixed
13
100 nA limited auto ranging
–13
100 nA range fixed
14
1 μA limited auto ranging
–14
1 μA range fixed
15
10 μA limited auto ranging
–15
10 μA range fixed
16
100 μA limited auto ranging
–16
100 μA range fixed
17
1 mA limited auto ranging
–17
1 mA range fixed
18
10 mA limited auto ranging
–18
10 mA range fixed
19
100 mA limited auto ranging
–19
100 mA range fixed
20 b
1 A limited auto ranging
–20 b
1 A range fixed
a. Auto ranging uses the lowest available measurement range that covers
the measurement value. Limited auto ranging uses the specified range or
above. For example, 10 μA limited auto ranging uses the 10 μA range to
measure 1 nA, and uses the 100 mA range to measure 50 mA.
b. 9, 10, −9, and −10 are only for 4156C. 20 and −20 are only for HPSMU.
Agilent 4155C/4156C GPIB Command Reference, Edition 6
1-261
4155C/4156C FLEX Commands
TTI/TTI?
Response
time, data <terminator>
time: the time that has elapsed between the execution of the TSR command and the
start of the measurement.
data: current measurement data
<terminator> depends on the FMT command setting.
Example
Statements
For TTI command:
OUTPUT @Hp4156;"TTI 1,0"
OUTPUT @Hp4156;"RMD? 2"
ENTER @Hp4156;Time,A
For TTI? command:
OUTPUT @Hp4156;"TTI? 1,0"
ENTER @Hp4156;Time,A
1-262
Agilent 4155C/4156C GPIB Command Reference, Edition 6
4155C/4156C FLEX Commands
TTV/TTV?
TTV/TTV?
The TTV and TTV? commands are the trigger commands for the high-speed spot
voltage measurements. The commands perform a voltage measurement,
independent of the SMU source mode, trigger mode (TM command), and
measurement mode (MM command). This command also returns the time stamp
which is the time that has elapsed between the execution of the TSR command and
the execution of this command.
The TTV command and the TTV? command display the measurement data
differently, as shown in the example statements. If you use the TTV? command, you
do not need to enter the RMD? command.
For the data output format, refer to “Data Output Format” on page 1-11.
The TTV command cannot be used in a measurement program with the TI?, TV?,
TTI?, or TTV? command. The TTV? command cannot be used in a measurement
program with the TI, TV, TTI, or TTV command.
This command is only for the US control mode.
Execution
Conditions
CN command has been executed for the specified unit.
Syntax
TTV chnum[,range]
TTV? chnum[,range]
If you send the TTV/TTV? command to the program memory (see the ST
command), do not omit the range parameter. The range parameter is necessary
when using the internal program memory.
Parameters
chnum :
Channel number of the unit used to measure voltage. Integer
expression.
chnum
Unit
chnum
Unit
1
SMU1
5a
SMU5
2
SMU2
6a
SMU6
3
SMU3
21
VSU1
4
SMU4
22
VSU2
a. For MPSMUs in the 41501A/B Expander. For HPSMU,
channel number is 6, not 5.
Agilent 4155C/4156C GPIB Command Reference, Edition 6
1-263
4155C/4156C FLEX Commands
TTV/TTV?
range :
Ranging type for voltage measurement. The ranges 0, 10 to 15, and −10
to −15 are available. Integer expression.
If you do not specify this parameter, the range is set to 0.
range
Ranging type a
range
Ranging type a
0
Auto ranging
10 b
0.2 V limited auto ranging
–10 b
0.2 V range fixed
11
2 V limited auto ranging
–11
2 V range fixed
12 c
20 V limited auto ranging
–12 c
20 V range fixed
13 d
40 V limited auto ranging
–13 d
40 V range fixed
14 d
100 V limited auto ranging
–14 d
100 V range fixed
15 e
200 V limited auto ranging
–15 e
200 V range fixed
a. Auto ranging uses the lowest available measurement range that covers
the measurement value. Limited auto ranging uses the specified range or
above. For example, 2 V limited auto ranging uses the 2 V range to measure 0.1 V, and uses the 20 V range to measure 10 V.
b. 10 and −10 are available only for VMU in the differential mode.
c. 12 and −12 are available for VMU in the grounded mode, and SMU
d. 13, 14, −13, and −14 are available for SMU.
e. 15 and −15 are available only for HPSMU.
1-264
Agilent 4155C/4156C GPIB Command Reference, Edition 6
4155C/4156C FLEX Commands
TTV/TTV?
Response
time, data <terminator>
time: the time that has elapsed between the execution of the TSR command and the
start of the measurement.
data: voltage measurement data
<terminator> depends on the FMT command setting.
Example
Statements
For TTV command:
OUTPUT @Hp4156;"TTV 1,0"
OUTPUT @Hp4156;"RMD? 2"
ENTER @Hp4156;Time,A
For TTV? command:
OUTPUT @Hp4156;"TTV? 1,0"
ENTER @Hp4156;Time,A
Agilent 4155C/4156C GPIB Command Reference, Edition 6
1-265
4155C/4156C FLEX Commands
TV/TV?
TV/TV?
The TV and TV? commands are the trigger command for high-speed spot voltage
measurements. The commands perform a voltage measurement, independent of the
SMU source mode, trigger mode (TM command), and measurement mode (MM
command).
Difference between the TV command and the TV? command is the way to read the
measurement data as shown in the Example Statements. If you use the TV?
command, you do not need to enter the RMD? command.
For the data output format, refer to “Data Output Format” on page 1-11.
The TV command cannot be used with the TI?, TV?, TTI?, or TTV? command in a
same measurement program. Also the TV? command cannot be used with the TI,
TV, TTI, or TTV command in a same measurement program.
Execution
Conditions
CN command has been executed for the specified unit.
Syntax
TV chnum[,range]
In the US42 command control mode, if you specify the VMU for chnum, there are
no execution conditions.
TV? chnum[,range]
If you enter the TV/TV? command into the program memory (see the ST
command), do not omit the range parameter. range is necessary when using the
internal program memory.
Parameters
chnum :
Channel number of the unit used to measure voltage. Integer
expression.
chnum
Unit
chnum
Unit
1
SMU1
5a
SMU5
2
SMU2
6a
SMU6
3
SMU3
21
VSU1
4
SMU4
22
VSU2
a. For MPSMUs in the 41501A/B Expander. For HPSMU,
channel number is 6, not 5.
1-266
Agilent 4155C/4156C GPIB Command Reference, Edition 6
4155C/4156C FLEX Commands
TV/TV?
range :
Ranging type for voltage measurement. 0, 10 to 15, and −10 to −15 are
available. Integer expression.
If you do not specify this parameter, range is set to 0.
Ranging type a
range
range
Ranging type a
0
Auto ranging
10 b
0.2 V limited auto ranging
−10 b
0.2 V range fixed
11
2 V limited auto ranging
−11
2 V range fixed
12 c
20 V limited auto ranging
−12 c
20 V range fixed
13 d
40 V limited auto ranging
−13 d
40 V range fixed
14 d
100 V limited auto ranging
−14 d
100 V range fixed
15 e
200 V limited auto ranging
−15 e
200 V range fixed
a. Auto ranging uses the lowest measurement range (available for the unit)
that covers the measurement value. Limited auto ranging uses the specified range or above. For example, 2 V limited auto ranging uses the 2 V
range to measure 0.1 V, and uses the 20 V range to measure 10 V.
b. 10 and −10 are available only for VMU in the differential mode.
c. 12 and −12 are available for VMU in the grounded mode, and SMU
d. 13, 14, −13, and −14 are available for SMU.
e. 15 and −15 are available only for HPSMU.
Example
Statements
For TV command:
OUTPUT @Hp4156;"TV 1,0"
OUTPUT @Hp4156;"RMD? 1"
ENTER @Hp4156;A
For TV? command:
OUTPUT @Hp4156;"TV? 1,0"
ENTER @Hp4156;A
Agilent 4155C/4156C GPIB Command Reference, Edition 6
1-267
4155C/4156C FLEX Commands
UNT?
UNT?
The UNT? query command requests the model and revision numbers of all units in
the 4155C/4156C, and stores the results in the 4155C/4156C output data buffer
(query buffer).
The output data is always stored in the query buffer in ASCII format, regardless of
the FMT command.
Syntax
UNT? [mode]
Parameters
mode :
Integer expression. 0 or 1.
There is no difference between a "UNT? 0" command and a "UNT? 1"
command. If you do not specify this parameter, the mode is set to 0.
Query Response
model number at slot 0,revision number at slot 0;
model number at slot 1,revision number at slot 1;
......
......
model number at slot 8,revision number at slot 8<terminator>
where, the terminator depends on the control mode (US or US42) as follows:
US command mode:
<LF^EOI>
US42 command mode: <CR/LF^EOI>
Example
Statements
DIM A$[50]
OUTPUT @Hp4156;"UNT?"
ENTER @Hp4156;A$
1-268
Agilent 4155C/4156C GPIB Command Reference, Edition 6
4155C/4156C FLEX Commands
VM
VM
The VM command sets the operation mode of the VMU.
Syntax
VM chnum,mode
Parameters
chnum :
Channel number of VMU 23 or 24. Integer expression.
23: VMU1
24: VMU2
mode :
Operation mode. 1 or 2. Integer expression.
1: Grounded measurement mode
2: Differential measurement mode
Remarks
To use the grounded measurement mode, enter the VM 23,1 and/or VM 24,1
commands. And you should define the measurement units in the MM command.
You can set the measurement range of VMU1 and VMU2 independently by the RV
commands.
To use the differential measurement mode, enter the VM 23,2 or VM 24,2
command. And you should define either VMU1 or VMU2 in the MM command.
The 4155C/4156C uses the unit defined in the MM command for a measurement,
and uses the measurement range specified for the unit by using the RV command.
Example
Statements
OUTPUT @Hp4156;"VM 23,1"
Agilent 4155C/4156C GPIB Command Reference, Edition 6
1-269
4155C/4156C FLEX Commands
VMD
VMD
The VMD command controls the connection of the VMU input discharge resistor
which prevents the VMU inputs from building up a charge when the inputs are
opened. This command is only for the US control mode.
Syntax
VMD discharge
Parameters
discharge
Connection of the VMU discharge resistor. 0, 1, or 2. Integer
expression. If you do not enter this command, 1 is set.
discharge
description
0
Connects the discharge resistors to the VMU1
and VMU2 inputs immediately.
1
Depends on the status of the VMU input relays:
a. If the input relays are open, the discharge
resistors are connected immediately.
b. If the input relays are closed, the discharge
resistors are disconnected immediately.
2
Disconnects the discharge resistors from the
VMU1 and VMU2 inputs immediately.
When the auto-calibration is executed, this setting is not changed.
Remarks
The discharge resistors must be disconnected before starting the measurement.
To synchronize with the status of the VMU input relays, use VMD 1. The discharge
resistors are disconnected from the inputs only when the input relays are closed. The
connection of the input relays is controlled by the CN and CL commands.
Example
Statements
OUTPUT @Hp4155;"VMD 1"
:
:
OUTPUT @Hp4155;"CN"
:
:
OUTPUT @Hp4155;"CL"
In the above example, the CN command closes the VMU input relays and
disconnects the discharge resistors. And the CL command opens the VMU input
relays and connects the discharge resistors.
1-270
Agilent 4155C/4156C GPIB Command Reference, Edition 6
4155C/4156C FLEX Commands
*WAI
*WAI
The *WAI command stops execution of all commands until the Operation Complete
(OPC) bit is set to 1, which means there are no pending operations. See the *OPC
command.
Syntax
*WAI
Example
Statements
OUTPUT @Hp4156;"*WAI"
Agilent 4155C/4156C GPIB Command Reference, Edition 6
1-271
4155C/4156C FLEX Commands
WI
WI
The WI command specifies the current source for the staircase sweep and its
parameters. This command also clears the WV, WSV, and WSI command settings.
This command setting is cleared by the WV command.
Remarks
If you do not specify the Rmode value, the 4155C/4156C uses the lowest output
range that covers both start and stop values. Then the setting resolution must be the
same for the start and stop values. See Rmode on page 1-274.
Syntax
For Staircase Sweep Measurement:
WI ch,mode,range,start,stop,step[,Vcomp[,Pcomp[,Rmode]]]
For Staircase Sweep with Pulsed Bias Measurement:
WI ch,mode,range,start,stop,step[,Vcomp]
If you enter the WI command into the program memory (see the ST command), do
not omit the Vcomp parameter. Vcomp is necessary when using the internal program
memory.
Parameters
ch :
Channel number of the unit for the staircase sweep current source. 1 to
6 are available. Integer expression.
ch
Unit
1
2
3
4
5a
SMU1
SMU2
SMU3
SMU4
SMU5
6a
SMU6
a. For MPSMUs in the 41501A/B Expander. For HPSMU,
channel number is 6, not 5.
mode :
Sweep mode. 1 to 4 are available. Integer expression.
1: Linear sweep (single stair)
2: Log sweep (single stair)
3: Linear sweep (double stair)
4: Log sweep (double stair)
1-272
Agilent 4155C/4156C GPIB Command Reference, Edition 6
4155C/4156C FLEX Commands
WI
range :
Ranging type for staircase sweep current output. Integer expression.
range
Ranging Type
0
Auto ranging
9 (only for 4156C)
10 pA limited auto ranging
10 (only for 4156C)
100 pA limited auto ranging
11
1 nA limited auto ranging
12
10 nA limited auto ranging
13
100 nA limited auto ranging
14
1 μA limited auto ranging
15
10 μA limited auto ranging
16
100 μA limited auto ranging
17
1 mA limited auto ranging
18
10 mA limited auto ranging
19
100 mA limited auto ranging
20 (only for HPSMU)
1 A limited auto ranging
where, auto ranging uses the optimum range available for the SMU,
and limited auto ranging uses the specified range or above. Actual
ranging operation depends on the ranging mode setting. See Rmode on
page 1-274.
start :
Start current (in A). Numeric expression. See Table 1-31.
0 to ±100E−3 (for 4155C/4156C and MPSMU in 41501A/B)
0 to ±1 (for HPSMU in 41501A/B)
start and stop must have the same polarity for log sweep.
stop :
Stop current (in A). Numeric expression. See Table 1-31.
0 to ±100E−3 (for 4155C/4156C and MPSMU in 41501A/B)
0 to ±1 (for HPSMU in 41501A/B)
start and stop must have the same polarity for log sweep.
Agilent 4155C/4156C GPIB Command Reference, Edition 6
1-273
4155C/4156C FLEX Commands
WI
step :
Number of steps for staircase sweep. Numeric expression. 1 to 1001 are
available.
Vcomp :
Voltage compliance (in V). Numeric expression. See Table 1-31.
If this parameter is not specified, Vcomp is set to the previous setting.
Voltage compliance range changing may cause 0 V output in a moment.
Compliance polarity is automatically set to the same polarity as the
output value, regardless of the specified Vcomp. If the output value is 0,
the compliance polarity is positive.
Pcomp :
Power compliance (in W). Numeric expression.
1E−3 to 2 (for 4155C/4156C and MPSMU in 41501A/B)
1E−3 to 14 (for HPSMU in 41501A/B)
Setting resolution: 1E−3 W.
If you do not specify the Pcomp value, the power compliance is not set.
Rmode :
Ranging mode.
Used to specify the operation of range change during the current sweep.
0 or 1. Integer expression.
If you do not specify the Rmode value, ranging mode is set to 0 (fixed
mode).
0: Fixed
Uses the output range, which covers both start and stop values, during
the current sweep.
For example, if you enter the following command, the 4155C/4156C
uses 100 mA range to force both 100 μA and 100 mA.
WI 1,1,17,1E-4,100E-3,2,10,5E-2,0
1: Auto
Uses the optimum output range for the output current.
For example, if you enter the following command, the 4155C/4156C
uses 1 mA range to force 100 μA, and uses 100 mA range to force 100
mA.
WI 1,1,17,1E-4,100E-3,2,10,5E-2,1
1-274
Agilent 4155C/4156C GPIB Command Reference, Edition 6
4155C/4156C FLEX Commands
WI
Table 1-31
Available Parameter Values for WI Command
Resolution
in A a
start or stop in
A
10 pA
100 pA
1 nA
10E−15
10E−15
100E−15
0 to ±10E−12
0 to ±100E−12
0 to ±1E−9
10 nA
1E−12
0 to ±10E−9
100 nA
10E−12
0 to ±100E−9
1 μA
100E−12
0 to ±1E−6
10 μA
1E−9
0 to ±10E−6
100 μA
10E−9
0 to ±100E−6
1 mA
100E−9
0 to ±1E−3
10 mA
1E−6
0 to ±10E−3
100 mA
10E−6
0 to ±20E−3
to ±50E−3
to ±100E−3
0 to ±50E−3
to ±100E−3
0 to ±50E−3
to ±125E−3
to ±500E−3
to ±1
Output
Range
100E−6
1A
100E−6
Maximum
Vcomp in V
±100
±100
±100
±200
±100
±200
±100
±200
±100
±200
±100
±200
±100
±200
±100
±200
±100
±200
±100
±40
±20
±200
±100
±200
±100
±40
±20
Remarks
For 4156C.
For SMU.
For HPSMU.
For SMU.
For HPSMU.
For SMU.
For HPSMU.
For SMU.
For HPSMU
For SMU.
For HPSMU.
For SMU.
For HPSMU.
For SMU.
For HPSMU.
For SMU.
For HPSMU
For SMU.
For HPSMU.
a. Minimum resolution is Range×5E−5. However the setting accuracy is
not guaranteed for the resolution less than the value shown in the table.
Example
Statements
OUTPUT @Hp4156;"WI 1,1,11,0,0.1,100,10,1,1"
OUTPUT @Hp4156;"WI 1,2,15,1E−6,0.1,100"
Agilent 4155C/4156C GPIB Command Reference, Edition 6
1-275
4155C/4156C FLEX Commands
WM
WM
The WM command sets the automatic abort function for the staircase sweep
sources, the pulsed sweep source, and the linear search source. It also sets the post
measurement condition of the voltage/current sources.
Syntax
WM abort[,post]
The automatic abort function stops the source output when the abort condition
specified by the abort parameter is detected. The source output is set to the
condition specified by the post parameter. For the linear search measurement, ignore
the post parameter.
Parameters
abort :
Abort condition. Integer expression.
abort
Abort condition
1
Disables the automatic sweep abort function.
2
One of following occurs.
- Compliance on the measurement unit.
- Compliance on the non-measurement unit.
- Overflow on the AD converter.
- Oscillation on any unit.
4
Compliance on the non-measurement unit.
8
Compliance on the measurement unit.
16
Overflow on the AD converter.
32
Oscillation on any unit.
To set multiple abort conditions, specify the sum of the abort values for
the abort conditions shown above. This is allowed for abort=4 to 32.
For example, if you want to enable the abort function when compliance
on the measurement unit (abort=8) or oscillation (abort=32) is
detected, set the abort parameter to 40 (8 + 32).
post :
Post measurement condition of the sources. 1 or 2. Integer expression.
1: Start value. Initial setting.
2: Stop value.
If this parameter is not specified, post is set to 1.
1-276
Agilent 4155C/4156C GPIB Command Reference, Edition 6
4155C/4156C FLEX Commands
WM
Output Data
The 4155C/4156C returns the all measurement data until when any abort condition
is detected. The output format of the last data will be as shown below:
Data for the sweep step when abort occurs
Measurement
Mode
1 channel sweep
if aborted in the nth step
if aborted in the last step
Dummy[,Source_data]
Data[,Source_data]
The data is returned after
the nth data
Multi channel sweep
Dummy[,Source_data]
The data is returned after
the m×n th Data.
Linear search
Data, ......
...... Data[,Source_data]
[raw data ... ,]Search,Source_dummy,Dummy
The status of the last data will be greater than 128 (EOD).
where,
Data: Measurement data.
Source_data: Source output data. Selected by the FMT command.
Dummy: Dummy of the measurement data.
m: Number of the measurement channels.
Search: Status data in the linear search measurement.
Source_dummy: Dummy of the source output data.
raw data: Measurement data in the linear search. Selected by the LSVM command.
Example
Statements
OUTPUT @Hp4156;"WM 1"
OUTPUT @Hp4156;"WM 2,2"
Agilent 4155C/4156C GPIB Command Reference, Edition 6
1-277
4155C/4156C FLEX Commands
WNU?
WNU?
The WNU? query command requests the number of sweep steps specified by the
sweep command (WI, WV, PWI or PWV), and stores the results in the
4155C/4156C output data buffer (query buffer).
The output data is always stored in the query buffer in ASCII format, regardless of
the FMT command.
Syntax
WNU?
Query Response
In US command mode:
number of sweep steps<LF^EOI>
In US42 command mode:
number of sweep steps<CR/LF^EOI>
After executing this command, the 4155C/4156C reports the number of steps
specified by the sweep command (PWI, PWV, WI, or WV).
If you want to know the number of steps for a pulsed sweep, you must execute an
"MM 4" command before using this command, otherwise the number of steps for
the staircase sweep is reported.
Example
Statement
OUTPUT @Hp4156;"WNU?"
ENTER @Hp4156;A
1-278
Agilent 4155C/4156C GPIB Command Reference, Edition 6
4155C/4156C FLEX Commands
WR
WR
The WR command writes the specified characters or numeric data (ASCII) at the
end of the file opened by the OPEN command.
Syntax
WR data
Parameters
data :
Example
Statements
This example writes the TI? measurement data to the "MDATA" file.
ASCII characters or numeric data to be written into the file. Maximum
254 bytes.
OUTPUT @Hp4156;"TI? 1,0"
ENTER @Hp4156 USING "#,5X,13D,X";Mdata
A$="’Id(A)="&VAL$(Mdata)&",’"
OUTPUT @Hp4156;"SDSK 1"
OUTPUT @Hp4156;"OPEN ’MDATA’,2"
OUTPUT @Hp4156;"WR ’Test Results,’"
OUTPUT @Hp4156;"WR ";A$
OUTPUT @Hp4156;"CLOSE"
Agilent 4155C/4156C GPIB Command Reference, Edition 6
1-279
4155C/4156C FLEX Commands
WS
WS
The WS command causes the 4155C/4156C to go into a wait state until the
4155C/4156C receives an external trigger signal via the Ext Trig In terminal on
the rear panel.
Syntax
WS [mode]
Parameters
mode :
Waiting mode. 1 or 2. Integer expression.
If this parameter is not specified, mode is set to 1.
mode
Description
1
Continues the operation if an external trigger was
already received. Otherwise, the 4155C/4156C
immediately goes into a wait state for an external
trigger.
2
In any condition, the 4155C/4156C immediately goes
into a wait state for an external trigger.
Remarks
To end a wait state, execute the AB or *RST command.
Example
Statements
OUTPUT @Hp4156;"STG 0,1,0"
OUTPUT @Hp4156;"WS 2"
1-280
Agilent 4155C/4156C GPIB Command Reference, Edition 6
4155C/4156C FLEX Commands
WSI
WSI
The WSI command specifies the staircase sweep current source that will be
synchronized with the staircase sweep current source set by the WI command, or the
pulsed sweep current source set by the PWI command.
Then the current source set by the WI command or PWI command will be called as
the primary sweep source, and the current source set by the WSI command will be
called as the synchronous sweep source.
This command setting is cleared by the WI, WV, PWI or PWV command.
Execution
Conditions
Available for the staircase sweep (MM 2), pulsed sweep (MM 4), or staircase sweep
with pulsed bias (MM5) measurement.
The WI or PWI command must be entered before this command.
If you do not specify the Rmode value, the 4155C/4156C uses the lowest output
range that covers both start and stop values. Then the setting resolution must be the
same for the start and stop values. See Rmode on page 1-283.
Syntax
WSI chnum,range,start,stop[,Vcomp[,Pcomp[,Rmode]]]
If you enter the WSI command into the program memory (see the ST command), do
not omit the Vcomp parameter. Vcomp is necessary when using the internal program
memory.
Parameters
chnum :
Channel number of the unit for the synchronous sweep current source.
1 to 6 are available. Integer expression.
chnum
Unit
1
SMU1
2
SMU2
3
SMU3
4
SMU4
5a
SMU5
6a
SMU6
a. For MPSMUs in the 41501A/B Expander. For HPSMU,
channel number is 6, not 5.
Agilent 4155C/4156C GPIB Command Reference, Edition 6
1-281
4155C/4156C FLEX Commands
WSI
range :
Ranging type for synchronous sweep current output. Integer
expression.
range
Description
0
Auto ranging
9 (only for 4156C)
10 pA limited auto ranging
10 (only for 4156C)
100 pA limited auto ranging
11
1 nA limited auto ranging
12
10 nA limited auto ranging
13
100 nA limited auto ranging
14
1 μA limited auto ranging
15
10 μA limited auto ranging
16
100 μA limited auto ranging
17
1 mA limited auto ranging
18
10 mA limited auto ranging
19
100 mA limited auto ranging
20 (only for HPSMU)
1 A limited auto ranging
where, auto ranging uses one of the ranges available for the SMU, and
the limited auto ranging uses the specified range or above. Actual
ranging operation depends on the ranging mode setting. See Rmode on
page 1-283.
start :
Start current (in A). Numeric expression. See Table 1-31 on page
1-275.
0 to ±100E−3 (for 4155C/4156C and MPSMU in 41501A/B)
0 to ±1 (for HPSMU in 41501A/B)
start and stop must have the same polarity for log sweep.
Sweep mode, linear or log, is set by the WI or PWI command.
stop :
Stop current (in A). Numeric expression. See Table 1-31 on page
1-275.
0 to ±100E−3 (for 4155C/4156C and MPSMU in 41501A/B)
0 to ±1 (for HPSMU in 41501A/B)
start and stop must have the same polarity for log sweep.
Number of sweep steps is set by the WI or PWI command.
1-282
Agilent 4155C/4156C GPIB Command Reference, Edition 6
4155C/4156C FLEX Commands
WSI
Vcomp :
Voltage compliance (in V). Numeric expression. See Table 1-31 on
page 1-275. If this parameter is not specified, Vcomp is set to the
previous setting. Voltage compliance range changing may cause 0 V
output in a moment.
Compliance polarity is automatically set to the same polarity as the
output value, regardless of the specified Vcomp. If the output value is 0,
the compliance polarity is positive.
Pcomp :
Power compliance (in W). Numeric expression.
1E−3 to 2 (for 4155C/4156C and MPSMU in 41501A/B)
1E−3 to 14 (for HPSMU in 41501A/B)
Setting resolution: 1E−3 W.
If the Pcomp value is not specified, the power compliance is not set.
Rmode :
Ranging mode.
Used to specify the operation of range change during the current sweep.
0 or 1. Integer expression. If the Rmode value is not specified, ranging
mode is set to 0 (fixed mode).
0: Fixed
Uses the output range which covers both start and stop values, during
the current sweep.
For example, if you enter the following command, SMU1 and SMU2
force both 100 μA and 100 mA, by using the 100 mA range.
WI 1,1,17,1E-4,100E-3,2,10,5E-2,0
WSI 2,17,1E-4,100E-3,10,5E-2,0
1: Auto
Uses the optimum output range for the output current.
For example, if you enter the following command, SMU1 and SMU2
force 100 μA by using the 1 mA range, and force 100 mA by using the
100 mA range.
WI 1,1,17,1E-4,100E-3,2,10,5E-2,1
WSI 2,17,1E-4,100E-3,10,5E-2,1
Example
Statements
OUTPUT @Hp4156;"WSI 1,16,0,4E-5"
OUTPUT @Hp4156;"WSI 2,0,1E-3,1E-2,5,5E-2,1"
Agilent 4155C/4156C GPIB Command Reference, Edition 6
1-283
4155C/4156C FLEX Commands
WSV
WSV
The WSV command specifies the staircase sweep voltage source that will be
synchronized with the staircase sweep voltage source set by the WV command, or
the pulsed sweep voltage source set by the PWV command.
The voltage source set by the WV command or PWV command will be called as the
primary sweep source, and the voltage source set by the WSV command will be
called as the synchronous sweep source.
This command setting is cleared by the WI, WV, PWI or PWV command.
Execution
Conditions
Available for the staircase sweep (MM 2), pulsed sweep (MM 4), or staircase sweep
with pulsed bias (MM5) measurement.
The WV or PWV command must be entered before this command.
If you do not specify the Rmode value, the 4155C/4156C uses the lowest output
range that covers both start and stop values. Then the setting resolution must be the
same for the start and stop values. See Rmode on page 1-286.
Syntax
For SMU:
WSV chnum,range,start,stop[,Icomp[,Pcomp[,Rmode]]]
For VSU:
WSV chnum,range,start,stop
If you enter the WSV command into the program memory (see the ST command),
do not omit the Icomp parameter. Icomp is necessary when using the internal
program memory.
Parameters
chnum :
Channel number of the unit for the synchronous sweep voltage source.
1 to 6, 21 and 22 are available. Integer expression.
chnum
Unit
chnum
Unit
1
SMU1
5a
SMU5
2
SMU2
6a
SMU6
3
SMU3
21
VSU1
4
SMU4
22
VSU2
a. For MPSMUs in the 41501A/B Expander. For HPSMU,
channel number is 6, not 5.
1-284
Agilent 4155C/4156C GPIB Command Reference, Edition 6
4155C/4156C FLEX Commands
WSV
range :
Ranging type for synchronous sweep voltage output. Integer
expression.
range
Ranging type
0
Auto ranging
11 (for SMU)
2 V limited auto ranging
12
20 V limited auto ranging
13 (for SMU)
40 V limited auto ranging
14 (for SMU)
100 V limited auto ranging
15 (only for HPSMU)
200 V limited auto ranging
where, auto ranging uses one of the ranges available for the unit used,
and limited auto ranging uses the specified range or above. Actual
ranging operation depends on the ranging mode setting. See Rmode on
page 1-286.
start :
Start voltage (in V). Numeric expression. See Table 1-32 on page
1-291.
0 to ±100 (for 4155C/4156C and MPSMU in 41501A/B)
0 to ±200 (for HPSMU in 41501A/B)
0 to ±20 (for VSU)
start and stop must have the same polarity for log sweep.
Sweep mode, linear or log, is set by the WV or PWV command.
stop :
Stop voltage (in V). Numeric expression. See Table 1-32 on page
1-291.
0 to ±100 (for 4155C/4156C and MPSMU in 41501A/B)
0 to ±200 (for HPSMU in 41501A/B)
0 to ±20 (for VSU)
start and stop must have the same polarity for log sweep.
Number of sweep steps is set by the WV or PWV command.
Agilent 4155C/4156C GPIB Command Reference, Edition 6
1-285
4155C/4156C FLEX Commands
WSV
Icomp :
Current compliance (in A). Numeric expression. See Table 1-32 on
page 1-291.
If this parameter is not specified, Icomp is set to the previous setting.
Compliance polarity is automatically set to the same polarity as the
output value, regardless of the specified Icomp. If the output value is 0,
the compliance polarity is positive.
Pcomp :
Power compliance (in W). Numeric expression.
1E−3 to 2 (for 4155C/4156C and MPSMU in 41501A/B)
1E−3 to 14 (for HPSMU in 41501A/B)
Setting resolution: 1E−3 W.
If the Pcomp value is not specified, the power compliance is not set.
Rmode :
Ranging mode. Used to specify the operation of range change during
the voltage sweep. 0 or 1. Integer expression. If the Rmode value is not
specified, ranging mode is set to 0 (fixed mode).
0: Fixed
Uses the output range which covers both start and stop values, during
the voltage sweep.
For example, if you enter the following command, SMU1 and SMU2
force both 1 V and 50 V by using the 100 V range.
WV 1,1,11,1,50,2,0.01,0.5,0
WSV 2,11,1,50,0.01,0.5,0
1: Auto
Uses the optimum output range for the output voltage.
For example, if you enter the following command, SMU1 and SMU2
force 1 V by using the 2 V range, and force 50 V by using the 100 V
range.
WV 1,1,11,1,50,2,0.01,0.5,1
WSV 2,11,1,50,0.01,0.5,1
Range changing may cause 0 V output in a moment.
Example
Statements
OUTPUT @Hp4156;"WSV 1,0,1,100,0.01,1,1"
OUTPUT @Hp4156;"WSV 21,12,0,10"
1-286
Agilent 4155C/4156C GPIB Command Reference, Edition 6
4155C/4156C FLEX Commands
WT
WT
The WT command sets the hold time and delay time for staircase sweep
measurements.
This command setting is ignored by the following measurement mode.
•
1ch pulsed spot measurements
•
Pulsed sweep measurements
•
Staircase sweep with pulsed bias measurements
Syntax
WT hold,delay[,step delay]
Parameters
hold :
Hold time. The wait time from the trigger of sweep measurement to the
beginning of the delay time for the first step value (in seconds).
0 to 655.35, with 0.01 sec resolution. Numeric expression.
delay :
Delay time. The wait time from the end of the hold time or the
beginning of the step value to the beginning of the measurement (in
seconds).
0 to 65.535, with 0.0001 sec resolution. Numeric expression.
step delay : Step delay time. The wait time from the beginning of the measurement
to the next step value (in seconds).
0 to 1, with 0.0001 sec resolution. Numeric expression.
If this parameter is not specified, step delay is set to 0.
If the specified step delay is shorter than the measurement time, the
4155C/4156C waits until the measurement completes, then outputs the
next step.
Example
Statements
OUTPUT @Hp4156;"WT 10,0.01,0.001"
OUTPUT @Hp4156;"WT 5,0.2"
Agilent 4155C/4156C GPIB Command Reference, Edition 6
1-287
4155C/4156C FLEX Commands
WV
WV
The WV command specifies the voltage source for the staircase sweep source and
its parameters. This command also clears the WI, WSI and WSV command settings.
This command setting is cleared by the WI command.
Remarks
If you do not specify the Rmode value, the 4155C/4156C uses the lowest output
range that covers both start and stop values. Then the setting resolution must be the
same for the start and stop values. See Rmode on page 1-290.
Syntax
For SMU, Staircase Sweep Measurement:
WV chnum,mode,range,start,stop,step[,Icomp[,Pcomp[,Rmode
]]]
For SMU, Staircase Sweep with Pulsed Bias Measurement:
WV chnum,mode,range,start,stop,step[,Icomp]
For VSU:
WV chnum,mode,range,start,stop,step
If you enter the WV command into the program memory (see the ST command), do
not omit the Icomp parameter. Icomp is necessary when using the internal program
memory.
Parameters
chnum :
Channel number of the unit for the staircase sweep voltage source. 1 to
6, 21 and 22 are available. Integer expression.
chnum
Unit
1
SMU1
2
SMU2
3
SMU3
4
SMU4
5a
SMU5
6a
SMU6
21
VSU1
22
VSU2
a. For MPSMUs in the 41501A/B Expander. For HPSMU,
channel number is 6, not 5.
1-288
Agilent 4155C/4156C GPIB Command Reference, Edition 6
4155C/4156C FLEX Commands
WV
mode :
Sweep mode. 1 to 4 are available. Integer expression.
1: Linear sweep (single stair)
2: Log sweep (single stair)
3: Linear sweep (double stair)
4: Log sweep (double stair)
range :
Ranging type for staircase sweep voltage output. Integer expression.
range
Ranging type
0
Auto ranging
11 (for SMU)
2 V limited auto ranging
12
20 V limited auto ranging
13 (for SMU)
40 V limited auto ranging
14 (for SMU)
100 V limited auto ranging
15 (only for HPSMU)
200 V limited auto ranging
where, auto ranging uses one of the ranges available for the unit used,
and limited auto ranging uses the specified range or above. Actual
ranging operation depends on the ranging mode setting. See Rmode on
page 1-290.
start :
Start voltage (in V). Numeric expression. See Table 1-32.
0 to ±100 (for 4155C/4156C and MPSMU in 41501A/B)
0 to ±200 (for HPSMU in 41501A/B)
0 to ±20 (for VSU)
start and stop must have the same polarity for log sweep.
stop :
Stop voltage (in V). Numeric expression. See Table 1-32.
0 to ±100 (for 4155C/4156C and MPSMU in 41501A/B)
0 to ±200 (for HPSMU in 41501A/B)
0 to ±20 (for VSU)
start and stop must have the same polarity for log sweep.
Agilent 4155C/4156C GPIB Command Reference, Edition 6
1-289
4155C/4156C FLEX Commands
WV
step :
Number of steps for staircase sweep. 1 to 1001 are available. Numeric
expression.
Icomp :
Current compliance (in A). Numeric expression. See Table 1-32.
If this parameter is not specified, Icomp is set to the previous setting.
Compliance polarity is automatically set to the same polarity as the
output value, regardless of the specified Icomp. If the output value is 0,
the compliance polarity is positive.
Pcomp :
Power compliance (in W). Numeric expression.
1E−3 to 2 (for 4155C/4156C and MPSMU in 41501A/B)
1E−3 to 14 (for HPSMU in 41501A/B)
Setting resolution: 1E−3 W.
If the Pcomp value is not specified, the power compliance is not set.
Rmode :
Ranging mode. Used to specify the operation of range change during
the voltage sweep. 0 or 1. Integer expression.
If the Rmode value is not specified, ranging mode is set to 0 (fixed
mode).
0: Fixed
Uses the output range which covers both start and stop values, during
the voltage sweep.
For example, if you enter the following command, the 4155C/4156C
uses 100 V range to force both 1 V and 50 V.
WV 1,1,11,1,50,2,0.01,0.5,0
1: Auto
Uses the optimum output range for the output voltage.
For example, if you enter the following command, the 4155C/4156C
uses 2 V range to force 1 V, and uses 100 V range to force 50 V.
WV 1,1,11,1,50,2,0.01,0.5,1
Range changing may cause 0 V output in a moment.
1-290
Agilent 4155C/4156C GPIB Command Reference, Edition 6
4155C/4156C FLEX Commands
WV
Table 1-32
Available Parameter Values for WV Command
Output
Range
2V
20 V
40 V
100 V
200 V
Example
Statements
Resolution
in V
start or stop in
V
100E−6
0 to ±2
1E−3
2E−3
5E−3
10E−3
0 to ±20
0 to ±40
0 to ±100
0 to ±200
Maximum
Icomp in A
Remarks
±100E−3
For SMU.
±1
For HPSMU.
±100E−3
For SMU.
±1
For HPSMU.
−
For VSU.
±50E−3
For SMU.
±500E−3
For HPSMU.
±20E−3
For SMU.
±125E−3
For HPSMU.
±50E−3
OUTPUT @Hp4156;"WV 1,2,12,1E-6,10,100,0.1,1,1"
OUTPUT @Hp4156;"WV 21,1,0,0,20,101"
Agilent 4155C/4156C GPIB Command Reference, Edition 6
1-291
4155C/4156C FLEX Commands
XE
XE
XE command triggers the 4155C/4156C to perform measurements. To put the
measurement data into the 4155C/4156C output data buffer, enter the RMD?
command.
The XE command cannot be used to trigger the high-speed spot measurement which
is triggered by the TI/TI? or TV/TV? command.
For the data output format, refer to “Data Output Format” on page 1-11.
In the US42 command mode with level=16, the XE command triggers the
measurement and puts the data into the output buffer without using the RMD?
command. Read the measurement data before the 4155C/4156C output buffer
becomes full up. The output buffer can store approximately 1500 measurement data.
Execution
Conditions
If any unit is set to the HIGH VOLTAGE state (forcing more than ±40 V, or voltage
compliance set to more than ±40 V) after the trigger (XE), the interlock terminal
must be shorted.
The following commands must be executed before executing the XE command. The
necessary commands depend on the measurement mode.
Measurement Mode
Spot
Staircase sweep
1ch pulsed spot
Pulsed sweep
Staircase sweep with pulsed bias
Sampling
Stress force by SMU
Stress force by PGU b
Commands a
CN, MM, DV or DI
CN, MM, WV or WI
CN, MM, PV or PI, FL
CN, MM, PWV or PWI, FL
CN, MM, WV or WI, PV or PI, FL
CN, MM, MT, MI or MV or MP
CN, MM, STT, STI or STV
CN, MM, STT, STP
a. FL command is required only when the SMU output is a pulse voltage
or current.
b. PGU outputs can be controlled by the SPG, SRP and SPP commands.
Then MM and XE commands are not required.
Syntax
XE
Example
Statement
OUTPUT @Hp4156;"XE"
OUTPUT @Hp4156;"RMD? 1"
ENTER @Hp4156;A$
1-292
Agilent 4155C/4156C GPIB Command Reference, Edition 6
4155C/4156C FLEX Commands
Error Messages
This section lists the error codes and the messages that can occur when you operate
the 4155C/4156C using the 4155C/4156C FLEX commands.
500
Improper parameter value. Check setup range.
The parameter value specified is out of range. Check the parameter
setup range.
501
Improper channel number or slot number.
The channel number or slot number in the command is incorrect. The
channel number must be 1 to 8, 11 to 18, or 21 to 28. The slot number
must be 0 to 8.
502
A unit is not installed on specified channel.
This error is displayed when a command is sent for a device that isn't
installed. For example, when PGU channels are specified in the
command line but the 41501A/B is not installed.
503
Specified unit cannot execute this command.
The specified unit cannot execute this command.
504
Specified unit failed self-test/self-calib.
Unable to use the unit specified in the command line. The unit failed
self-test or self-calibration. Contact the nearest Agilent Technologies
sales and service office.
505
Filter can be set to SMUs only.
Filter can be set to SMUs only by using the FL command.
506
Unsupported unit detected in some slot.
The measurement unit in some slot must be changed. Contact the
nearest Agilent Technologies sales and service office.
Agilent 4155C/4156C GPIB Command Reference, Edition 6
1-293
4155C/4156C FLEX Commands
507xxxyyyy Program memory is full. Reduce commands.
Program memory is full. When using the ST command, too many
program commands were sent to the program memory. Reduce the
number of program commands being sent. xxx is for the program
number. yyyy is for where the overflow occurred from the first
command execution.
508
Program creation aborted.
While making a program, an abort occurred.
509
ST must be executed before END command.
The END command cannot be executed prior to the execution of the ST
command.
510
Unable to use this command between ST and END.
This command cannot be executed between the execution of the ST and
END commands.
511
Comp/range cannot be omit to use prog memory.
Compliance and range parameters' setups cannot be omit when using
the internal program memory. Range setup cannot be omit in the TV
and TI command.
512
Output data buffer full. Too many points.
The output data buffer overflowed because too many data points were
received.
513
Improper output range or output value.
The output range or output value in the command line is incorrect for
the specified measurement unit. Check the setup range for the
measurement unit.
514
Improper measurement range setup.
Measurement range setup is wrong in RI,RV,TI, or TV command. For
example, the specified range is out of range for the measurement unit.
Or, another example is that in the RI or RV command, the measurement
range is set to fixed or limited auto range, though the range mode is set
to 0 (auto range).
515
Specified output values are out of range.
The specified output values are out of range. Check the correct output
range for the unit.
1-294
Agilent 4155C/4156C GPIB Command Reference, Edition 6
4155C/4156C FLEX Commands
516
Cannot omit compliance setup.
The compliance value cannot be omitted when the force mode is
changed from the previous force mode using the DV, DI, PWI, PWV,
PI, PV, WI, or WV command.
517
The compliance setup is out of range.
The compliance setup is incorrect for the measurement unit. Check the
correct compliance range.
518
Power compliance setting is out of range.
The power compliance setting is incorrect for the unit. Verify the
correct power compliance setting range for the specified unit.
519
Current output range must be >= 100 nA in PI.
Output range for pulse current must be set 100 nA or more in PT
command.
520
Measurement range must be less than compliance.
The measurement range set by RI or TI command must be less than the
compliance set by the DI, WI, WSI, PWI, PI, and STI commands.
521
Range setup is wrong for the specified VMU.
For VMUs, when grounded measurement mode is set, the measurement
range must be 2 V or 20 V. When differential measurement mode is set,
the measurement range must be 0.2 V or 2 V.
522
Unable to set compliance for VSU or PGU.
The VSU and PGU commands do not have a compliance function.
Delete the compliance setup from the VSU or PGU setup commands.
523
Cannot open the relay driving more than 40 V.
When the unit output more than 40 V, the output relay of the unit cannot
be open.
524
Unable to output over 40 V. Interlock open.
An output voltage greater than 40 V cannot be forced when an interlock
terminal is open. The output is aborted if the fixture lid is opened when
applying greater than 40 V.
525
Unit sw must be ON before command execution.
The output relay of the specified unit must be turned on before
executing a command.
Agilent 4155C/4156C GPIB Command Reference, Edition 6
1-295
4155C/4156C FLEX Commands
526
Filter must be set to OFF for pulse SMU.
The SMU filter must be set to off when you perform pulsed SMU
measurements.
527
SMU/VSU hold time must be <= 655.35 s in the PT.
Hold time must be 0 to 655.35 s with 0.01 s resolution for pulsed SMUs
or VSUs.
528
SMU/VSU pulse width must be 0.5 ms to 100 ms.
The pulse width for pulsed SMUs or VSUs must be 0.5 ms to 100 ms
with 1 ms resolution in the PT command.
529
SMU/VSU pulse period must be 5 ms to 1 s.
The pulse period for pulsed SMUs and VSUs must be 5 ms to 1 s with
100 μs resolution in the PT command.
530
SMU/VSU pulse trigger must be 0 ms to 32.7 ms.
The trigger out delay for pulsed SMUs and VSUs must be 0 to 32.7 ms
in the PT command,
531
Improper measurement mode in MM command.
The MM command mode parameter value must be 1 to 5, or 10 to 11.
532
Only one meas unit when priority is 0 in PT.
When you set the priority parameter to 0 ("keep pulse width") in the PT
command, only one measurement channel can be set for pulsed
measurement in MM command.
533
Only one meas channel when init int < 2 us.
Only one measurement channel can be set when the initial interval is
less than 2 μs.
534
Measurement mode must be set by MM command.
The MM command must be used to set up a measurement mode before
you can perform the measurement.
535
At least one meas. unit must be set in MM.
At least one measurement unit must be specified in the MM command.
536
Command order must be MT, MM, then XE.
The command order must be MT, MM, and then XE for sampling
measurements.
1-296
Agilent 4155C/4156C GPIB Command Reference, Edition 6
4155C/4156C FLEX Commands
537
Chan no cannot be set for stress force in MM.
The channel number cannot be set for stress force in the MM command.
538
Set PV/PI for meas. using pulse source.
Use the PV or PI command to set the pulse source for pulse spot
measurement or sweep measurement with pulse bias.
539
At least one SYNC channel must be specified.
For stress force, SYNC channel (stress channel) must be assigned to at
least one measurement unit before executing the XE command.
540
WV or WI must be set for sweep measurement.
Specify the sweep source using the WV or WI command before
executing the XE command for a basic sweep or for a sweep
measurement with pulse bias.
541
PWV/PWI must be set for pulse sweep meas.
The PWV or PWI command must be used to specify the pulsed SMU
sweep source before executing the XE command for pulsed sweep
measurement,.
542
Cal/Diag may not be performed on some units.
A calibration or a diagnostics may not be performed on some
measurement units.
543
Cal/Diag failed. Cannot use the units.
Calibration or diagnostics failed. The units may be in need of service.
Contact the nearest Agilent Technologies sales and service office.
544
41501A/B is not turned on.
Unable to execute calibration or diagnostics. Turn the 41501A/B on and
then cycle the mainframe power.
545
Unable to execute RZ before DZ.
The RZ command cannot be executed before the DZ command.
546
Start and stop value must be same when step=1.
The start and stop values must be the same when the number of steps is
set to 1.
Agilent 4155C/4156C GPIB Command Reference, Edition 6
1-297
4155C/4156C FLEX Commands
547
Set WV/WI/PWV/PWI before WSV/WSI.
The sweep channel must be set using a WV, WI, PWV, or PWI command
before the synchronous channel can be set using the WSV or WSI
command.
548
CH num for pulse must differ from other sources.
For pulsed sweep measurement, the channel number for the pulsed
SMU cannot be set to the same channel number for any other sources.
549
Ranging mode must be 0 to 3 (0 to 2 for VMU) in
RV/RI.
For SMUs, the ranging mode parameter must be set to 0, 1, 2, or 3 in
RV and RI command. For VMUs, the ranging mode parameter must be
set to 0, 1, or 2 in the RV commands.
550
Ranging mode must be 0 or 1 in
WI/WV/WSV/WSI/PWI/PWV.
The ranging mode parameter must be set to 0 or 1 in the WI, WV, WSV,
WSI, PWI, and PWV commands.
551
Improper comp. polarity for manual polarity.
If you set the compliance polarity mode of the DI or DV command to
manual, set the compliance as follows:
552
•
If the specified source value is positive or zero, set the compliance
value more positive than the source value.
•
If the specified source value is negative, set the compliance value
less positive than the source value.
Sweep mode must be 1 to 4 in WI/WV/PWI/PWV.
The sweep mode parameter must be set to 1, 2, 3, or 4 in the WI, WV,
PWI, and PW commands.
553
Num of steps in WI/WV/PWI/PWV must be 1 to 1001.
The number of sweep steps specified in the WI, WV, PWI, and PWV
commands must be 1 to 1001.
554
Start/stop must be same pol and not 0 for log.
The start and stop value must be the same polarity and cannot be 0
(zero) for logarithmic measurements.
1-298
Agilent 4155C/4156C GPIB Command Reference, Edition 6
4155C/4156C FLEX Commands
555
Base and pulse current must be same polarity.
When forcing pulsed current, SMU base current and pulse current must
be set to the same polarity.
556
Unable to assign primary/sync. sweep to same CH.
The primary sweep source and the synchronous sweep source must be
set to different units.
557
Improper WSI/WSV entry. Ignore returned value.
WSI or WSV command is missing. Or, WSI or WSV must be entered
after WI, WV, PWI, or PWV command. The invalid source data will be
returned.
558
Pulse mode must be 0 or 1 in PT command.
The pulse mode parameter must be set to 0 or 1 in the PT command.
559
Trigger output delay must be <= pulse width.
The trigger output delay time must be ≤ the pulse width.
560
Mode must be set to 0 or 1 in FL command.
The mode parameter must be set to 0 or 1 in the FL command.
561
Mode must be set to 1 or 2 in VM.
The mode parameter must be set to 1 or 2 in the VM command.
562
Incorrect trigger mode. Check TM syntax.
Incorrect trigger mode specified in the TM command. Check the syntax
for the TM command, set the correct trigger mode number.
563
PGU pulse delay time must be 0 s to 10 s.
The PGU pulse delay time must be 0 to 10 s.
564
PGU pulse width must be 1 us to 10 s.
The PGU pulse width must be 1 μs to 10 s.
565
PGU pulse period must be 1 us to 10 s.
The PGU pulse period must be 1 μs to 10 s.
Agilent 4155C/4156C GPIB Command Reference, Edition 6
1-299
4155C/4156C FLEX Commands
566
PGU leading time must be 100 ns to 10.0 ms.
The PGU leading-edge transition time must be 100 ns to 10.0 ms. The
leading-edge transition time and trailing-edge transition time values
must be in the same range. For details about setting the range, refer to
User's Guide: Measurement and Analysis.
567
PGU trailing time must be 100 ns to 10.0 ms.
The PGU trailing-edge transition time must be 100 ns to 10.0 ms. The
leading-edge transition time and trailing-edge transition time values
must be in the same range. For details about setting range, refer to
User's Guide: Measurement and Analysis.
568
PG pulse width/period/delay must be same range.
The PGU pulse width, pulse period, and pulse delay time must be in the
same range. For details about the ranges, see User's Guide:
Measurement and Analysis.
569
SMU pulse period must be >= pulse width + 4 ms.
The SMU pulse period must be ≥ pulse width + 4ms.
570
Offset mode must be set 0 or 1 in SOC command.
The offset mode parameter must be 0 or 1 in the SOC command.
571
Zero offset meas failed for the unit.
The offset value is too large, so the zero offset measurement aborted.
572
Too big offset for 10 pA range of the unit.
The offset value is too large, so the output offset cannot be canceled.
573
Range setup is wrong in GOC command.
The measurement range setup is incorrect in the GOC command. Check
the command syntax.
574
Category must be 1 or 3 in SIT.
The category parameter must be 1 (short) or 3 (long) in the SIT
command.
575
Integration time must be more than 0 s.
The integration time setup must be greater than 0 s.
1-300
Agilent 4155C/4156C GPIB Command Reference, Edition 6
4155C/4156C FLEX Commands
576
System error. Unable to communicate with SMUC.
The 4155C/4156C may be in need of service. Contact the nearest
Agilent Technologies sales and service office.
577
Mode must be set 0, 1, or 2 in SPG command.
The mode parameter must be set to 0, 1, or 2 in the SPG command.
578
PGU pulse and base value must be <= +/- 40 V.
The PGU pulse and base value must be ≤ ±40 V in the SPG command.
579
Pulse count must be 0 to 65535 s in SPG.
The number of pulse count must be set to 0 to 65535 in the SPG
command.
580
Pulse unit must be set by SPG before SRP.
Set the pulse parameters using the SPG command before using the SPR
command to trigger the pulse output.
581
Set 0 or 1 to output impedance parameter in POR.
The output impedance parameter must be set to 0 or 1 in the POR
command.
582
PGUs are not installed.
The SSP command failed because the PGUs are not installed.
583
Port number must be set to 0, 1, 2, or 3 in SSP.
The port number must be set to 0, 1, 2, or 3 in the SSP command.
584
Status must be set to 0, 1, 2, or 3 in SSP.
The 16440A selector status must be set to 0, 1, 2, or 3 in the SSP
command.
585
Channel number must be set to 1 or 2 in RBC.
The 16441A R-Box channel number must be set to 1 or 2 in the RBC
command.
586
Resistance must be set to 0, 1, 2, or 3 in RBC.
The 16441A R-Box resistance parameter must be set to 0, 1, 2, or 3 in
the RBC command.
Agilent 4155C/4156C GPIB Command Reference, Edition 6
1-301
4155C/4156C FLEX Commands
587
Reference number must be 0 to 3 in STI/STV/STP.
The reference number must be set to 0, 1, 2, or 3 in the STI, STV, and
STP commands.
588
Output mode must be set to 0 or 1 in STP.
The output mode parameter for the PGU pulse stress channel must be
set to 0 or 1 in the STP command.
589
Stress mode must be set to 0, 1, or 2 in STT.
The stress mode parameter must be set to 0, 1, or 2 in the STT
command.
590
Set 500 us to 655 s for time, or 1 to 65535 for
count.
In the STT command, the stress duration time must be set from 500 μs
to 655 s for time mode. The duration pulse count must be 1 to 65535 for
pulse count mode.
591
Pulse period must be 1 us to 10 s in STT.
Pulse period must be 1 μs to 10 s in STT command.
592
Output mode must be set to 0 or 1 in MP.
The output mode parameter must be set to 0 or 1 in the MP command.
593
The specified programs are not stored.
Measurements were not performed. The specified programs by the
program number are not stored in the internal program memory.
594
Start prog num must be <= stop prog num in RU.
In the RU command, the start program number must be ≤ the stop
program number.
595
Program # must be 1 to 255 in DO/RU/SCR/LST?.
The program number must be 1 to 255 in the DO, RU, SCR, and LST?
commands.
596
DO or RU command execution was aborted.
Execution of the DO or RU command was aborted by the AB command.
1-302
Agilent 4155C/4156C GPIB Command Reference, Edition 6
4155C/4156C FLEX Commands
597
Measurement aborted. Interlock open while > 40
V.
The measurement execution was aborted because the interlock circuit is
opened while forcing more than ±40 V.
598
Network disabled. Improper network setup.
Unable to access the network. The network setup for the 4155C/4156C
is not set or the setup is incorrect.
599
Disk must be set to 0, 1, 2, 3, or 4 in SDSK.
The identification to specify the disk drive must be set to 0, 1, 2, 3, or 4
in the SDSK command.
600
Open mode must be set to 0, 1, or 2 in OPEN.
The open mode must be set to 0, 1, or 2 in the OPEN command.
601
Printer must be 1, 2, 3, or 4 in SPR.
Identification for the printer must be set to 1, 2, 3, or 4 in SPR.
602
Data cannot be appended to a file on a diskette.
Unable to set 2 (appending data to a file) to the open mode in the OPEN
command for a file on a diskette.
603
Incomplete network setup. Unable to mount disk.
The network setup for the disk connection must be complete before
executing the SDSK command.
604
Cannot open two files. Close the opened file.
Cannot open two files at the same time. Use the CLOSE command to
close the currently open file before opening another file.
605
Unable to open file.
Unable to open file specified by the OPEN command. Permission was
denied or the file was not found.
606
Seek operation to the network disk failed.
Seek operation failed for opening the file. when appending the data.
Verify the network is working properly.
Agilent 4155C/4156C GPIB Command Reference, Edition 6
1-303
4155C/4156C FLEX Commands
607
Unable to create the file specified in OPEN.
Unable to create the file specified in the OPEN command, because the
file name is wrong or upper directory permission has been denied.
When using a diskette, an HP LIF file name can be a maximum of 6
characters. A DOS file name can be a maximum of 8 characters. When
using a network disk, a maximum of 36 characters are allowed in a file
name.
608
Unable to close the file specified in CLOSE.
Unable to close the specified file using the CLOSE command. The file
may not be open.
609
Unable to write or read. File is not opened.
Unable to write or read a specified file using the WR or RD? command
because the file is not opened.
610
Read error occurred. Data or media corrupt.
The RD? command cannot be executed because the data or media is
corrupted. This can be caused by a bad disk, the wrong format, a new
reading started but not completed, or a network error occurred.
611
Write error occurred. Media corrupt or full.
The WR command cannot be executed because the media is corrupted or
full. This can be caused by a bad disk, the wrong format, a full disk, or
a network error.
612
PA command gets no return from SMUC.
Unable to communicate with the SMUC, or the SMUC lost data. The
4155C/4156C may be in need of service. Contact the nearest Agilent
Technologies sales and service office.
613
Select printer registered in the MISC page.
Unable to select the printer using the SPR command, because the
printer is not set in the NETWORK PRINTER SETUP table of the
SYSTEM: MISCELLANEOUS screen.
614
Must select disk before executing SPL or PRN.
The SDSK command must be correctly executed before using the SPL
command to spool or the PRN command to print.
1-304
Agilent 4155C/4156C GPIB Command Reference, Edition 6
4155C/4156C FLEX Commands
615
Must select network printer before PRN.
Select a network printer using the SPR command before sending a PRN
command to print.
616
Unable to connect server. Network problem.
Unable to connect to the print server. A cable may be disconnected, the
network printer setup in the 4155C/4156C may be incorrect, or the
network may not be functioning properly.
617
Unable to print out. LPD went down.
Unable to print out because no response was received when executing
the PRN command. The LPD print server did not respond.
618
Unable to print out. Data transfer failed.
Data transfer failed while printing. A cable may be disconnected or the
network may not be functioning properly. Abort the printing job, and
try again.
619
Unable to delete spool file.
After printing the temporary spool file cannot be deleted. The network
is not functioning properly.
620
Measurement aborted by AB command.
The measurement was aborted by the AB command.
621
Measurement aborted. Timeout occurred.
The measurement was aborted because a timeout occurred.
622
Meas./stress completed. Stop condition
satisfied.
The measurement or forcing stress has been completed because
measurement or stress completion condition was satisfied.
623
Measurement aborted. Data buffer full.
The measurement was aborted because the SMUC data buffer
overflowed. Too many data points.
624
Measurement aborted. Reason unknown.
The measurement was aborted but the reason is unknown.
Agilent 4155C/4156C GPIB Command Reference, Edition 6
1-305
4155C/4156C FLEX Commands
625
Measurement mode must be 0, 1, 2 or 3 in CMM.
The measurement mode parameter must be set to 0, 1, 2 or 3 in the CMM
command.
626
Unsupported file, or file name is wrong.
Requested file is of an unsupported file type, or the file name is wrong.
When using a diskette, an HP LIF file name can be a maximum of 6
characters. A DOS file name can be a maximum of 8 characters. When
using a network disk, a maximum of 36 characters are allowed in a file
name.
627
PGU pulse period must be > pulse width.
The PGU pulse period must be > the pulse width.
628
PGU pulse period must be >= pulse delay.
The PGU pulse period must be ≥ the pulse delay.
629
PGU leading time must be <= 0.8 x pulse width.
The leading-edge transition time must satisfy the following equation.
rise time ≤ pulse width × 0.8
630
PGU trailing time must be <= 0.8 x(Period Width).
The trailing-edge transition time must satisfy the following equation.
fall time ≤ (pulse period − pulse width) × 0.8
631
Emergency. Reason unknown.
An emergency occurred on an empty slot. Or an emergency occurred on
an existing slot, but the reason is unspecified.
632
At least one PG must be set for pulse count
mode.
When setting up the pulse count mode, at least one PGU must be set to
stress source channel.
633
Auto calib must be 0 or 1 in CM.
The auto calibration parameter must be set to 0 or 1 in the CM
command.
634
Level must be 1, 2, 4, 8, or 16 in US42.
The level parameter must be set to 1, 2, 4, 8, or 16 in the US42
command.
1-306
Agilent 4155C/4156C GPIB Command Reference, Edition 6
4155C/4156C FLEX Commands
635
Type parameter setup is wrong in *LRN? command.
The type parameter must be set to 0 to 28, 30 to 34, or 39 to 48 in the
*LRN? command.
636
Format must be 1 to 5 in FMT.
The format parameter must be set to 1 to 5 in the FMT command.
637
Mode must be 0, 1, or 2 in FMT.
The mode parameter must be set to 0, 1, or 2 in the FMT command.
638
Wait time must be 0 to 99.9999 s in PA.
The wait time must be set to 0 to 99.9999 sec in the PA command.
639
Mode must be 1 or 2 in WS.
The mode parameter must be set to 1 or 2 in the WS command.
640
Mode must be 0 or 1 in STG.
The mode parameter must be set to 0 or 1 in the STG command.
641
State must be 0 or 1 in STG.
The state parameter must be set to 0 or 1 in the STG command.
642
Polarity must be 0 or 1 in STG.
The polarity parameter must be set to 0 or 1 in the STG command.
643
Mode must be 0 or 1 in UNT?.
The mode parameter must be set to 0 or 1 in the UNT? command.
644
4142ch must be 1 to 28 in ACH.
The 4142ch parameter must be set to 1 to 28 in the ACH command.
645
chnum must be 1 to 6, or 21 to 28 in ACH.
The channel number parameter must be set to 1 to 6, or 21 to 28 in the
ACH command.
646
Averaging num must be -1023 to 1023 (not 0) in
AV.
When using the US syntax for the AV command, the averaging number
must be 1 to 1023. When using the US42 syntax of the AV command,
the averaging number must be −1 to −1023. So 0 (zero) cannot be set
for the averaging number.
Agilent 4155C/4156C GPIB Command Reference, Edition 6
1-307
4155C/4156C FLEX Commands
647
Averaging mode must be 0 or 1 in AV.
The averaging mode parameter must be set to 0 or 1 in the AV
command.
648
Post sweep condition must be 1 or 2 in WM.
The post sweep condition for the staircase sweep source must be set to
1 or 2 in the WM command.
649
Abort condition setup is wrong in WM/MSC/STM.
The abort parameter must be set to 1, 2, 4, 8, 16, or 32 in the WM, MSC,
and STM commands. When setting multiple abort conditions (allowed
only for 4 to 32), specify sum of the abort values.
650
Hold time must be 0 to 655.35 s in WT.
The hold time must be set to 0 to 655.35 sec with 0.01 sec resolution in
the WT command.
651
Delay time must be 0 to 65.535 s in WT.
The delay time must be set to 0 to 65.535 sec with 0.001 sec resolution
in the WT command.
652
Step delay time must be 0 to 1 s in WT.
The step delay time must be set to 0 to 1 sec with 0.001 sec resolution
in the WT command.
653
Number of data must be 0 to 20002 in RMD?.
The number of data parameters must be set to 0 to 20002 in the RMD?
command.
654
Category must be 1, 2, or 3 in SLI command.
The category parameter must be set to 1, 2, or 3 in the SLI command.
655
Mode must be 0 (off) or 1 (on) in AZ.
Mode parameter must be set to 0 (0ff) or 1 (on) in AZ command.
656
For pulse mode, pulse para must be set in STP.
When pulse mode is set, the delay time, pulse width, leading-edge
transition time, and trailing-edge transition time must be set in the STP
command.
657
Time or num of pulse must be set in STT.
The duration time or pulse count must be set in the STT command.
1-308
Agilent 4155C/4156C GPIB Command Reference, Edition 6
4155C/4156C FLEX Commands
658
Base must be set when mode = 1 or 2 in SPG.
If the mode has been set to 1 or 2 (constant or pulse voltage output) in
the SPG command., the PGU base value must be set.
659
Pulse para must be set when mode = 2 in SPG.
If the mode is set to pulse voltage output in the SPG command, the
pulse parameter must be set.
660
Unable to use Free run to use program memory.
When using internal program memory, free run mode (continuous
stress) cannot be used for stress force.
661
Improper stress time to use program memory.
Unable to perform free run mode (continuous stress) for stress when
using the internal program memory. Or, setups for PGUs may be wrong
in the STP or STP command.
662
Hold time must be -0.03 to 655.35 s in MT.
The hold time must be set to −0.03 to +655.35 sec in the MT command.
663
Interval must be 0.00006 to 65.534 s in MT.
The initial time interval must be set to 0.00006 to 65.534 sec in the MT
command.
664
Sampling points must be 1 to 10001 in MT.
The number of sampling points must be 1 to 10001 in the MT command.
665
Hold time must be >= 0 when init int >= 2 ms.
The hold time must be ≥ 0 s, when the initial interval is set to ≥ 2 ms.
666
Pulse para must be set for pulse mode in MP.
The pulse parameters must be set when pulse output mode is set in the
MP command.
667
Pulse count must be 0 to 65535 in MP.
The pulse count must be set to 0 to 65535 in the MP command.
668
Unable to use TV/TI&TV?/TI? in same program.
Unable to use the TV or TI and TV? or TI? commands in the same
program. If a program contains a TV or TI commands, the TV? or TI?
commands cannot be used.
Agilent 4155C/4156C GPIB Command Reference, Edition 6
1-309
4155C/4156C FLEX Commands
669
V force must be set for the chan set in GOC.
To execute a zero offset cancel, the voltage force mode must first have
been set for the specified channels using the GOC command.
670
10 (0.2 V range) must be set for VMU in GOC.
The measurement range must be 10 (0.2 V range) for the VMU in the
GOC command.
671
Offset data was out of range or GOC failed.
The offset data measured was out of range, the GOC command
execution failed.
672
VMU must be diff. mode when SOC is executed.
VMU must be set to differential mode when offset cancel is set to ON
in the SOC command.
673
Primary and secondary sweep must be same force
mode.
Primary and secondary sweep sources must be set to the same force
mode.
674
Slot number must be 0 to 9 in *TST? command.
The slot number parameter must be set from 0 to 9 in the *TST?
command.
675
Slot number must be 0 to 8 in CA command.
The slot number parameter must be set from 0 to 8 in the CA command.
676
This mode is only for the system with PGU.
The pulse count mode in the STT command cannot be used in an
4155C/4156C that does not have a PGU in the 41501A/B.
677
WV/WI/QSV: Sweep step value too small.
The minimum value of the sweep step is the resolution of the specified
output range for the WV/WI commands, and double the resolution for
the QSV. Set the start, stop, and number_of_steps values correctly. The
sweep step value is defined as: ABS(stop−start)/number_of_steps.
678
QSV: Use SMU for VAR1 channel.
Only the SMU can be used as the voltage sweep source (VAR1) for the
quasi-static CV measurement. Specify the correct channel number of
the SMU in the QSV command.
1-310
Agilent 4155C/4156C GPIB Command Reference, Edition 6
4155C/4156C FLEX Commands
679
QSV: Sweep mode must be 1(single) or 2(double).
In the QSV command, the sweep mode value must be 1 (single sweep),
or 2 (double sweep). Set the correct value.
680
QSV: Number of steps must be 1 to 1001.
In the QSV command, the number of steps value must be 1 to 1001. Set
the correct value.
681
QSL: Data mode must be 0(off) or 1(on).
In the QSL command, the first parameter value must be 0 (disables
leakage current data output) or 1 (enables data output). Set the correct
value.
682
QSL: Compensation mode must be 0(off) or 1(on).
In the QSL command, the second parameter value must be 0 (disables
leakage current compensation) or 1 (enables compensation). Set the
correct value.
683
QSM: Improper stop condition was specified.
In the QSM command, the first parameter value must be 1, 2, 4, 8, 16,
32, or sum of the numbers 4, 8, 16, or 32 you desire. Set the correct
value.
684
QSM: Abort voltage must be 1(start) or 2(stop).
In the QSM command, the second parameter value must be 1 (forces
start value after stop condition) or 2 (forces stop value after stop
condition). Set the correct value.
685
QST: Hold time must be 0 to 655.35s in 0.01s.
In the QST command, available hold time values are 0 to 655.35 sec, in
0.01 sec steps. Set the correct value.
686
QST: Delay1 must be 0 to 65.535s in 0.0001s.
In the QST command, available delay time values are 0 to 65.535 sec,
in 0.0001 sec steps. Set the correct value.
687
QST: Delay2 must be 0 to 65.535s in 0.0001s.
In the QST command, available delay time values are 0 to 65.535 sec,
in 0.0001 sec steps. Set the correct value.
Agilent 4155C/4156C GPIB Command Reference, Edition 6
1-311
4155C/4156C FLEX Commands
689
QSR: Range must be -9,-10,-11, or -12.
In the QSR command, available range values are −9 (10 pA fixed), −10
(100 pA fixed), −11 (1 nA fixed), and −12 (10 nA fixed). Set the correct
value.
690
Enter MM 13 and QSV before XE command.
The MM 13 and QSV commands must be sent before the XE
command. Do not send the WV, WI, PWV, or PWI command after the
QSV command because they clear the QSV command setting.
691
MM 13 allows only one measurement channel.
Only one measurement channel is available for the quasi-static CV
measurement (MM 13). Set a channel number for the MM command.
692
TSC: Time stamp mode must be 0(off) or 1(on).
In the TSC command, the parameter value must be 0 (disables time
stamp function) or 1 (enables time stamp function). Set the correct
value.
693
LSV/LSI: Improper start, stop, or step value.
In the LSV or LSI command, the start value must be different from the
stop value. The step value must be positive if the start value is less than
the stop value, or it must be negative if the start value is greater than the
stop value. And ABS(stop−start)/step value must be an integer from
1 to 1001. Set the correct values.
694
LSV/LSI: Step value must be + or - value, not 0.
In the LSV or LSI command, the step value must be positive if the start
value is less than the stop value, or negative if the start value is greater
than the stop value. Zero (0) is not available for the step value. Set the
correct value.
695
LSTM: Hold time must be 0 to 655.35s in 0.01s.
In the LSTM command, available hold time values are 0 to 655.35 sec,
in 0.01 sec steps. Set the correct value.
696
LSTM: Delay must be 0 to 65.535s in 0.0001s.
In the LSTM command, available delay time values are 0 to 65.535 sec,
in 0.0001 sec steps. Set the correct value.
1-312
Agilent 4155C/4156C GPIB Command Reference, Edition 6
4155C/4156C FLEX Commands
697
LSVM: Data mode must be 0(result) or 1(all).
In the LSVM command, the parameter value must be 0 (outputs search
results only) or 1 (outputs search results with raw data). Set the correct
value.
698
LGV/LGI: Search mode must be 0(drop) or 1(rise).
In the LGV or LGI command, the search mode parameter value must be
0 (search stops when the measured data drops below the target value) or
1 (search stops when the measured data exceeds the target value). Set
the correct value.
699
LGV/LGI: Improper range or target value.
In the LGV command, available range values are 11 (2 V limited auto)
to 15 (200 V limited auto). In the LGI command, available range values
are 9 (10 pA limited auto) to 20 (1 A limited auto), where the available
values depend on the measurement unit specified.The target value
specified must not be greater than the maximum measurement value of
the unit. Set the correct values.
700
LSSV/LSSI: Polarity must be 0(-) or 1(+).
In the LSSV or LSSI command, the polarity parameter value must be 0
(negative) or 1 (positive). Set the correct value.
701
Enter MM 14 and LSV/LSI before XE command.
The MM14 and LSV/LSI commands must be sent before the XE
command. Do not send the BSV, BSI, or LSI command after the LSV
command. Do not send the BSV, BSI, or LSV command after the LSI
command. In both cases they clear the command setting.
702
Enter MM 14 and LGV/LGI before XE command.
The MM14 and LGV/LGI commands must be sent before the XE
command. Do not send the BGV, BGI, or LGI command after the LGV
command. Do not send the BGV, BGI, or LGV command after the LGI
command. In both cases they clear the command setting.
703
LSSV/LSSI: Offset value too large.
The synchronous source channel uses the same output range as the
linear search source channel.The output value of the synchronous
source must be covered by the minimum range that covers the start and
stop values set to the LSV or LSI command. Set the smaller offset value
to the LSSV or LSSI command.
Agilent 4155C/4156C GPIB Command Reference, Edition 6
1-313
4155C/4156C FLEX Commands
704
Search target must be =< compliance setting.
The target value set to the BGV/BGI/LGV/LGI command was too
large. The search target value must be less than or equal to the
compliance setting of the search channel. Confirm the present
compliance setting and then set smaller target value, or set a
compliance value which covers the target value.
705
Set search source before synchronous source.
The search source channel must be set before the synchronous source
channel is set. To do this, send the LSV command and then the LSSV
command, send the LSI command and then the LSSI command, send
the BSV command and then the BSSV command, or send the BSI
command and then the BSSI command.
706
V(or I)search unit must be I(or V)source mode.
The BGV/LGV command must be used for the I source unit, and the
BGI/LGI command must be used for the V source unit. Confirm the
present source mode setting of the unit, and then either use the correct
command or set the source mode properly.
707
Sync source channel must be set to another unit.
The channel number set to the BSV/BSI/LSV/LSI command cannot be
set to the BSSV/BSSI/LSSV/LSSI command. Set a channel number
other than the search source channel to the BSSV/BSSI/LSSV/LSSI
command.
708
Synchronous source output setting too large.
The synchronous source channel uses the same output range as the
search source channel. The output value of the synchronous source
must be covered by the minimum range that covers both the start and
stop values set to the BSV/BSI/LSV/LSI command. Change the search
source settings or the synchronous source settings.
709
Do not specify channel number for MM 14 and 15.
For the search measurement, the MM command needs only the mode
parameter. The channel number parameter is not required for the search
measurement mode. Enter MM 14 for linear search, or enter MM 15 for
binary search.
710
BSV/BSI: Start and stop must be different.
The same value was set for both the start and stop values in the BSV or
BSI command. They must be different. Set the correct values.
1-314
Agilent 4155C/4156C GPIB Command Reference, Edition 6
4155C/4156C FLEX Commands
711
BST: Hold time must be 0 to 655.35s in 0.01s.
In the BST command, available hold time values are 0 to 655.35 sec, in
0.01 sec steps. Set the correct value.
712
BST: Delay must be 0 to 65.535s in 0.0001s.
In the BST command, available delay time values are 0 to 65.535 sec,
in 0.0001 sec steps. Set the correct value.
713
BGV/BGI: Mode must be 0(limit) or 1(repeat).
In the BGV or BGI command, the search mode parameter value must
be 0 (search stops when data is within the limit specified) or 1 (repeats
search the times specified). Set the correct value.
714
BGV/BGI: Improper search stop condition.
In the BGV/BGI command, the condition parameter value must be a
positive numeric value for the limit mode (mode=0), or 1 to 16 for the
repeat mode (mode=1). Set the correct value.
715
BGV/BGI: Improper range, target, or limit value.
In the BGV command, available range values are 11 (2 V limited auto)
to 15 (200 V limited auto). In the BGI command, available range values
are 9 (10 pA limited auto) to 20 (1 A limited auto). where the available
values depend on the measurement unit specified. The target value
must not be greater than the maximum measurement value for the
repeat mode (mode=1), and the target value +/− limit values must not
be greater than the maximum measurement value for the limit mode
(mode=0). Set the correct values.
716
BSSV/BSSI: Polarity must be 0(-) or 1(+).
The polarity parameter value set to the BSSV or BSSI command, must
be 0 (negative) or 1 (positive). Set the correct value.
717
BSSV/BSSI: Offset value too large.
The synchronous source channel uses the same output range as the
binary search source channel, so the output value of the synchronous
source must be covered by the minimum range that covers the start and
stop values set to the BSV or BSI command. Set a smaller offset value
to the BSSV or BSSI command.
718
BSM: Mode must be 0(normal) or 1(cautious).
In the BSM command, the mode parameter value must be 0 (normal) or
1 (cautious). Set the correct value.
Agilent 4155C/4156C GPIB Command Reference, Edition 6
1-315
4155C/4156C FLEX Commands
719
BSVM: Data mode must be 0(result) or 1(all).
In the BSVM command, the parameter value must be 0 (outputs search
results only) or 1 (outputs search results with raw data). Set the correct
value.
720
Enter MM 15 and BSV/BSI before XE command.
The MM15 and BSV/BSI commands must be sent before the XE
command. Do not send the LSV, LSI, or BSI command after the BSV
command. Do not send the LSV, LSI, or BSV command after the BSI
command. In both cases they clear the command setting.
721
Enter MM 15 and BGV/BGI before XE command.
The MM15 and BGV/BGI commands must be sent before the XE
command. Do not send the LGV, LGI, or BGI command after the BGV
command. Do not send the LGV, LGI, or BGV command after the BGI
command. In both cases they clear the command setting.
722
Invalid command for the US42 control mode.
The US42 control mode does not support the commands for the
quasi-static CV measurement, search measurement, time stamp, and the
ESC command. They are available for the US control mode.
723
VMD: Parameter value must be 0, 1, or 2.
VMD 0 connects the discharge resistor to the VMU inputs, and VMD 2
disconnects the resistor. VMD 1 connects the resistor if the input relay
is off and disconnects the resistor if the relay is on.
724
ESC: Mode must be 0(off) or 1(on).
In the ESC command, the first parameter must be 0 (disables the sweep
stop function) or 1 (enables the sweep stop function). Set the correct
value.
725
ESC: Condition1 must be 0,1,2,3, or 4.
In the ESC command, the condition1 parameter must be 0 (disables the
stop function), 1 (stops measurement if result=<value1), 2 (stops if
result>=value1), 3 (stops if |result|=<|value1|), or 4 (stops if
|result|>=|value1|), where the result is the rate of measurement data
change, and value1 is a parameter of ESC. Set the correct value.
726
ESC: Value1 must be -10000 to 10000.
In the ESC command, the value1 parameter must be −10000 to 10000.
The value1 is effective for the condition1. Set the correct value.
1-316
Agilent 4155C/4156C GPIB Command Reference, Edition 6
4155C/4156C FLEX Commands
727
ESC: Condition2 must be 0,1,2,3, or 4.
In the ESC command, the condition2 parameter must be 0 (disables the
stop function), 1 (stops measurement if data=<value2), 2 (stops if
data>=value2), 3 (stops if |data|=<|value2|), or 4 (stops if
|data|>=|value2|), where data is the measured data, and value2 is a
parameter of ESC. Set the correct value.
728
ESC: Value2 must be -200 to 200.
In the ESC command, the value2 parameter must be −200 to 200. The
value2 is effective for the condition2. Set the correct value.
729
QSZ: Integration time too short for zero cancel.
The integration time specified is too short to execute the zero offset
cancel in the quasi-static CV measurement. To set a longer value, use
the QST command.
730
QSZ: Offset value too large for zero cancel.
The measurement unit measured a leakage current greater than 70% of
the measurement range of the QSCV zero offset measurement. Use the
next greater measurement range. To change the range, enter the QSR
command.
731
Enter MM 13 before QSZ.
The MM 13 command must be sent before the QSZ command. The
offset measurement was not executed.
732
Enter QSV before QSZ command.
The QSV command must be sent before the QSZ command. The offset
measurement was not executed. Do not send the WV, WI, PWV, or PWI
command after the QSV command. They clear the QSV command
setting.
734
QSZ: Mode must be 0(off), 1(on) or 2(execution).
Mode parameter value of the QSZ command must be 0 (disables offset
cancel), 1 (enables offset cancel), or 2 (measures the offset data, and
returns the data). Set the correct value.
735
MM: Specify channel number of the V mode SMU.
Only the V mode SMU can be defined as the measurement channel in
the quasi-static CV measurement. Specify the channel number of the V
mode SMU to the MM 13 command.
Agilent 4155C/4156C GPIB Command Reference, Edition 6
1-317
4155C/4156C FLEX Commands
1-318
Agilent 4155C/4156C GPIB Command Reference, Edition 6
2
4145B Syntax Command Set
4145B Syntax Command Set
The 4145B Syntax command set has same syntax as the 4145A/B Semiconductor
Parameter Analyzer command set.
So, you can execute the 4145A/B programs on the 4155C/4156C with minimum
modification.
The differences between the 4145B Syntax commands and the 4145A/B commands
are summarized in “Differences from 4145A/B Commands”.
This chapter describes the following:
•
General Conventions
•
Differences from the 4145A/B Commands
•
Running the 4145A/B Program directly on the 4155C/4156C
•
Reference: System Mode Commands
•
Reference: User Mode Commands
•
Reference: Common Mode Commands
To Use 4145B Syntax Command Set
Connect the interlock circuit to the Intlk connector and close the interlock circuit to
execute the 4145B syntax commands.
To Enter into 4145B Syntax Commands Mode
When the 4155C/4156C is turned on, the 4155C/4156C is always in the
4155C/4156C commands mode.
To enter into the 4145B syntax commands mode:
Front panel:
on the SYSTEM: MISCELLANEOUS screen,
set COMMAND SET field to 4145.
Remote command:
send ":SYSTem:LANGuage COMPatibility" command to
the 4155C/4156C.
To Exit from 4145B Syntax Commands Mode
The command *RST exits the 4145B Syntax Commands Mode and returns to the
4155C/4156C command set.
2-2
Agilent 4155C/4156C GPIB Command Reference, Edition 6
4145B Syntax Command Set
Command Modes
General Conventions
Command Modes
There are three types of the 4145B Syntax commands:
System Mode commands:
Only work in System Mode.
User Mode commands:
Only work in User Mode.
Common commands:
Work in both System and User Mode.
The default setting is System Mode. Therefore, the first command of a program
must be a System or Common Mode command. A command issued in the wrong
mode generates an error.
Changing the Command Mode
To change the command mode, use the appropriate command shown below:
•
To change to User Mode, use the US command. Example:
OUTPUT @Hp415x;"US"
•
To change to System Mode, use DE, SS, SM, or MD command. Example:
OUTPUT @Hp415x;"DE"
Command and Screens for System Mode
System Mode commands are related to a certain screen(s). A System Mode
command must be executed on its related screen.
To change to the related screen, use a display changing command:
DE
Channel Definition screen
SS
Sweep Setup screen or Sampling Setup screen
SM
Display Setup screen. This corresponds to Display Setup, Measurement
Setup, or Sampling Setup screen of the 4155C/4156C.
MD
Graph or List Display screen (depends on DM command)
Agilent 4155C/4156C GPIB Command Reference, Edition 6
2-3
4145B Syntax Command Set
Parameter Separator
Parameter Separator
Parameters must be separated by single commas ( , ).
String Parameter
All string parameters, for example, channel names and file names, must be enclosed
in single quotes ('NAME').
The first character of a string parameter must be an uppercase alphabetical character
or <whitespace>. The remaining characters must be uppercase alphabetical,
numeric, or <whitespace>.
Real Parameter
Real numeric values can be entered in fixed or floating point format.
Example:
Fixed:
12.34 or −12.34
Floating:
1.23E+4 or 1.23E−4 or −1.23E+4 or −1.23E−4
Voltage (V), current (A), or time (S) units are not required after numeric values.
Semicolons and <whitespace>
A command can begin and end with multiple semicolons (;).
For example, ;;;;CH1;;;;CH2 is a legal command.
<whitespace> is allowed at the beginning or end of commands, and before and after
parameters.
For example, CH1 ,'VNAME', 'INAME' , 1, 1 is allowed.
<whitespace> is allowed between the command and the first parameter. For
example, CH1 above can be CH 1.
Invalid Input
When invalid input generates a parsing error, the rest of the command is discarded
until the next terminator ( ; or <CR> or <LF>). Then, the commands following this
terminator are processed.
2-4
Agilent 4155C/4156C GPIB Command Reference, Edition 6
4145B Syntax Command Set
4145B Syntax Mode Status Byte
4145B Syntax Mode Status Byte
In general, the bit assignment of the status byte in the 4145B syntax command mode
is identical to the 4145 definition.
Bit No.
Description
Bit 1
Data Ready
Bit 2
Syntax Error
Bit 3
END Status
Bit 4
Illegal Program
Bit 5
Busy
Bit 6
Self-test Fail
Bit 7
RQS
Bit 8
Emergency
Agilent 4155C/4156C GPIB Command Reference, Edition 6
2-5
4145B Syntax Command Set
Non-supported Commands
Differences from 4145A/B Commands
This section summarizes the differences between the 4145B syntax commands and
the 4145A/B commands:
Non-supported Commands
The following 4145A/B commands are not supported in the 4145B syntax command
mode:
GL0
Disables HP-GL
GL1
Enables HP-GL overlay graphics
GL2
Enables HP-GL stand-alone graphics
MX
Matrix
SH
Schmoo
SV S
Save ASP file
GT S
Get ASP file
DM3
Display mode Matrix
DM4
Display mode Schmoo
AS1
Auto Sequence Program Start
AS2
Auto Sequence Program Continue
AS3
Auto Sequence Program Stop
If you have the 4145A/B programs that include any of the above commands, they
will not work with the 4155C/4156C.
2-6
Agilent 4155C/4156C GPIB Command Reference, Edition 6
4145B Syntax Command Set
Differences on Commands
Differences on Commands
CH
SMU channel number
4145A/B
1 to 4
VR, IR
VP, IP
VC, IC
4145 syntax
1 to 6
•
START setting range is expanded to the 4155C/4156C's range.
•
STOP setting range is expanded to the 4155C/4156C's range.
•
STEP setting range is expanded to the 4155C/4156C's range.
•
COMPLIANCE setting range is expanded to the 4155C/4156C's range.
•
Setting resolution is same as the 4155C/4156C.
•
START setting range is expanded to the 4155C/4156C's range.
•
STEP setting range is expanded to the 4155C/4156C's range.
•
Number of steps setting range is expanded to the 4155C/4156C's range.
•
COMPLIANCE setting range is expanded to the 4155C/4156C's range.
•
Setting resolution is same as the 4155C/4156C.
•
SMU channel number
4145A/B
1 to 4
4145 syntax
1 to 6
•
Output setting range is expanded to the 4155C/4156C's range
•
Setting resolution is same as the 4155C/4156C
Agilent 4155C/4156C GPIB Command Reference, Edition 6
2-7
4145B Syntax Command Set
Differences on Commands
RT, FS
•
VAR1' value
4145A/B
VAR1' = VAR1 + offset
4145 syntax
VAR1' = VAR1 * ratio + offset
or
VAR1' = VAR1 * ratio
•
VAR1' ratio specification
4145A/B
Applicable in LOG sweep only
WT, IN
4145 syntax
Both ratio and offset work for LOG
•
Wait/Interval time setting range is expanded to the 4155C/4156C's range.
•
Availability
4145A/B
Must be on DISPLAY SETUP
screen
NR
4145 syntax
Can be on Display Setup,
Measurement Setup, or Sampling
Setup screen.
•
Setting resolution is same as the 4155C/4156C.
•
No. of Readings (that is, number of samples) setting range is expanded to the
4155C/4156C's range
•
Availability
4145A/B
Must be in DISPLAY SETUP
•
4145 syntax
Must be in Display Setup,
Measurement Setup or Sampling
Setup screen.
Setting resolution is same as the 4155C/4156C.
2-8
Agilent 4155C/4156C GPIB Command Reference, Edition 6
4145B Syntax Command Set
Differences on Commands
DM3, DM4
•
Equivalent to DM1.
•
Availability
4145A/B
Must be in DISPLAY SETUP
LI
4145 syntax
Must be on Display Setup,
Measurement Setup or Sampling
Setup screen.
Num. of Monitor Channels
4145A/B
4145 syntax
1 to 6
1 to 8
AS1,AS2,AS3
Controls IBASIC program instead of ASP.
SV
•
File type S (ASP file) is not supported; generates an error.
•
File name follows the 4155C/4156C file naming convention, but without the file
extension.
•
Comment is ignored.
•
Supports both LIF and DOS media format.
•
Creates the 4155C/4156C compatible file. Not 4145 compatible.
•
File type S (ASP file) is not supported; generates an error.
•
File name follows the 4155C/4156C file naming convention, but without the file
extension.
•
Supports both LIF and DOS media format.
•
Recognizes the 4155C/4156C and the 4145 compatible files.
GT
DO
Channel name
4145A/B
Measurement channel name
only
PR
4145 syntax
Source, measure, user function, user
variable names.
•
Changes screen to LIST Display prior to start printing.
•
Printing format is the 4155C/4156C's data list format.
Agilent 4155C/4156C GPIB Command Reference, Edition 6
2-9
4145B Syntax Command Set
Differences on Commands
DV
DI
•
Channel number: 1 to 4, 7 to 8 for SMUs, 5 to 6 for VSUs, 9 to 10 for PGUs.
•
2 V and 200 V ranges are available.
•
Output setting range is expanded to the 4155C/4156C's range.
•
Compliance setting range is expanded to the 4155C/4156C's range.
•
Setting resolution is same as the 4155C/4156C.
•
Channel number
4145A/B
1 to 4
TV
4145 syntax
1 to 6
•
10 pA, 100 pA and 1 A output ranges are available.
•
Output setting range is expanded to the 4155C/4156C's range.
•
Compliance setting range is expanded to the 4155C/4156C's range.
•
Setting resolution is same as the 4155C/4156C.
Channel number
4145A/B
1 to 4
4145 syntax
1 to 6
IT
Integration time is same as the 4155C/4156C.
CA
Calibration time is different.
4145A/B
about 4 sec
4145 syntax
about 15 s to 50 s (depends on its configuration)
PL
Printing format is the 4155C/4156C's hard copy format.
ID
Response text is same as defined for IEEE488.2 *IDN response.
All HP-GL
Commands
All HP-GL Commands are not supported.
2-10
Agilent 4155C/4156C GPIB Command Reference, Edition 6
4145B Syntax Command Set
Spot Measurement
Running 4145A/B Program Directly on
4155C/4156C
This section describes how to directly run an 4145A/B control program (non-ASP
program) on the 4155C/4156C with little or no modification. To run these programs
directly, you need to use the 4145 syntax command mode of the 4155C/4156C.
Usually, you can run these programs with no modification. But sometimes small
modifications are required due to the differences from the 4145A/B on the following
points:
•
Spot Measurement
•
Sweep Steps in Logarithmic Step Mode
•
Terminator
For differences on commands, see “Differences from 4145A/B Commands” on page
2-6.
Spot Measurement
The 4145A/B can execute a spot measurement by setting both start and stop of the
sweep to the same value, but the 4155C/4156C executes the measurement twice
even if you set both start and stop of the sweep to the same value.
Sweep Steps in Logarithmic Step Mode
Calculation algorithm for primary sweep steps in logarithmic step mode is slightly
different between the 4155C/4156C and the 4145A/B, so step values and number of
steps may be different between the 4155C/4156C and the 4145A/B.
Agilent 4155C/4156C GPIB Command Reference, Edition 6
2-11
4145B Syntax Command Set
Terminator
Terminator
If you run your program on an external controller, use <CR> + <LF> as the
command terminator if you execute serial polling to read a status of the
4155C/4156C in your program.
If you use only <CR> or <LF> as command terminator, the 4155C/4156C may
respond with incorrect status.
This is due to the differences of reading and parsing commands between the
4145A/B and the 4155C/4156C.
The following example and explanation gives a better understanding of this.
10
20
30
40
OUTPUT @Hp415x;"ME1"
REPEAT
Status=SPOLL(@Hp415x)
UNTIL BIT(Status,0)
10
triggers measurement and clears the data ready bit (bit1) of status
register.
20 to 40
waits until the data ready bit of status register is set to 1.
•
When the Terminator is only <CR>
If the program controls the 4145A/B, at line 10:
1. The 4145A/B starts reading data with RFD line set to false (data bus is
halted) after each byte.
In this example:
M → bus halted → E → bus halted → 1 → bus halted
2. After receiving 1, the 4145A/B recognizes valid command ME1, then
executes ME1.
At this time, the program is paused because the controller is trying to send
<CR>, which is a terminator, but the 4145A/B has halted data bus and does
not receive <CR>.
3. After the 4145A/B triggers measurement and clears status bit1, the 4145A/B
reads <CR>, then the program proceeds to next step (line 20).
The program reads the correct status at line 30.
2-12
Agilent 4155C/4156C GPIB Command Reference, Edition 6
4145B Syntax Command Set
Terminator
If the program controls the 4155C/4156C, at line 10:
1. The 4155C/4156C starts and continues reading data until reading a
terminator.
In this example, the 4155C/4156C reads ME1<CR>, then halts data bus.
2. The 4155C/4156C starts executing "ME1". At the same time, the external
controller can proceed to the next line, because all data of this line has
transferred, then program continues.
At line 30, controller can read status of the 4155C/4156C even if RFD line is
false. RFD holdoff is not effective for serial polling.
However, the clearing of the status register bit by line 10 may not have been
completed yet, so line 30 may get the incorrect status.
•
When the Terminator is <CR> + <LF>
The example program for the 4155C/4156C performs as follows:
1. The 4155C/4156C starts and continues reading data until reading a
terminator.
In this example, the 4155C/4156C reads ME1<CR>, then halts data bus.
2. The 4155C/4156C executes "ME1".
At this time, the program is paused because the controller is trying to send
<LF>, which is part of the terminator, but the 4155C/4156C has halted data
bus and does not receive <LF>.
3. After the 4155C/4156C triggers measurement and clears the status bit1, the
4155C/4156C reads <LF>, then the program proceeds to next step (line 20).
The program reads the correct status at line 30.
Agilent 4155C/4156C GPIB Command Reference, Edition 6
2-13
4145B Syntax Command Set
System Mode Commands
Table 2-1
System Mode Commands (1 of 2)
Category
Command
Channel
Definition
Source Setup
2-14
Description
DE
Displays Channel Definition screen
CH
Defines SMU operation mode and settings
VM
Defines VMU settings
VS
Defines VSU settings
SS
Displays Sweep Setup screen or Sampling
Setup screen
IC
Defines SMU constant current source setup
IR
Defines SMU VAR1 current output source
setup
IP
Defines SMU VAR2 current output source
setup
VC
Defines SMU constant voltage source setup
VR
Defines SMU VAR1 voltage output source
setup
VP
Defines SMU VAR2 voltage output source
setup
SC
Defines VSU constant voltage source setup
RT
Defines VAR1’ ratio
FS
Defines VAR1’ offset
DT
Sets delay time
HT
Sets hold time
Agilent 4155C/4156C GPIB Command Reference, Edition 6
4145B Syntax Command Set
Table 2-2
System Mode Commands (2 of 2)
Category
Sampling
Setup
Command
Description
WT
Sets wait time
IN
Sets sampling interval
NR
Sets number of sampling points
XT
Sets X-axis for sampling measurement
SM
Displays Display Setup screen
DM
Selects display mode; GRAPH or LIST
XN
Sets X-axis
YA
Sets Y1-axis
YB
Sets Y2-axis
LI
Selects channels displayed on LIST screen
MD
Displays GRAPH screen or LIST screen
MX
No action
SH
No action
Measurement
Control
ME
Selects measurement mode, and executes
measurement
Data Output
DO
Outputs measurement data
Program
Execution
Control
AS
Controls IBASIC program execution
File Operation
SV
Saves file
GT
Gets file
PR
Prints data list
GL
No action
Display Setup
Measurement
Display
Print Function
Agilent 4155C/4156C GPIB Command Reference, Edition 6
2-15
4145B Syntax Command Set
AS
AS
The command controls the IBASIC program execution, instead of ASP execution.
Syntax
AS auto_seq_code
Parameter
Parameter
auto_seq_code
Explanation
1: Start
2: Continue
3: Stop
Description
AS3 pauses the IBASIC program; does not stop it.
Valid on any System Mode screen.
Example
OUTPUT @Hp4155;"AS1"
Corresponding
Command
:PROG:STAT RUN | CONT | PAUS
2-16
Agilent 4155C/4156C GPIB Command Reference, Edition 6
4145B Syntax Command Set
CH
CH
Defines the SMU name, mode, and function.
Syntax
CH SMU_number,'VNAME','INAME',mode,function
Parameters
Parameter
Explanation
SMU_number
1 to 6
VNAME
up to 6 alphanumeric characters
INAME
up to 6 alphanumeric characters
(source) mode
1: V (voltage source)
2: I (current source)
3: common
(source) function
1: VAR1, 2: VAR2, 3: CONSTANT, 4: VAR1’
Description
Most recently executed display changing command must have been DE. The
4155C/4156C has up to 6 SMUs (depending on the configuration). If no parameters
are specified after SMU_number, the channel is disabled. If mode is set to 3
(common), function must be set to 3 (CONSTANT).
Example
OUTPUT @Hp4155;"CH1,'VNAME','INAME',1,2"
OUTPUT @Hp4155;"CH2"
Corresponding
Commands
for disable
:PAGE:CHAN:SMU<smu num>:VNAM 'VNAME'
:PAGE:CHAN:SMU<smu num>:INAM 'INAME'
:PAGE:CHAN:SMU<smu num>:MODE V | I | COMM
:PAGE:CHAN:SMU<smu num>:FUNC VAR1 | VAR2 | CONS | VARD
:PAGE:CHAN:SMU<smu num>:DIS
for disable
Agilent 4155C/4156C GPIB Command Reference, Edition 6
2-17
4145B Syntax Command Set
DE
DE
Changes mode to System Mode, then changes display to Channel Definition screen.
Syntax
DE
Example
OUTPUT @Hp4155;"DE"
Corresponding
Command
:PAGE:CHAN
2-18
Agilent 4155C/4156C GPIB Command Reference, Edition 6
4145B Syntax Command Set
DM
DM
Selects the display mode.
Syntax
DM display_mode
Parameter
Parameter
display_mode
Explanation
1: Graphics
2: List
3: Graphics
4: Graphics
Description
Most recently executed display changing command must have been SM.
DM determines whether the GRAPHICS or LIST screen is displayed when MD
command is executed.
The 4145A/B Matrix (MX command) and Schmoo (SH command) are not
supported.
•
If DM is sent with parameter 3 or 4 (to select Matrix or Schmoo), it is
equivalent to selecting parameter 1 (Graphics). And the display is changed to
the Display Setup screen.
•
If the MX or SH commands themselves are sent, no error is generated. The
commands are simply ignored.
Example
OUTPUT @Hp4155;"DM1"
Corresponding
Command
:PAGE:DISP:MODE GRAP | LIST
Agilent 4155C/4156C GPIB Command Reference, Edition 6
2-19
4145B Syntax Command Set
DO
DO
Outputs measurement data of the specified channel (name) to the controller.
Syntax
DO 'name'
Parameter
Parameter
(data) name
Response
Explanation
must be a name previously defined on the Channel
Definition screen, User Function screen, or User
Variable screen.
status value <delimiter> [ status value <delimiter> ] <terminator>
Response
Explanation
(data) status
N|T|C|P|X|V|D|A|S
N: Normal
T: Other channel compliance error
C: This channel compliance error
P: PG exceeding current limit error
X: Oscillation
V: ADC overflow
D: Insufficient data
A: Arithmetic error
S: Calculation stack overflow
value
4145 compatible format or IEEE488.2 <NR3 NUMERIC
RESPONSE DATA> format. Selected by DP command.
<delimiter>
, or <CR> + <LF>. Selected by DL command.
<terminator>
<CR> + <LF> with or without EOI. Selected by EI command.
2-20
Agilent 4155C/4156C GPIB Command Reference, Edition 6
4145B Syntax Command Set
DO
Description
Measurement value name, source value name, user function name, or user variable
name can be specified.
Valid on any System Mode screen.
Status D, A, and S reported only for user function value.
Example
Example 1: Response data is the 4145 compatible format
DIM A(1:3)
OUTPUT @Hp4155;"DO 'NAME'"
ENTER @Hp4155;A(*)
Response is in the 4145 compatible format:
N 0.0000E+00,N 100.00E-03,N 200.00E-03<CR><LF>^<END>
Example 2: Response data is NR3 format
DIM A(1:3)
OUTPUT @Hp4155;"DP1"
OUTPUT @Hp4155;"DO 'NAME'"
ENTER @Hp4155;A(*)
Response is in NR3 format:
N+0.000000E+000,N+1.000000E-001,N+2.000000E-001<CR><LF>^<END>
Corresponding
Command
:TRAC? 'channel_name'
for query
Agilent 4155C/4156C GPIB Command Reference, Edition 6
2-21
4145B Syntax Command Set
DT
DT
Sets the delay time for sweep.
Syntax
DT delay_time
Parameter
Parameter
delay_time
Explanation
0.000 s to 65.535 s
Description
Most recently executed display changing command must have been SS.
Example
OUTPUT @Hp4155;"DT 1.5"
Corresponding
Command
:PAGE:MEAS:DEL delay_time
2-22
Agilent 4155C/4156C GPIB Command Reference, Edition 6
4145B Syntax Command Set
FS
FS
Sets the offset value of VAR1’.
Syntax
FS offset
Parameter
Parameter
offset
Description
Explanation
real numeric value
Most recently executed display changing command must have been SS.
The VAR1’ output value is determined by the following equation:
VAR1’ value = VAR1 value × ratio + offset
Before executing this command, a unit must be defined to be VAR1’ (the CH or VS
command).
Example
OUTPUT @Hp4155;"FS 0.5"
Corresponding
Command
:PAGE:MEAS:VARD:OFFS offset
Agilent 4155C/4156C GPIB Command Reference, Edition 6
2-23
4145B Syntax Command Set
GL
GL
This command is ignored on the 4155C/4156C.
Syntax
GL
Description
The Graphics Language Mode (GL1) is not supported. If the GL command is sent,
no error is generated; the next command is parsed.
2-24
Agilent 4155C/4156C GPIB Command Reference, Edition 6
4145B Syntax Command Set
GT
GT
Gets measurement setup and/or measurement results from file.
Syntax
GT 'filetype<space>filename'
Parameters
Parameter
filetype
Explanation
P or D
P: Program File (measurement setup)
D: Program/Data File (measurement setup and results)
filename
File name
The string parameter of GT must be enclosed in single quotes:
Example: GT 'P MYFILE'
Description
The 4145A/B filetype S (ASP File) is not supported and generates an error.
The file name should comply with the 4155C/4156C file naming conventions. Do
not specify an extension (suffix) in the filename.
Handles both LIF and DOS format disk. Recognizes the 4155C/4156C and the
4145B compatible files.
Valid on any System Mode screen.
Example
OUTPUT @Hp4155;"GT 'P MYFILE'"
Corresponding
Commands
:MMEM:LOAD:STAT 0, filename
for P type files
:MMEM:LOAD:TRAC DEF filename
for D type files
Agilent 4155C/4156C GPIB Command Reference, Edition 6
2-25
4145B Syntax Command Set
HT
HT
Sets the hold time for sweep.
Syntax
HT hold_time
Parameter
Parameter
hold_time
Explanation
0.00 s to 655.35 s
Description
Most recently executed display changing command must have been SS.
Example
OUTPUT @Hp4155;"HT 1.5"
Corresponding
Command
:PAGE:MEAS:HTIM hold_time
2-26
Agilent 4155C/4156C GPIB Command Reference, Edition 6
4145B Syntax Command Set
IC
IC
Sets the source parameters for an SMU that was defined to be a constant current
source.
Syntax
IC SMU_number,output_value,compliance
Parameters
Parameter
Description
Explanation
SMU_number
1 to 6
output_value
-0.1 to 0.1 A for SMU. -1 to 1 A for HPSMU.
compliance
-100 to 100 V for SMU. -200 to 200 V for HPSMU.
Most recently executed display changing command must have been SS.
The specified SMU must be in the current ( I ) source mode.
The 4155C/4156C has up to 6 SMUs (depending on the configuration).
The source function of the specified SMU channel must be CONSTANT.
The output_value and compliance parameters must comply with the maximum
voltage/current limitation of the corresponding module. And the range and
resolution for these parameters is same as for the 4155C/4156C.
Example
OUTPUT @Hp4155;"IC1,1,200"
Corresponding
Commands
:PAGE:MEAS:CONS:SMU<smu num> output_value
:PAGE:MEAS:CONS:SMU<smu num>:COMP compliance
Agilent 4155C/4156C GPIB Command Reference, Edition 6
2-27
4145B Syntax Command Set
IN
IN
Sets the initial sampling interval (Interval time of time domain measurement).
Syntax
IN interval_time
Parameter
Parameter
interval_time
Description
Explanation
60 μs to 65.532 s
Most recently executed display changing command must have been SM.
For sampling measurement (time domain measurements), VAR1 cannot be selected
on the Channel Definition screen.
The mode must be Sampling mode (that is, all functions must be CONSTANT). IN
is not allowed in Sweep mode.
The interval_time range and resolution are the same as range and resolution of the
4155C/4156C initial sampling interval.
Example
OUTPUT @Hp4155;"IN 0.5"
Corresponding
Command
:PAGE:MEAS:SAMP:IINT interval_time
2-28
Agilent 4155C/4156C GPIB Command Reference, Edition 6
4145B Syntax Command Set
IP
IP
Sets the sweep parameters for unit that was defined to be the VAR2 current sweep
source.
Syntax
IP start,step,num_of_steps,compliance
Parameters
Parameter
Description
Explanation
start
-0.1 to 0.1 A for SMU. -1 to 1 A for HPSMU.
step
-0.2 to 0.2 A for SMU. -2 to 2 A for HPSMU.
num_of_steps
1 to 128
compliance
-100 to 100 V for SMU. -200 to 200 V for HPSMU.
Most recently executed display changing command must have been SS.
Before executing this command, a unit must be defined to be VAR2 (the CH
command).
The VAR2 unit must be in the current ( I ) source mode. (So, VAR2 unit cannot be
VSU).
The start, step and compliance parameters must comply with the maximum
voltage/current limitation of the corresponding module. And the range and
resolution for these parameters is same as for the 4155C/4156C.
Example
OUTPUT @Hp4155;"IP0,0.2,5,200"
Corresponding
Commands
:PAGE:MEAS:VAR2:STAR start
:PAGE:MEAS:VAR2:STEP step
:PAGE:MEAS:VAR2:POIN num_of_steps
:PAGE:MEAS:VAR2:COMP compliance
Agilent 4155C/4156C GPIB Command Reference, Edition 6
2-29
4145B Syntax Command Set
IR
IR
Sets the sweep parameters for unit that was defined to be the VAR1 current sweep
source.
Syntax
IR sweep_mode,start,stop,step,compliance
Parameters
Parameter
Description
Explanation
sweep_mode
1: Linear
2: Log 10
3: Log 25
4: Log 50
start
-0.1 to 0.1 A for SMU. -1 to 1 A for HPSMU.
stop
-0.1 to 0.1 A for SMU. -1 to 1 A for HPSMU.
step
0 to 0.2 A for SMU. 0 to 2 A for HPSMU.
compliance
-100 to 100 V for SMU. -200 to 200 V for HPSMU.
Most recently executed display changing command must have been SS.
VAR1 unit must be in current (I) source mode. (VAR1 unit cannot be VSU).
If sweep_mode is not 1 (Linear), the step value should be omitted. If step value is
included, it will be ignored; no error is generated.
The start, stop, step and compliance parameters must comply with the maximum
voltage/current limitation of the corresponding module. And the range and
resolution for these parameters is same as for the 4155C/4156C.
Example
Corresponding
Commands
OUTPUT @Hp4155;"IR1,0,1,0.01,200"
for Linear
OUTPUT @Hp4155;"IR2,0,1,200"
for Log
:PAGE:MEAS:VAR1:SPAC LIN | L10 | L25 | L50
:PAGE:MEAS:VAR1:STAR start
:PAGE:MEAS:VAR1:STOP stop
:PAGE:MEAS:VAR1:STEP step
:PAGE:MEAS:VAR1:COMP compliance
2-30
Agilent 4155C/4156C GPIB Command Reference, Edition 6
4145B Syntax Command Set
LI
LI
Assigns channel names for List display.
Syntax
LI 'name'{,'name'}
Parameters
Parameter
(data) name
Description
Explanation
from 1 to 8 names can be selected. The channel
names must be names previously defined on the
Channel Definition screen, User function screen, or
User Variable screen.
Most recently executed display changing command must have been SM. And DM2
must be executed.
The allowed number of channel names (eight) differs from the number allowed for
the 4145A/B (six).
Example
OUTPUT @Hp4155;"LI 'NAME'"
OUTPUT @Hp4155;"LI 'NAME1','NAME2','NAME3','NAME4'"
Corresponding
Command
:PAGE:DISP:LIST 'name',{'name'}
Agilent 4155C/4156C GPIB Command Reference, Edition 6
2-31
4145B Syntax Command Set
MD
MD
Changes mode to System Mode, then changes screen to the LIST or GRAPH screen,
depending on DM command.
Syntax
MD
Example
OUTPUT @Hp4155;"MD"
Corresponding
Commands
:PAGE:GLIS
to graph display screen
:PAGE:GLIS:LIST
to list display screen
2-32
Agilent 4155C/4156C GPIB Command Reference, Edition 6
4145B Syntax Command Set
ME
ME
Triggers measurement with the specified measurement execution mode.
Syntax
ME meas_code
Parameter
Parameter
meas_code
Explanation
1: Single
2: Repeat
3: Append
4: Stop
Description
Valid on any System Mode screen.
Example
OUTPUT @Hp4155;"ME1"
Corresponding
Command
:PAGE:SCON:SING | REP | APP | STOP
Agilent 4155C/4156C GPIB Command Reference, Edition 6
2-33
4145B Syntax Command Set
MX
MX
This command is ignored on the 4155C/4156C.
Syntax
MX
Description
The Matrix Display Mode is not supported. If the MX command is sent, it is
ignored; no error is generated.
Sending DM3 (set Display Mode to Matrix), however, changes the screen to the
Display Setup screen, and uses the default values there.
2-34
Agilent 4155C/4156C GPIB Command Reference, Edition 6
4145B Syntax Command Set
NR
NR
Sets number of readings (that is, number of samples) for sampling measurement
(time domain measurement).
Syntax
NR num_readings
Parameter
Parameter
num_readings
Description
Explanation
1 to 10001
Most recently executed display changing command must have been SM.
For sampling measurement (time domain measurements), VAR1 cannot be selected
on the Channel Definition screen.
The mode must be Sampling mode (that is, all functions must be CONSTANT).
NR is not allowed in Sweep mode.
Example
OUTPUT @Hp4155;"NR 5"
Corresponding
Command
:PAGE:MEAS:SAMP:POIN num_readings
Agilent 4155C/4156C GPIB Command Reference, Edition 6
2-35
4145B Syntax Command Set
PR
PR
Changes screen to LIST Display screen, switches the hard copy language to PCL,
then starts printing the data list.
Syntax
PR
Description
This command does not affect any print/plot parameters except the hard copy
language.
Print out format is compatible with the 4155C/4156C.
Valid on any System Mode screen.
Corresponding
Commands
:PAGE:GLIS:LIST
:HCOP:DEV:LANG PCL
:HCOP:ITEM:ALL
2-36
Agilent 4155C/4156C GPIB Command Reference, Edition 6
4145B Syntax Command Set
RT
RT
Sets the ratio value for the unit that was defined to be VAR1’.
Syntax
RT ratio
Parameter
Parameter
ratio
Description
Explanation
real numeric value
Most recently executed display changing command must have been SS.
The VAR1’ output value is determined by the following equation:
VAR1’ value = VAR1 value × ratio + offset
Before executing this command, a unit must be defined to be VAR1’ (the CH or VS
command).
Example
OUTPUT @Hp4155;"RT 0.1"
Corresponding
Command
:PAGE:MEAS:VARD:RAT ratio
Agilent 4155C/4156C GPIB Command Reference, Edition 6
2-37
4145B Syntax Command Set
SC
SC
Sets the source parameters for a VSU that was defined to be a constant source.
Syntax
SC Vsu_number,output_value
Parameters
Parameter
Description
Explanation
Vsu_number
1 to 2
output_value
-20 V to 20 V
Most recently executed display changing command must have been SS.
The specified VSU must have been defined to be a CONSTANT source (VS
command).
The range and resolution for the output_value parameter are same as for the
4155C/4156C.
Example
OUTPUT @Hp4155;"SC1,10"
Corresponding
Command
:PAGE:MEAS:CONS:VSU<vsu num> output_value
2-38
Agilent 4155C/4156C GPIB Command Reference, Edition 6
4145B Syntax Command Set
SH
SH
This command is ignored on the 4155C/4156C.
Syntax
SH
Description
The Schmoo Display Mode is not supported. If the SH command is sent, it is
ignored; no error is generated.
Sending DM4 (set Display Mode to Schmoo), however, changes the screen to the
Display Setup screen, and uses the default values there.
Agilent 4155C/4156C GPIB Command Reference, Edition 6
2-39
4145B Syntax Command Set
SM
SM
Changes mode to System Mode, then changes screen to Display Setup screen
("Meas Disp Mode Setup" on the 4145A/B).
Syntax
SM
Description
On the 4145A/B, the SM command changes to the "Measurement and Display Mode
Setup" screen. On the 4155C/4156C, there are 3 corresponding screens: Display
Setup, Sampling Setup, and Measurement Setup. SM changes the screen to Display
Setup screen.
Example
OUTPUT @Hp4155;"SM"
Corresponding
Commands
:PAGE:DISP
for Display Setup screen
:PAGE:MEAS:SAMP
for Sampling Setup screen
:PAGE:MEAS:MSET
for Measurement Setup screen
2-40
Agilent 4155C/4156C GPIB Command Reference, Edition 6
4145B Syntax Command Set
SS
SS
Changes mode to System Mode, then changes screen to Sweep Setup screen
("Source Setup" on the 4145A/B) if the previous measurement mode is the sweep
measurements, or Sampling Setup screen if the previous measurement mode is the
sampling measurements.
Syntax
SS
Example
OUTPUT @Hp4155;"SS"
Corresponding
Command
:PAGE:MEAS
Agilent 4155C/4156C GPIB Command Reference, Edition 6
2-41
4145B Syntax Command Set
SV
SV
Saves measurement setup and/or measurement results into file.
Syntax
SV 'filetype<spage>filname<space>comment'
Parameters
Parameter
filetype
Explanation
P or D
P: Program File (measurement setup)
D: Program/Data File (measurement setup and results)
filename
File name
comment
(ignored) User's comment
The string parameter of SV must be enclosed in single quotes:
Example: SV ‘P MYFILE’
Description
The 4145A/B filetype S (ASP File) is not supported and generates an error.
The file name should comply with the 4155C/4156C file naming conventions. The
extension is added automatically, so do not specify an extension (suffix) in the
filename.
The second <space> and the comment are optional. Ignored if specified.
Handles both LIF and MS-DOS format disk. Creates the 4155C/4156C compatible
file; not 4145B compatible file. Valid on any System Mode screen.
Example
OUTPUT @Hp4155;"SV'P MYFILE COMMENT'"
Corresponding
Commands
:MMEM:STOR:STAT 0, filename
for P type files
:MMEM:STOR:TRAC DEF filename
for D type files
2-42
Agilent 4155C/4156C GPIB Command Reference, Edition 6
4145B Syntax Command Set
VC
VC
Sets the source parameters for an SMU that was defined to be a constant voltage
source.
Syntax
VC SMU_number,output_value,compliance
Parameters
Parameter
Description
Explanation
SMU_number
1 to 6
output_value
-100 to 100 V for SMU. -200 to 200 V for HPSMU.
compliance
-0.1 to 0.1 A for SMU. -1 to 1 A for HPSMU.
Most recently executed display changing command must have been SS.
The 4155C/4156C has up to 6 SMUs (depending on the configuration).
The CONSTANT SMU must be in the voltage (V) source mode.
The source function of the specified SMU channel must be CONSTANT.
The output_value and compliance parameters must comply with the maximum
voltage/current limitation of the corresponding module. And the range and
resolution for these parameters is same as for the 4155C/4156C.
Example
OUTPUT @Hp4155;"VC1,10,0.1"
Corresponding
Commands
:PAGE:MEAS:CONS:SMU<smu_num> output_value
:PAGE:MEAS:CONS:SMU<smu_num>:COMP compliance
Agilent 4155C/4156C GPIB Command Reference, Edition 6
2-43
4145B Syntax Command Set
VM
VM
Defines the VM name.
Syntax
VM Vm_number,'VNAME'
Parameters
Parameter
Description
Explanation
Vm_number
1 to 2
VNAME
up to 6 alphanumeric characters
Most recently executed display changing command must have been DE.
If no parameters are specified after Vm_number, the channel is disabled.
Example
OUTPUT @Hp4155;"VM1,'VNAME'"
Corresponding
Commands
Define Channel:
:PAGE:CHAN:VMU<vm num>:VNAM 'VNAME'
Disable:
:PAGE:CHAN:VMU<vm num>:DIS
2-44
Agilent 4155C/4156C GPIB Command Reference, Edition 6
4145B Syntax Command Set
VP
VP
Sets the sweep parameters for the unit that was defined to be the VAR2 voltage
sweep source.
Syntax
VP start,step,num_of_steps,compliance
Parameters
Parameter
Description
Explanation
start
-100 to 100 V for SMU. -200 to 200 V for HPSMU.
-20 to 20 V for VSU.
step
-200 to 200 V for SMU. -400 to 400 V for HPSMU.
-40 to 40 V for VSU.
num_of_steps
1 to 128
compliance
-0.1 to 0.1 A for SMU. -1 to 1 A for HPSMU.
Most recently executed display changing command must have been SS.
Before executing this command, a unit must be defined to be VAR2 (the CH or VS
command).
The VAR2 unit must be in the voltage (V) source mode.
If the VAR2 unit is a VSU, the compliance parameter is ignored.
The start, step and compliance parameters must comply with the maximum
voltage/current limitation of the corresponding module. And the range and
resolution for these parameters is same as for the 4155C/4156C.
Example
OUTPUT @Hp4155;"VP0,20E-6,5,1"
Corresponding
Commands
:PAGE:MEAS:VAR2:STAR start
:PAGE:MEAS:VAR2:STEP step
:PAGE:MEAS:VAR2:POIN num_of_steps
:PAGE:MEAS:VAR2:COMP compliance
Agilent 4155C/4156C GPIB Command Reference, Edition 6
2-45
4145B Syntax Command Set
VR
VR
Sets the sweep parameters for unit that was defined to be the VAR1 voltage sweep
source.
Syntax
VR sweep_mode,start,stop,step,compliance
Parameters
Parameter
sweep_mode
start
stop
step
compliance
Description
Explanation
1: Linear
2: Log 10
3: Log 25
4: Log 50
-100 to 100 V for SMU. -200 to 200 V for HPSMU.
-20 to 20 V for VSU.
-100 to 100 V for SMU. -200 to 200 V for HPSMU.
-20 to 20 V for VSU.
0 to 200 V for SMU. 0 to 400 V for HPSMU.
0 to 40 V for VSU.
-0.1 to 0.1 A for SMU. -1 to 1 A for HPSMU.
Most recently executed display changing command must have been SS.
The VAR1 module must be in the voltage (V) source mode.
If sweep_mode is not 1 (Linear), the step value should be omitted. If step value is
included, it will be ignored; no error is generated.
If the VAR1 module is VSU, the compliance parameter is ignored.
The start, stop, step and compliance parameters must comply with the maximum
voltage/current limitation of the corresponding module. And the range and
resolution for these parameters is same as for the 4155C/4156C.
Example
Corresponding
Commands
OUTPUT @Hp4155;"VR1,0,1,0.01,100E-3"
for Linear
OUTPUT @Hp4155;"VR2,0,1,100E-3"
for Log
:PAGE:MEAS:VAR1:SPAC
:PAGE:MEAS:VAR1:STAR
:PAGE:MEAS:VAR1:STOP
:PAGE:MEAS:VAR1:STEP
:PAGE:MEAS:VAR1:COMP
2-46
LIN | L10 | L25 | L50
start
stop
step
compliance
Agilent 4155C/4156C GPIB Command Reference, Edition 6
4145B Syntax Command Set
VS
VS
Defines the VSU name and function.
Syntax
VS Vsu_number,'VNAME',function
Parameters
Parameter
Explanation
Vsu_number
1 to 2
VNAME
up to 6 alphanumeric characters
(source) function
1: VAR1
2: VAR2
3: CONSTANT
4: VAR1’
Description
Most recently executed display changing command must have been DE.
If no parameters are specified after Vsu_number, the channel is disabled.
Example
OUTPUT @Hp4155;"VS1,'VNAME',1"
OUTPUT @Hp4155;"VS2"
for Disable
Corresponding
Commands
Define Channel:
:PAGE:CHAN:VSU<vsu num>:VNAM 'VNAME'
:PAGE:CHAN:VSU<vsu num>:FUNC VAR1 | VAR2 | CONS | VARD
Disable:
:PAGE:CHAN:VSU<vsu num>:DIS
Agilent 4155C/4156C GPIB Command Reference, Edition 6
2-47
4145B Syntax Command Set
WT
WT
Sets the hold time for sampling.
Syntax
WT wait_time
Parameter
Parameter
wait_time
Description
Explanation
-30.0 ms to 838.8607 s
Most recently executed display changing command must have been SM.
For time domain measurements (sampling measurement), VAR1 cannot be selected
on the Channel Definition screen.
The mode must be Sampling mode (that is, all functions must be CONSTANT).
`WT'' is not allowed in Sweep mode.
The wait_time range and resolution are the same as the range and resolution of the
4155C/4156C sampling hold time.
Example
OUTPUT @Hp4155;"WT 1.5"
Corresponding
Command
:PAGE:MEAS:SAMP:HTIM hold_time
2-48
Agilent 4155C/4156C GPIB Command Reference, Edition 6
4145B Syntax Command Set
XN, YA, YB
XN, YA, YB
These commands set the graphics axis parameters.
Syntax
XN | YA | YB 'data_name',scale,min,max
•
XN = X axis (for sweep only; for sampling, use XT)
•
YA = Y1 axis
•
YB = Y2 axis
Parameters
Parameter
Explanation
data_name
must be a name previously defined on the Channel
Definition screen, User Function screen, or User
Variable screen.
scale
1: Linear
2: Logarithmic
Description
min (value)
real numeric value
max (value)
real numeric value
Most recently executed display changing command must have been SM. And DM1
must be executed.
For Sweep, VAR1 must be set up. And you can use XN, YA, and YB.
For Sampling, do not use VAR1 (that is, all functions must be CONSTANT). And
you can use YA and YB. For X axis, do not use XN. Use XT.
The Y2 axis (YB) is optional; the YB command can be omitted.
Example
OUTPUT @Hp4155;"XN 'NAME',1,0,10"
Corresponding
Commands
:PAGE:DISP:GRAP:X|Y1|Y2:NAME var_name
:PAGE:DISP:GRAP:X|Y1|Y2:SCAL LIN|LOG
:PAGE:DISP:GRAP:X|Y1|Y2:MIN min_value
:PAGE:DISP:GRAP:X|Y1|Y2:MAX max_value
Agilent 4155C/4156C GPIB Command Reference, Edition 6
2-49
4145B Syntax Command Set
XT
XT
Sets the graphics parameters (X axis only) for sampling measurement (time domain
measurement).
Syntax
XT min,max
Parameters
Parameter
Description
Explanation
min (value)
real numeric value
max (value)
real numeric value
Most recently executed display changing command must have been SM. And DM1
must be executed.
For sampling measurement (time domain measurements), VAR1 cannot be selected.
Mode must be Sampling (that is, all functions must be CONSTANT). XT is not
allowed in Sweep mode.
Scale is Linear for sampling measurement (time domain measurement.)
For setting Y1 and Y2 axis, use the YA and YB commands.
Example
OUTPUT @Hp4155;"XT 0,10"
Corresponding
Commands
:PAGE:DISP:GRAP:X:MIN min_value
:PAGE:DISP:GRAP:X:MAX max_value
2-50
Agilent 4155C/4156C GPIB Command Reference, Edition 6
4145B Syntax Command Set
User Mode Commands
Table 2-3
User Mode Commands
Command
Description
DI
SMU Output (Current Source)
DS
VSU Output
DV
SMU Output (Voltage Source)
GL
Graphics Language (GL2) Mode
TI
Triggering Measurement (Current Monitor)
TV
Triggering Measurement (Voltage Monitor)
HP-GL commands are not supported. For details, refer to “HP-GL Commands” on
page 2-60.
Agilent 4155C/4156C GPIB Command Reference, Edition 6
2-51
4145B Syntax Command Set
DI
DI
Triggers current output from specified SMU.
Syntax
DI SMU_number,output_range,output_value,compliance
Parameters
Parameter
Explanation
SMU_number
1 to 6
output_range
-2: 10 pA (only for 4156C)
-1: 100 pA (only for 4156C)
0: AUTO
1: 1 nA
2: 10 nA
3: 100 nA
4: 1 μA
5: 10 μA
6: 100 μA
7: 1 mA
8: 10 mA
9: 100 mA
10: 1 A (only for HPSMU)
output_value
-0.1 to 0.1 A for SMU. -1 to 1 A for HPSMU.
compliance
-100 to 100 V for SMU. -200 to 200 V for HPSMU.
Description
The 4155/4156C can have up to 6 SMUs. output_range, output_value, and
compliance must comply with maximum voltage/current of corresponding module.
If not, error is generated same as for the 4155C/4156C. Range and resolution for
these parameters is same as for the 4155C/4156C. If no parameters after
SMU_number, SMU is disabled. Voltage compliance range changing may cause 0 V
output in a moment.
Example
OUTPUT @Hp4155;"DI1,0,9.876E-3,10"
OUTPUT @Hp4155;"DI4"
2-52
for disable
Agilent 4155C/4156C GPIB Command Reference, Edition 6
4145B Syntax Command Set
DS
DS
Triggers voltage output from specified VSU.
Syntax
DS Vsu_number,output_value
Parameters
Parameter
Explanation
Vsu_number
1 to 2
output_value
-20 V to 20 V
Description
If no parameters are specified after Vsu_number, the channel is disabled.
Example
OUTPUT @Hp4155;"DS2,10.0"
OUTPUT @Hp4155;"DS1"
for disable
Agilent 4155C/4156C GPIB Command Reference, Edition 6
2-53
4145B Syntax Command Set
DV
DV
Triggers voltage output from specified SMU, VSU, or PGU.
Syntax
DV channel_number,output_range,output_value,compliance
Parameters
Parameter
channel_number
Explanation
1: SMU1, 2: SMU2, 3: SMU3, 4: SMU4,
5: VSU1, 6: VSU2,
7: SMU5, 8: SMU6,
9: PGU1, 10: PGU2.
output_range
-1: 2 V (for SMU and HPSMU)
0: AUTO
1: 20 V
2: 40 V (for SMU, HPSMU and PGU)
3: 100 V (for SMU and HPSMU)
4: 200 V (only for HPSMU)
Description
output_value
-100 to 100 V for SMU. -200 to 200 V for HPSMU.
-20 to 20 V for VSU. -40 to 40 V for PGU.
compliance
-0.1 to 0.1 A for SMU. -1 to 1 A for HPSMU.
The 4155C/4156C can have up to 6 SMUs. DV can trigger a VSU, PGU, or SMU.
For non-SMUs, compliance is ignored.
If no parameters are specified after channel_number, channel is disabled. The
output_range, output_value and compliance parameters must comply with the
maximum voltage/current limitation of the corresponding module. Otherwise, an
error is generated the same as for the 4155C/4156C. And the range and resolution
for these parameters is same as for the 4155C/4156C. Range changing may cause 0
V output in a moment.
Example
OUTPUT @Hp4155;"DV1,0,12.34,0.001"
OUTPUT @Hp4155;"DV2"
2-54
for disable
Agilent 4155C/4156C GPIB Command Reference, Edition 6
4145B Syntax Command Set
GL
GL
This command is ignored on the 4155C/4156C.
Syntax
GL
Description
The Graphics Language Mode (GL2) is not supported. If the GL command is sent,
no error is generated; the next command is parsed.
Agilent 4155C/4156C GPIB Command Reference, Edition 6
2-55
4145B Syntax Command Set
TI
TI
Triggers current measurement by specified unit, then outputs measurement result
data to controller.
Syntax
TI channel_number
Parameter
Parameter
channel_number
Explanation
1: SMU1, 2: SMU2, 3: SMU3, 4: SMU4,
7: SMU5, 8: SMU6
Response
status channel I value <terminator>
Response
Explanation
(data) status
N|T|C|P|X|V
N: Normal
T: Other channel compliance error
C: This channel compliance error
P: PG exceeding current limit error
X: Oscillation
V: ADC overflow
channel
A|B|C|D|G|H
A: SMU1
B: SMU2
C: SMU3
D: SMU4
G: SMU5
H: SMU6
value
4145 compatible format or IEEE488.2 <NR3
NUMERIC RESPONSE DATA> format. Selected by
DP command.
<terminator>
<CR> + <LF> with or without EOI. Selected by EI
command.
2-56
Agilent 4155C/4156C GPIB Command Reference, Edition 6
4145B Syntax Command Set
TI
Description
The 4155C/4156C has up to 6 SMUs (depending on the configuration).
The command applies the range and resolution specifications of the 4155C/4156C
for the measurement.
Example
OUTPUT @Hp4155;"TI7"
ENTER @Hp4155 USING "A,A,A,K";S$,C$,M$,V
Response in the 4145 compatible format:
NGI 7.6543E-03<CR><LF>^<END>
Response in NR3 format:
NGI+7.654321E-003<CR><LF>^<END>
Agilent 4155C/4156C GPIB Command Reference, Edition 6
2-57
4145B Syntax Command Set
TV
TV
Triggers voltage measurement by specified unit, then outputs measurement result
data to controller.
Syntax
TV channel_number
Parameter
Parameter
channel_number
Response
Explanation
1: SMU1, 2: SMU2, 3: SMU3, 4: SMU4,
5: VMU1, 6: VMU2, 7: SMU5, 8: SMU6
status channel V value <terminator>
Response
Explanation
(data) status
N|T|C|P|X|V
N: Normal
T: Other channel compliance error
C: This channel compliance error
P: PG exceeding current limit error
X: Oscillation
V: ADC overflow
channel
A|B|C|D|G|H
A: SMU1
B: SMU2
C: SMU3
D: SMU4
E: VMU1
F: VMU2
G: SMU5
H: SMU6
value
4145 compatible format or IEEE488.2 <NR3
NUMERIC RESPONSE DATA> format. Selected by
DP command.
<terminator>
<CR> + <LF> with or without EOI. Selected by EI
command.
2-58
Agilent 4155C/4156C GPIB Command Reference, Edition 6
4145B Syntax Command Set
TV
Description
The 4155C/4156C has up to 6 SMUs (depending on the configuration).
The command applies the range and resolution specifications of the 4155C/4156C
for the measurement.
Example
OUTPUT @Hp4155;"TV2"
ENTER @Hp4155 USING "A,A,A,K";S$,C$,M$,V
Response in the 4145 compatible format:
NBV1.2345E+00<CR><LF>^<END>
Response in NR3 format:
NBV+1.234567E+000<CR><LF>^<END>
Agilent 4155C/4156C GPIB Command Reference, Edition 6
2-59
4145B Syntax Command Set
HP-GL Commands
HP-GL Commands
The following User Mode HP-GL Commands (VECTOR, CHARACTER, LINE
TYPE, AXES, SETUP, and CONFIGURATION & STATUS Groups) are not
supported. However, inputting these commands does not generate an error. Input
until the next terminator (';' or CR or LF) is ignored. For example, if the line
"PU;DE" were sent, only DE would be executed.
VECTOR Group
•
PU (Pen Up)
• PD (Pen Down)
• PA (Plot Absolute)
• PR (Plot Relative)
CHARACTER Group
• CS (Designates Standard Character Set)
• LB (Label)
• DR (Relative Direction)
• SR (Relative Character Size)
• CP (Character Plot)
LINE TYPE Group
• LT (Line Type)
• SP (Pen Select)
• VS (Velocity Select)
AXES Group
• XT (X Tick)
• YT (Y Tick)
SETUP Group
• IP (Input P1 and P2)
• OP (Output P1 and P2)
• IW (Input Window)
CONFIGURATION and STATUS Group
• DF (Default)
• IN (Initialize)
• IM (Input Mask)
• OE (Output Error)
• OS (Output Status)
2-60
Agilent 4155C/4156C GPIB Command Reference, Edition 6
4145B Syntax Command Set
Common Mode Commands
Table 2-4
Common Mode Commands
Command
Description
BC
GPIB Data Output Buffer Clear
CA
Auto-Calibration
CMD?
Command Mode
DC
Calibration on Device Clear
DL
Delimiter
DP
Double Precision
DR
Data Ready Service Request
EI
Terminator
ID
Identification Output
IT
Integration Time
PF
Print/Plot Function Abort
PL
Plotting Function
SF
Self-Test
Agilent 4155C/4156C GPIB Command Reference, Edition 6
2-61
4145B Syntax Command Set
BC
BC
This command clears the GPIB data output buffer and bit 1 (Data Ready) of the
4145B syntax mode status byte.
Syntax
BC
Description
A Buffer Clear must be performed before data output.
Corresponding
Command
No 4155C/4156C command exactly corresponds to the BC command.
On the 4155C/4156C, Device Clear performs this operation.
2-62
Agilent 4155C/4156C GPIB Command Reference, Edition 6
4145B Syntax Command Set
CA
CA
Auto-Calibration
Syntax
CA auto-calibration
Parameters
Parameter
auto-calibration
Explanation
0: off
1: on
Description
For System Mode, CA1 enables auto-calibration.
For User Mode, CA1 performs calibration immediately, but does not enable
auto-calibration.
If the mode changes (SYSTEM to USER or USER to SYSTEM), auto-calibration is
turned off.
Example
OUTPUT @Hp4155;"CA1"
Execution
Conditions
To perform the calibration properly, the measurement terminals should be opened
before starting the calibration.
If the auto-calibration is enabled, do not forget to open the measurement terminals
or to disconnect the device under test from the measurement terminals after the
measurements.
Corresponding
Commands
:CAL:AUTO ON | OFF
This command enables/disables auto-calibration only; does not actually perform
calibration.
No 4155C/4156C command exactly corresponds to CA command.
The *CAL? query performs calibration, and returns result response. The CA
command does not return the result response.
Agilent 4155C/4156C GPIB Command Reference, Edition 6
2-63
4145B Syntax Command Set
CMD?
CMD?
This command returns the 4155C/4156C’s control language mode set now. This
command has query form only.
Syntax
CMD?
Response
language_mode <terminator>
language_mode is NR1 response data type.
<terminator> depends on the language mode.
The values of language_mode and <terminator> are as follows:
Value
Example
Control Language Mode
<terminator>
0
SCPI command control mode
<LF^EOI>
1
Agilent FLEX command control mode
(US mode or US42 mode)
<LF^EOI>
2
4145 syntax command control mode
<CR/LF^EOI>
OUTPUT @Hp4155;"CMD?”
ENTER @Hp4155;A
2-64
Agilent 4155C/4156C GPIB Command Reference, Edition 6
4145B Syntax Command Set
DC
DC
This command selects whether the calibration is performed or not on sending
Device Clear.
Syntax
DC calibration
Parameters
Parameter
calibration
Explanation
1: does not perform calibration
2: performs calibration
Description
Default setting is 1.
Example
OUTPUT @Hp4155;"DC2"
Agilent 4155C/4156C GPIB Command Reference, Edition 6
2-65
4145B Syntax Command Set
DL
DL
This command selects delimiter of output data.
Syntax
DL delimiter
Parameter
Parameter
delimiter
Explanation
1: comma
2: <CR><LF>
Description
This command selects data delimiter of output data specified by DO command in
System mode.
Default setting is comma (DL1).
Example
OUTPUT @Hp4155;"DL2"
OUTPUT @Hp4155;"DO 'NAME'"
ENTER @Hp4155;A(*)
Response:
N 0.0000E+00<CR><LF>N 100.00E-03<CR><LF>N 200.00E-03<CR>
<LF>^<END>
2-66
Agilent 4155C/4156C GPIB Command Reference, Edition 6
4145B Syntax Command Set
DP
DP
This command selects precision of output data.
Device Clear does not affect the setting of this command.
Syntax
DP double_precision
Parameter
Parameter
double_precision
Explanation
0: 4145 compatible format
1: double precision (NR3 format)
Description
In the 4145 syntax command mode, default data length of response data
corresponding to DO, TI, and TV commands is same as the 4145. DP command can
change the data length of response data to double precision, which is standard data
precision of the 4155C/4156C.
Double precision format of response data for each command is as follows:
•
DO (System mode)
X±N.NNNNNNE±NNN<delimiter> ... X±N.NNNNNNE±NNN<CR><LF>^<
END>
where,
X: Data Status
N: Measurement Data
•
TV or TI (User mode)
XXX±N.NNNNNNE±NNN<CR><LF>^<END>
where,
X: Data Status
N: Measurement Data
Agilent 4155C/4156C GPIB Command Reference, Edition 6
2-67
4145B Syntax Command Set
DR
DR
Enables the Data Ready Service Request.
Syntax
DR service_request
Parameters
Parameter
service_request
Explanation
0: off
1: on
Description
If Data Ready Service Request is on, bit 1 (Data Ready) and bit 7 (RQS) of the
4145B syntax mode status byte are set to 1 when measurement data is valid.
If Data Ready Service Request is off, only bit 1 (Data Ready) of the 4145B syntax
mode status byte is set to 1 when measurement data is valid.
Corresponding
Command
No 4155C/4156C command exactly corresponds to the DR command.
:STAT:OPER:ENAB causes the 4155C/4156C to perform a similar operation, but on
a different status register.
2-68
Agilent 4155C/4156C GPIB Command Reference, Edition 6
4145B Syntax Command Set
EI
EI
This command selects data terminator of output data.
Syntax
EI terminator
Parameters
Parameter
terminator
Explanation
0: <CR><LF>
1: <CR><LF> with EOI, where EOI means ^<END>
Description
Default setting is 1.
Example
OUTPUT @Hp4155;"EI0"
Agilent 4155C/4156C GPIB Command Reference, Edition 6
2-69
4145B Syntax Command Set
ID
ID
Returns the identification string, which contains the 4155C/4156C model and
revision numbers.
Syntax
ID
Response
HEWLETT-PACKARD,model#,0,HOSTC_rev:SMUC_rev:ADC_rev<term>
Response
Example
Explanation
Model#
4155C | 4156C
HOSTC_rev
nn.nn
SMUC_rev
nn.nn
ADC_rev
nn.nn
<term>
<CR> + <LF> with or without EOI. Selected by EI
command.
DIM A$[101]
OUTPUT @Hp4155;"ID"
ENTER @Hp4155;A$
Response:
HEWLETT-PACKARD,4155C,0,01.00:01.00:01.00<CR><LF>^<END>
NOTE
For the 4145A/B, ID returns 16 characters. For the 4155C/4156C, ID returns 41
characters. So, you need to make sure the data string variable is large enough to
contain the returned characters.
Corresponding
Command
*IDN?
2-70
for query
Agilent 4155C/4156C GPIB Command Reference, Edition 6
4145B Syntax Command Set
IT
IT
This command sets the integration time to SHORT, MEDIUM or LONG, according
to the 4155C/4156C integration time definition; does not comply with the 4145A/B
integration time definition.
Syntax
IT integ_time
Parameter
Parameter
integ_time
Explanation
1: SHORT
2: MEDIUM
3: LONG
Description
The 4155C/4156C setting for SHORT and LONG integration time is effective for
the 4145B syntax mode. There is no way to change these values from the 4145B
syntax command set. However, these values are reset to default when the
4155C/4156C switches to the 4145B syntax mode. So, these values are default
values until operator changes the values at front panel after 4155C/4156C has
switched into the 4145B syntax mode.
Example
OUTPUT @Hp4155;"IT1"
Corresponding
Command
:PAGE:MEAS:MSET:ITIM SHOR | MED | LONG
Agilent 4155C/4156C GPIB Command Reference, Edition 6
2-71
4145B Syntax Command Set
PF
PF
This command aborts the printing or plotting that is currently being performed.
Syntax
PF
Corresponding
Command
:HCOP:ABOR
2-72
Agilent 4155C/4156C GPIB Command Reference, Edition 6
4145B Syntax Command Set
PL
PL
This command calculates and sets up the 4155C/4156C Output Region according to
the specified parameters and the paper size.
Syntax
PL x_min,y_min,x_max,y_max
Parameters
Parameter
Description
Explanation
x_min (value)
0 to 65535
y_min (value)
0 to 65535
x_max (value)
0 to 65535
y_max (value)
0 to 65535
If the calculation result exceeds 100%, it will be rounded down to 100%.
After setting the Output Region, the command switches the hard copy language to
HP-GL, then starts plotting the present screen.
This command does not affect any print/plot parameters except the hard copy
language.
Plot format is compatible with the 4155C/4156C.
Corresponding
Commands
:HCOP:PAGE:DIM:LLEF x,y
:HCOP:PAGE:DIM:URIG x,y
:HCOP:DEV:LANG HPGL
:HCOP:ITEM:ALL
Agilent 4155C/4156C GPIB Command Reference, Edition 6
2-73
4145B Syntax Command Set
SF
SF
Executes the built-in self-test of the 4155C/4156C.
Syntax
SF
Description
Bit 3 of the 4145B syntax mode status byte is set when self-test is completed.
Example
OUTPUT @Hp4155;"SF"
Corresponding
Command
:DIAG:TEST 111
2-74
Agilent 4155C/4156C GPIB Command Reference, Edition 6
Was this manual useful for you? yes no
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the work of artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Download PDF

advertising